Electrical engineering Books
Taylor & Francis Inc Passive Active and Digital Filters
Book SynopsisA reference to the key concepts, models, and equations useful to analyze, design, and predict the behavior of large-scale systems that employ various types of filters. It discusses general characteristics of filters, frequency transformations, sensitivity and selectivity, low-gain active filters, and higher-order filters.Table of ContentsPASSIVE FILTERS. General Characteristics of Filters. Approximation. Frequency Transformations. Sensitivity and Selectivity. Passive Immittances and Positive-Real Functions. Passive Cascade Synthesis. Synthesis of LCM and RC One-Port Networks. Two-Port Synthesis by Ladder Development. Design of Resistively Terminated Networks. Design of Broadband Matching Networks. ACTIVE FILTERS. Low-Gain Active Filters. Single-Amplifier Multiple-Feedback Filters. Multiple-Amplifier Biquads. The Current Generalized Immittance Converter (CGIC) Biquads. Higher-Order Filters. Continuous-Time Integrated Filters. Switched Capacitor Filters. DIGITAL FILTERS. FIR Filters. IIR Filters. Finite Wordlength Effects. Aliasing-Free Reconstruction Filter Bank. VLSI Implementation of Digital Filters. Two-Dimensional FIR Filters. Two-Dimensional IIR Filters. Symmetry and 2-D Filter Design. Index.
£104.50
Taylor & Francis Inc HighFrequency and Microwave Circuit Design
Book SynopsisAn integral part of any communications system, high-frequency and microwave design stimulates major progress in the wireless world and continues to serve as a foundation for the commercial wireless products we use every day. The exceptional pace of advancement in developing these systems stipulates that engineers be well versed in multiple areas of electronics engineering. With more illustrations, examples, and worked problems, High-Frequency and Microwave Circuit Design, Second Edition provides engineers with a diverse body of knowledge they can use to meet the needs of this rapidly progressing field.The book details the modulation and demodulation of circuits and relates resonant circuits to practical needs. The author provides a logical progression of material that moves from medium frequencies to microwave frequencies. He introduces rectangular waveguides as high-pass devices and explains conditions under which dielectric breakdown may limit the amount of power thatTable of ContentsFrom Lumped to Distributed Parameters. Waveguides. Impedance Matching Techniques. Scattering Coefficients of Twoports. Selective Circuits and Oscillators. Modulation and Demodulation Circuitry. Thermal Noise and Amplifier Noise Figure. Antennas and Antenna Systems. Appendix
£84.99
Taylor & Francis Ltd Millimeter Wave Technology in Wireless Pan LAN
Book SynopsisDriven by the demand for high-data-rate, millimeter wave technologies with broad bandwidth are being explored in high-speed wireless communications. These technologies include gigabit wireless personal area networks (WPAN), high-speed wireless local area networks (WLAN), and high-speed wireless metropolitan area networks (WMAN). As a result of this technological push, standard organizations are actively calling for specifications of millimeter wave applications in the above wireless systems.Providing the guidance needed to help you navigate through these new technologies, Millimeter Wave Technology in Wireless PAN, LAN, and MAN covers the fundamental concepts, recent advances, and potential that these millimeter wave technologies will offer with respect to circuits design, system architecture, protocol development, and standardization activities. The book presents essential challenges and solutions related to topics that include millimeter wave monolithic integrated circuit (MMIC), packaging technology of millimeter wave system and circuits, and millimeter wave channel models. With numerous figures, tables and references, this text allows speedy access to the fundamental problems, key challenges, open issues, future directions, and further readings on millimeter wave technologies in relation to WPAN, WLAN, and WMAN.Table of ContentsMillimeter-Wave Monolithic Integrated Circuit for Wireless LAN. Package Technology for Millimeter-Wave Circuits and Systems. Antennas and Channel Modelling In Millimeter Waves Wireless PAN, LAN AND MAN. MAC Protocols for Millimeter-Wave Wireless LAN and PAN. Millimeter-Wave for Wireless Networks. The Wimedia Standard for Wireless Personal Area Networks. Millimeter-Wave Based IEEE 802.16 Wireless Man. Millimeter-Wave Dedicated Short Range Communications (DSRC): Standard, Application and Experiment Study. Interference in Millimeter-Wave Wireless Man Cellular Configurations. Millimeter-Wave Radar: Principles and Applications. Optical Generation and Transmission of Millimeter-Wave Signals.
£142.50
Taylor & Francis Inc Wireless Multimedia Communications Convergence
Book SynopsisWith the rapid evolution of multimedia communications, engineers and other professionals are generally forced to hoard a plethora of different texts and journals to maintain a solid grasp on essential ideas and techniques in the field. Wireless Multimedia Communications provides researchers and students with a primary reference to help readers take maximum advantage of current systems and uncover opportunities to propose new and novel protocols, applications, and services. Extract the Essentials of System Design, Analysis, ImplementationA complete technical reference, the text condenses the essential topics of core wireless multimedia communication technologies, convergence, QoS, and security that apply to everything from networking to communications systems, signal processing, and security. From extensive existing literature, the authors distill the central tenets and primary methods of analysis, design, and implementation, to reflect the latest technoloTable of ContentsIntroduction to Wireless Networking. Convergence Technologies. Wireless Video. Wireless Multimedia Services and Applications. Wireless Networking Standards (WLAN, WPAN, WMAN, WWAN). Advances in Wireless Video. Cross-Layer Wireless Multimedia. Mobile Internet. Evolution toward 4G Networks.
£155.00
Taylor & Francis Inc PhaseLocked Loops Theory and Applications
Book SynopsisApplications of phase-locked loops play an increasingly important role in modern electronic systems, and the last 25 years have seen new developments in the underlying theories as well.Phase-Locked Loops presents the latest information on the basic theory and applications of PLLs. Organized in a logical format, it first introduces the subject in a qualitative manner and discusses key applications. Next, it develops basic models for components of a PLL, and these are used to develop a basic PLL model. The text then discusses both linear and nonlinear methods that are used to analyze the basic PLL model.This book includes extensive coverage of the nonlinear behavior of phase-locked loops, an important area of this field and one where exciting new research is being performed. No other book available covers this critical area in such careful detail. Improvements brought about by the advent of the personal computer, especially in the use of numerical results, are integrated into theTable of ContentsElementary Theory and Applications: Introduction. Modeling the Phase-Locked Loop. Linear Analysis of Common First- and Second-Order PLL. Phase-Locked Loop Components and Technologies. Nonlinear PLL Analysis: Nonlinear PLL Behavior in the Absence of Noise. Stochastic Methods for the Nonlinear PLL Model. Noise in the Nonlinear PLL Model. Numerical Methods for Noise Analysis in the Nonlinear PLL Model. Appendixes. References. Back Cover Copy
£999.99
Taylor & Francis Inc Fusion of Neural Networks Fuzzy Systems and
Book SynopsisArtificial neural networks can mimic the biological information-processing mechanism in - a very limited sense. Fuzzy logic provides a basis for representing uncertain and imprecise knowledge and forms a basis for human reasoning. Neural networks display genuine promise in solving problems, but a definitive theoretical basis does not yet exist for their design.Fusion of Neural Networks, Fuzzy Systems and Genetic Algorithms integrates neural net, fuzzy system, and evolutionary computing in system design that enables its readers to handle complexity - offsetting the demerits of one paradigm by the merits of another.This book presents specific projects where fusion techniques have been applied. The chapters start with the design of a new fuzzy-neural controller. Remaining chapters discuss the application of expert systems, neural networks, fuzzy control, and evolutionary computing techniques in modern engineering systems. These specific applications include:direct frequTable of ContentsPrefaceIntroduction to Knowledge-Based Engineering, N.M. Martin and L.C. Jain, AustraliaA New Fuzzy-Neural Controller, K. Shimojima and T. Fukuda, JapanExpert Knowledge-Based Direct Frequency Converter Using Fuzzy Logic Control, E. Wiechmann and R Burgos, ChileDesign of an Electro-Hydraulic System Using Neuro-Fuzzy Techniques, P.J. Costa Branco and J.A Dente, PortugalNeural Fuzzy Based Intelligent Systems and Applications, E. Khan, United StatesVehicle Routing through Simulation of Natural Processes, J.-Y. Potvin, Canada and S.R. Thangiah, United StatesFuzzy Logic and Neural Networks in Fault Detection, B. Koppen-Seliger and P.M. Frank, GermanyApplication of the Neural Network and Fuzzy Logic to the Rotating Machine Diagnosis, M. Tanaka, JapanFuzzy Expert Systems in ATM Networks, C. Douligeris and S. Palazzo, ItalyMultimedia Telephone for Hard Hearing People, F. Lavagetto, ItalyMultiobjective Evolutionary Algorithms in Gas Turbine Aero-Engine Control, A. Chipperfield, P. Fleming, and H. Betteridge, United KingdomApplication of Genetic Algorithms in Telecommunication System Design, V. Sinkovic, I. Lovrek, and B. Mikac, Croatia
£194.75
Taylor & Francis Ltd Meaningful Futures with Robots
Book SynopsisSoon, robots will leave the factories and make their way into living rooms, supermarkets, and care facilities. They will cooperate with humans in everyday life, taking on more than just practical tasks. How should they communicate with us? Do they need eyes, a screen, or arms? Should they resemble humans? Or may they enrich social situations precisely because they act so differently from humans?Meaningful Futures with Robots: Designing a New Coexistence provides insight into the opportunities and risks that arise from living with robots in the future, anchored in current research projects on everyday robotics. As well as generating ideas for robot developers and designers, it also critically discusses existing theories and methods for social robotics from different perspectives - ethical, design, artistical and technological â and presents new approaches to meaningful human-robot interaction design.Key Features: Provides insights into current Table of Contents1. Towards Designing Meaningful Relationships with Robots 2. Concept and Content of the Book Part 1 Designing a New Species Interaction Design and Product Design of Robots 3. How to Design Robots with Superpowers Robin Neuhaus, Ronda Ringfort Felner, Judith Dörrenbächer, Marc Hassenzahl 4. Social Robots Should Mediate, not Replace, Social Interactions Timo Kaerlein 5. Neither Human Nor Computer —A Symbiotic Human-Robot Collaboration in Autism Therapy Ronda Ringfort-Felner, Judith Dörrenbächer 6. Counting Characters and Spaces—On Robot Disabilities, Robot Care, and Technological Dependencies Lenneke Kuijer 7. Designing Robots with Personality Lara Christoforakos, Sarah Diefenbach, Daniel Ullrich 8. Designing Robots as Social Counterparts— A Discussion about a Technology Claiming its Own Needs Lara Christoforakos, Tobias Störzinger 9. Falling in Love With a Machine— What Happens if the Only Affection a Person Gets is From Machines? Felix Carros (F.C.), Anne Wierling (A.W.), Adrian Preussner (A.P.) 10. I am Listening to You!—How to Make Different Robotic Species Speak the Same Language Judith Dörrenbächer, Anne Wierling 11. How to Really Get in Touch with Robots—Haptic Interaction Technologies for VR and Teleoperation Bernhard Weber, Thomas Hulin, Lisa Schiffer Part 2 Designing Future Enviroments—Social Innovation Initiated by Robots 12. Design Fiction—The Future of Robots Needs Imagination Ronda Ringfort-Felner, Robin Neuhaus, Judith Dörrenbächer, Marc Hassenzahl 13. Cramer’s Funeral Service for Androids Uwe Post 14. Googly Eyes Marc Hassenzahl 15 Empathizing with Robots—Animistic and Performative Methods to Anticipate a Robot’s Impact Judith Dörrenbächer, Marc Hassenzahl 16. From the Lab to a Real-World Supermarket— About Anticipating the Chances and Challenges of a Shopping Robot Robin Neuhaus, Judith Dörrenbächer 17. Dominant, Persuasive or Polite?— About Human Curiosity, Provocative Users and Solving Conflicts between Humans and Robots Judith Dörrenbächer 18. Seven Observations, or Why Domestic Robots are Struggling to Enter the Habitats of Everyday Life James Auger 19. Is this a Patient or a Wall?— Adapting Robots from an Industrial Context to a Rehabilitation Clinic Jochen Feitsch, Bernhard Weber 20. Robotics x Book Studies Imagining a Robotic Archive of Embodied Knowledge Corinna Norrick-Rühl 21. "That’s the Future, I’m Telling You.” Antje Herden 22. Graphic Recording Cool Johanna Benz Part 3 Designing together with People— Civic Participation and Ethical Implications Concerning Robots 23. Citizen Participation in Social Robotics Research Felix Carros, Johanna Langendorf, Dave Randall, Rainer Wieching, Volker Wulf 24. Learning from Each Other— How Roboticists Learn from Users and how Users Teach their Robots Felix Carros, Adrian Preussner 25. My Friend Simsala, the Robot Edi Haug, Laura M. Schwengber 26. Move Away from the Stereotypical User in the Picture-perfect Scenario—A Plea for Early and Broad User Integration Stephanie Häusler Weiss, Kilian Röhm, Tobias Störzinger 27. Is it Good?— A Philosophical Approach Towards Ethics Centered- Design (ECD) Catrin Misselhorn, Manuel Scheidegger, Tobias Störzinger 28. Are Robots Good at Everything? A Robot in an Elementary School Elke Buttgereit 29. The Medium has a Message Educational Robots in a Didactic Triangle Scarlet Schaffrath 30. The Friendly Siblings of Workhorses and Killer Robots—About Becoming Alive Through the Nonliving, and Feeling Blessed by a Religious Machine Ilona Nord
£120.00
Cambridge University Press Smartphone Energy Consumption
Book SynopsisWith an ever-increasing number of applications available for mobile devices, battery life is becoming a critical factor in user satisfaction. This practical guide provides you with the key measurement, modeling, and analytical tools needed to optimize battery life by developing energy-aware and energy-efficient systems and applications. As well as the necessary theoretical background and results of the field, this hands-on book also provides real-world examples, practical guidance on assessing and optimizing energy consumption, and details of prototypes and possible future trends. Uniquely, you will learn about energy optimization of both hardware and software in one book, enabling you to get the most from the available battery power. Covering experimental system design and implementation, the book supports assignment-based courses with a laboratory component, making it an ideal textbook for graduate students. It is also a perfect guidebook for software engineers and systems architectsTrade Review'Energy is a vital resource for mobile computing. This book gives a comprehensive treatment of energy from the viewpoint of battery-powered mobile devices. A broad range of topics is covered, and each topic is discussed in depth. This book will be a valuable resource for graduate students and mobile system engineers.' Mahadev Satyanarayanan, Carnegie Mellon UniversityTable of ContentsPart I. Understanding Energy Consumption: 1. Introduction; 2. Energy and power primer; 3. Smartphone batteries; 4. Energy measurement; 5. On human behavior and energy efficiency; Part II. Energy Management and Conservation: 6. Overview; 7. Smartphone subsystems; 8. Mobile operating systems; 9. Power modeling; 10. Power profilers; Part III. Advanced Energy Optimization: 11. Overview; 12. Traffic scheduling; 13. Exploiting multiple wireless network interfaces; 14. Mobile cloud offloading; 15. Example scenarios for energy optimization; 16. Future trends; Appendix A. An energy profile application.
£62.99
John Wiley & Sons Inc Analysis of Electric Machinery and Drive Systems
Book SynopsisIntroducing a new edition of the popular reference on machine analysis Now in a fully revised and expanded edition, this widely used reference on machine analysis boasts many changes designed to address the varied needs of engineers in the electric machinery, electric drives, and electric power industries. The authors draw on their own extensive research efforts, bringing all topics up to date and outlining a variety of new approaches they have developed over the past decade. Focusing on reference frame theory that has been at the core of this work since the first edition, this volume goes a step further, introducing new material relevant to machine design along with numerous techniques for making the derivation of equations more direct and easy to use. Coverage includes: Completely new chapters on winding functions and machine design that add a significant dimension not found in any other text A new formulation of machine equations for impTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 THEORY OF ELECTROMECHANICAL ENERGY CONVERSION 1 1.1. Introduction 1 1.2. Magnetically Coupled Circuits 1 1.3. Electromechanical Energy Conversion 12 1.4. Elementary ac Machines 35 2 DISTRIBUTED WINDINGS IN AC MACHINERY 53 2.1. Introduction 53 2.2. Describing Distributed Windings 54 2.3. Winding Functions 64 2.4. Air-Gap Magnetomotive Force 67 2.5. Rotating MMF 71 2.6. Flux Linkage and Inductance 73 2.7. Resistance 76 2.8. Voltage and Flux Linkage Equations for Distributed Winding Machines 77 3 REFERENCE-FRAME THEORY 86 3.1. Introduction 86 3.2. Background 87 3.3. Equations of Transformation: Change of Variables 88 3.4. Stationary Circuit Variables Transformed to the Arbitrary Reference Frame 90 3.5. Commonly Used Reference Frames 97 3.6. Transformation of a Balanced Set 98 3.7. Balanced Steady-State Phasor Relationships 99 3.8. Balanced Steady-State Voltage Equations 102 3.9. Variables Observed from Several Frames of Reference 105 3.10. Transformation Between Reference Frames 110 3.11. Specialty Transformations 111 3.12. Space-Phasor Notation 113 4 PERMANENT-MAGNET AC MACHINES 121 4.1. Introduction 121 4.2. Voltage and Torque Equations in Machine Variables 122 4.3. Voltage and Torque Equations in Rotor Reference-Frame Variables 125 4.4. Analysis of Steady-State Operation 127 4.5. Brushless dc Motor 129 4.6. Phase Shifting of Applied Voltages of a Permanent-Magnet ac Machine 134 4.7. Control of Stator Currents 138 5 SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES 142 5.1. Introduction 142 5.2. Voltage Equations in Machine Variables 143 5.3. Torque Equation in Machine Variables 149 5.4. Stator Voltage Equations in Arbitrary Reference-Frame Variables 149 5.5. Voltage Equations in Rotor Reference-Frame Variables 151 5.6. Torque Equations in Substitute Variables 157 5.7. Rotor Angle and Angle Between Rotors 158 5.8. Per Unit System 159 5.9. Analysis of Steady-State Operation 160 5.10. Stator Currents Positive Out of Machine: Synchronous Generator Operation 171 5.11. Computer Simulation 201 6 SYMMETRICAL INDUCTION MACHINES 215 6.1. Introduction 215 6.2. Voltage Equations in Machine Variables 216 6.3. Torque Equation in Machine Variables 220 6.4. Equations of Transformation for Rotor Circuits 222 6.5. Voltage Equations in Arbitrary Reference-Frame Variables 224 6.6. Torque Equation in Arbitrary Reference-Frame Variables 229 6.7. Commonly Used Reference Frames 232 6.8. Per Unit System 233 6.9. Analysis of Steady-State Operation 235 6.10. Free Acceleration Characteristics 244 6.11. Free Acceleration Characteristics Viewed from Various Reference Frames 251 6.12. Dynamic Performance During Sudden Changes in Load Torque 257 6.13. Dynamic Performance During a Three-Phase Fault at the Machine Terminals 260 6.14. Computer Simulation in the Arbitrary Reference Frame 261 7 MACHINE EQUATIONS IN OPERATIONAL IMPEDANCES AND TIME CONSTANTS 271 7.1. Introduction 271 7.2. Park’s Equations in Operational Form 272 7.3. Operational Impedances and G( p) for a Synchronous Machine with Four Rotor Windings 273 7.4. Standard Synchronous Machine Reactances 276 7.5. Standard Synchronous Machine Time Constants 278 7.6. Derived Synchronous Machine Time Constants 278 7.7. Parameters from Short-Circuit Characteristics 283 7.8. Parameters from Frequency-Response Characteristics 290 8 ALTERNATIVE FORMS OF MACHINE EQUATIONS 299 8.1. Introduction 299 8.2. Machine Equations to Be Linearized 300 8.3. Linearization of Machine Equations 302 8.4. Small-Displacement Stability: Eigenvalues 308 8.5. Eigenvalues of Typical Induction Machines 309 8.6. Eigenvalues of Typical Synchronous Machines 312 8.7. Neglecting Electric Transients of Stator Voltage Equations 313 8.8. Induction Machine Performance Predicted with Stator Electric Transients Neglected 318 8.9. Synchronous Machine Performance Predicted with Stator Electric Transients Neglected 322 8.10. Detailed Voltage Behind Reactance Model 325 8.11. Reduced Order Voltage Behind Reactance Model 332 9 UNBALANCED OPERATION AND SINGLE-PHASE INDUCTION MACHINES 336 9.1. Introduction 336 9.2. Symmetrical Component Theory 337 9.3. Symmetrical Component Analysis of Induction Machines 338 9.4. Unbalanced Stator Conditions of Induction Machines: Reference-Frame Analysis 339 9.5. Typical Unbalanced Stator Conditions of Induction Machines 346 9.6. Unbalanced Rotor Conditions of Induction Machines 351 9.7. Unbalanced Rotor Resistors 354 9.8. Single-Phase Induction Machines 358 9.9. Asynchronous and Unbalanced Operation of Synchronous Machines 368 10 DC MACHINES AND DRIVES 377 10.1. Introduction 377 10.2. Elementary dc Machine 377 10.3. Voltage and Torque Equations 384 10.4. Basic Types of dc Machines 386 10.5. Time-Domain Block Diagrams and State Equations 394 10.6. Solid-State Converters for dc Drive Systems 398 10.7. One-Quadrant dc/dc Converter Drive 400 10.8. Two-Quadrant dc/dc Converter Drive 418 10.9. Four-Quadrant dc/dc Converter Drive 421 10.10. Machine Control with Voltage-Controlled dc/dc Converter 423 10.11. Machine Control with Current-Controlled dc/dc Converter 426 11 SEMI-CONTROLLED BRIDGE CONVERTERS 434 11.1. Introduction 434 11.2. Single-Phase Load Commutated Converter 434 11.3. Three-Phase Load Commutated Converter 445 11.4. Conclusions and Extensions 456 12 FULLY CONTROLLED THREE-PHASE BRIDGE CONVERTERS 460 12.1. Introduction 460 12.2. The Three-Phase Bridge Converter 460 12.3. Six-Step Operation 466 12.4. Six-Step Modulation 474 12.5. Sine-Triangle Modulation 477 12.6. Extended Sine-Triangle Modulation 483 12.7. Space-Vector Modulation 485 12.8. Hysteresis Modulation 489 12.9. Delta Modulation 492 12.10. Open-Loop Voltage and Current Regulation 493 12.11. Closed-Loop Voltage and Current Regulation 495 13 INDUCTION MOTOR DRIVES 503 13.1. Introduction 503 13.2. Volts-per-Hertz Control 504 13.3. Constant Slip Current Control 510 13.4. Field-Oriented Control 517 13.5. Direct Field-Oriented Control 521 13.6. Robust Direct Field-Oriented Control 523 13.7. Indirect Rotor Field-Oriented Control 528 13.8. Direct Torque Control 532 13.9. Slip Energy Recovery Drives 535 13.10. Conclusions 538 14 PERMANENT-MAGNET AC MOTOR DRIVES 541 14.1. Introduction 541 14.2. Voltage-Source Inverter Drives 542 14.3. Equivalence of Voltage-Source Inverters to an Idealized Source 543 14.4. Average-Value Analysis of Voltage-Source Inverter Drives 552 14.5. Steady-State Performance of Voltage-Source Inverter Drives 555 14.6. Transient and Dynamic Performance of Voltage-Source Inverter Drives 557 14.7. Case Study: Voltage-Source Inverter-Based Speed Control 562 14.8. Current-Regulated Inverter Drives 567 14.9. Voltage Limitations of Current-Regulated Inverter Drives 571 14.10. Current Command Synthesis 572 14.11. Average-Value Modeling of Current-Regulated Inverter Drives 576 14.12. Case Study: Current-Regulated Inverter-Based Speed Controller 578 15 INTRODUCTION TO THE DESIGN OF ELECTRIC MACHINERY 583 15.1. Introduction 583 15.2. Machine Geometry 585 15.3. Stator Windings 590 15.4. Material Parameters 593 15.5. Stator Currents and Control Philosophy 596 15.6. Radial Field Analysis 597 15.7. Lumped Parameters 602 15.8. Ferromagnetic Field Analysis 603 15.9. Formulation of Design Problem 609 15.10. Case Study 614 15.11. Extensions 618 Acknowledgments 619 References 620 Problems 621 Appendix A Trigonometric Relations, Constants and Conversion Factors, and Abbreviations 623 A.1. Basic Trigonometric Relations 623 A.2. Three-Phase Trigonometric Relations 624 A.3. Constants and Conversion Factors 624 A.4. Abbreviations 625 Appendix B Carter’s Coeffi cient 626 Appendix C Leakage Inductance 629 References 635 Index 636
£98.06
John Wiley & Sons Inc Electric Machines and Drives
Book SynopsisMohan's Electric Machines and Drives is part of a three-book series designed for the power sequence electives on Electrical Engineering. The book focuses on power topics including advances in hybrid-electric cars and alternative energy systems, coupled with severe environmental problems associated with hydrocarbon-based fuels.Table of ContentsPREFACE xi CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRIC DRIVE SYSTEMS 1 1.1 History 1 1.2 What Is an Electric-Motor Drive? 2 1.3 Factors Responsible for the Growth of Electric Drives 3 1.4 Typical Applications of Electric Drives 3 1.5 The Multi-Disciplinary Nature of Drive Systems 8 1.6 Structure of the Textbook 9 References 10 Problems 11 CHAPTER 2 UNDERSTANDING MECHANICAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRIC DRIVES 12 2.1 Introduction 12 2.2 Systems with Linear Motion 12 2.3 Rotating Systems 14 2.4 Friction 20 2.5 Torsional Resonances 21 2.6 Electrical Analogy 22 2.7 Coupling Mechanisms 23 2.8 Types of Loads 26 2.9 Four-Quadrant Operation 27 2.10 Steady State and Dynamic Operations 27 References 28 Problems 28 CHAPTER 3 REVIEW OF BASIC ELECTRIC CIRCUITS 31 3.1 Introduction 31 3.2 Phasor Representation in Sinusoidal Steady State 31 3.3 Three-Phase Circuits 38 Reference 43 Problems 43 CHAPTER 4 BASIC UNDERSTANDING OF SWITCH-MODE POWER ELECTRONIC CONVERTERS IN ELECTRIC DRIVES 46 4.1 Introduction 46 4.2 Overview of Power Processing Units (PPUs) 46 4.3 Converters for DC Motor Drives ð2Vd , vo , VdÞ 52 4.4 Synthesis of Low-Frequency AC 58 4.5 Three-Phase Inverters 59 4.6 Power Semiconductor Devices 62 References 66 Problems 66 CHAPTER 5 MAGNETIC CIRCUITS 69 5.1 Introduction 69 5.2 Magnetic Field Produced by Current-Carrying Conductors 69 5.3 Flux Density B and the Flux f 71 5.4 Magnetic Structures with Air Gaps 74 5.5 Inductances 76 5.6 Faraday’s Law: Induced Voltage in a Coil due to Time-Rate of Change of Flux Linkage 78 5.7 Leakage and Magnetizing Inductances 81 5.8 Transformers 83 5.9 Permanent Magnets 88 References 90 Problems 90 CHAPTER 6 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF ELECTROMECHANICAL ENERGY CONVERSION 92 6.1 Introduction 92 6.2 Basic Structure 92 6.3 Production of Magnetic Field 94 6.4 Basic Principles of Operation 96 6.5 Application of the Basic Principles 98 6.6 Energy Conversion 99 6.7 Power Losses and Energy Efficiency 101 6.8 Machine Ratings 102 References 103 Problems 103 CHAPTER 7 DC-MOTOR DRIVES AND ELECTRONICALLYCOMMUTATED MOTOR (ECM) DRIVES 108 7.1 Introduction 108 7.2 The Structure of DC Machines 109 7.3 Operating Principles of DC Machines 111 7.4 DC-Machine Equivalent Circuit 117 7.5 Various Operating Modes in DC-Motor Drives 119 7.6 Flux Weakening in Wound-Field Machines 122 7.7 Power-Processing Units in DC Drives 123 7.8 Electronically-Commutated Motor (ECM) Drives 123 References 129 Problems 129 CHAPTER 8 DESIGNING FEEDBACK CONTROLLERS FOR MOTOR DRIVES 132 8.1 Introduction 132 8.2 Control Objectives 132 8.3 Cascade Control Structure 135 8.4 Steps in Designing the Feedback Controller 135 8.5 System Representation for Small-Signal Analysis 136 8.6 Controller Design 138 8.7 Example of a Controller Design 139 8.8 The Role of Feed-Forward 145 8.9 Effects of Limits 145 8.10 Anti-Windup (Non-Windup) Integration 146 References 147 Problems and Simulations 147 CHAPTER 9 INTRODUCTION TO AC MACHINES AND SPACE VECTORS 149 9.1 Introduction 149 9.2 Sinusoidally-Distributed Stator Windings 149 9.3 The Use of Space Vectors to Represent Sinusoidal Field Distributions in the Air Gap 156 9.4 Space-Vector Representation of Combined Terminal Currents and Voltages 159 9.5 Balanced Sinusoidal Steady-State Excitation (Rotor Open-Circuited) 164 References 172 Problems 172 CHAPTER 10 SINUSOIDAL PERMANENT MAGNET AC (PMAC) DRIVES, LCI-SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR DRIVES, AND SYNCHRONOUS GENERATORS 174 10.1 Introduction 174 10.2 The Basic Structure of Permanent-Magnet AC (PMAC) Machines 175 10.3 Principle of Operation 175 10.4 The Controller and the Power-Processing Unit (PPU) 185 10.5 Load-Commutated-Inverter (LCI) Supplied Synchronous Motor Drives 186 10.6 Synchronous Generators 187 References 191 Problems 191 CHAPTER 11 INDUCTION MOTORS: BALANCED, SINUSOIDAL STEADY STATE OPERATION 193 11.1 Introduction 193 11.2 The Structure of Three-Phase, Squirrel-Cage Induction Motors 194 11.3 The Principles of Induction Motor Operation 194 11.4 Tests to Obtain the Parameters of the Per-Phase Equivalent Circuit 215 11.5 Induction Motor Characteristics at Rated Voltages in Magnitude and Frequency 216 11.6 Induction Motors of Nema Design A, B, C, and D 218 11.7 Line Start 219 11.8 Reduced Voltage Starting (“soft start”) of Induction Motors 220 11.9 Energy-Savings in Lightly-Loaded Machines 220 11.10 Doubly-Fed Induction Generators (DFIG) in Wind Turbines 221 References 228 Problems 229 CHAPTER 12 INDUCTION-MOTOR DRIVES: SPEED CONTROL 231 12.1 Introduction 231 12.2 Conditions for Efficient Speed Control Over a Wide Range 232 12.3 Applied Voltage Amplitudes to Keep ^ Bms 5 ^ Bms;rated 235 12.4 Starting Considerations in Drives 239 12.5 Capability to Operate below and above the Rated Speed 240 12.6 Induction-Generator Drives 242 12.7 Speed Control of Induction-Motor Drives 243 12.8 Pulse-Width-Modulated Power-Processing Unit 244 12.9 Reduction of ^ Bms at Light Loads 248 References 249 Problems 249 CHAPTER 13 RELUCTANCE DRIVES: STEPPER-MOTOR AND SWITCHED-RELUCTANCE DRIVES 250 13.1 Introduction 250 13.2 The Operating Principle of Reluctance Motors 251 13.3 Stepper-Motor Drives 253 13.4 Switched-Reluctance Motor Drives 259 References 260 Problems 260 CHAPTER 14 ENERGY EFFICIENCY OF ELECTRIC DRIVES AND INVERTER-MOTOR INTERACTIONS 261 14.1 Introduction 261 14.2 The Definition of Energy Efficiency in Electric Drives 261 14.3 The Energy Efficiency of Induction Motors with Sinusoidal Excitation 262 14.4 The Effects of Switching-Frequency Harmonics on Motor Losses 265 14.5 The Energy Efficiencies of Power-Processing Units 266 14.6 Energy Efficiencies of Electric Drives 266 14.7 The Economics of Energy Savings by Premium-Efficiency Electric Motors and Electric Drives 266 14.8 The Deleterious Effects of The PWM-Inverter Voltage Waveform on Motor Life 267 14.9 Benefits of Using Variable-Speed Drives 268 References 268 Problem 269
£153.85
John Wiley & Sons Inc Fuel Cells Second Edition
Book SynopsisThe comprehensive, accessible introduction to fuel cells, their applications, and the challenges they pose Fuel cells?electrochemical energy devices that produce electricity and heat?present a significant opportunity for cleaner, easier, and more practical energy. However, the excitement over fuel cells within the research community has led to such rapid innovation and development that it can be difficult for those not intimately familiar with the science involved to figure out exactly how this new technology can be used. Fuel Cells: Problems and Solutions, Second Edition addresses this issue head on, presenting the most important information about these remarkable power sources in an easy-to-understand way. Comprising four important sections, the book explores: The fundamentals of fuel cells, how they work, their history, and much more The major types of fuel cells, including proton exchange membrane fuel cells (PEMFC), direct liquidTrade Review“I enjoyed reading the book. From an academician point of view, the content and amount of material covered in this book makes it an ideal choice for a beginner-level undergraduate text.” (Nanomaterials and Energy, 6 November 2012)Table of ContentsPREFACE xi PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION xiii SYMBOLS xv ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS xvii PART I INTRODUCTION 1 Introduction 3 What Is a Fuel Cell? Definition of the Term, 3 Significance of Fuel Cells for the Economy, 3 1 The Working Principles of a Fuel Cell 5 1.1 Thermodynamic Aspects, 5 1.2 Schematic Layout of Fuel Cell Units, 9 1.3 Types of Fuel Cells, 13 1.4 Layout of a Real Fuel Cell: The Hydrogen–Oxygen Fuel Cell with Liquid Electrolyte, 13 1.5 Basic Parameters of Fuel Cells, 18 Reference, 24 2 The Long History of Fuel Cells 25 2.1 The Period Prior to 1894, 25 2.2 The Period from 1894 to 1960, 28 2.3 The Period from 1960 to the 1990s, 31 2.4 The Period After the 1990s, 37 References, 38 PART II MAJOR TYPES OF FUEL CELLS 41 3 Proton-Exchange Membrane Fuel Cells 43 3.1 History of the PEMFC, 44 3.2 Standard PEMFC Version from the 1990s, 47 3.3 Special Features of PEMFC Operation, 51 3.4 Platinum Catalyst Poisoning by Traces of CO in the Hydrogen, 54 3.5 Commercial Activities in Relation to PEMFCs, 56 3.6 Future Development of PEMFCs, 57 3.7 Elevated-Temperature PEMFCs, 64 References, 67 4 Direct Liquid Fuel Cells 71 Part A: Direct Methanol Fuel Cells, 71 4.1 Methanol as a Fuel for Fuel Cells, 71 4.2 Current-Producing Reactions and Thermodynamic Parameters, 72 4.3 Anodic Oxidation of Methanol, 72 4.4 Milestones in DMFC Development, 74 4.5 Membrane Penetration by Methanol (Methanol Crossover), 74 4.6 Varieties of DMFCs, 77 4.7 Special Operating Features of DMFCs, 79 4.8 Practical Models of DMFCs and Their Features, 81 4.9 Problems to Be Solved in Future DMFCs, 83 Part B: Direct Liquid Fuel Cells, 85 4.10 The Problem of Replacing Methanol, 85 4.11 Fuel Cells Using Organic Liquids as Fuels, 86 4.12 Fuel Cells Using Inorganic Liquids as Fuels, 91 References, 94 5 Phosphoric Acid Fuel Cells 99 5.1 Early Work on Phosphoric Acid Fuel Cells, 99 5.2 Special Features of Aqueous Phosphoric Acid Solutions, 100 5.3 Construction of PAFCs, 101 5.4 Commercial Production of PAFCs, 102 5.5 Development of Large Stationary Power Plants, 103 5.6 The Future of PAFCs, 103 5.7 Importance of PAFCs for Fuel Cell Development, 104 References, 105 6 Alkaline Fuel Cells 107 6.1 Hydrogen–Oxygen AFCs, 108 6.2 Alkaline Hydrazine Fuel Cells, 115 6.3 Anion-Exchange (Hydroxyl Ion–Conducting) Membranes, 118 6.4 Methanol Fuel Cells with Anion-Exchange Membranes, 119 6.5 Methanol Fuel Cell with an Invariant Alkaline Electrolyte, 120 6.6 Direct Ammonia Fuel Cell with an Anion-Exchange Membrane, 121 References, 121 7 Molten Carbonate Fuel Cells 123 7.1 Special Features of High-Temperature Fuel Cells, 123 7.2 Structure of Hydrogen–Oxygen MCFCs, 124 7.3 MCFCs with Internal Fuel Reforming, 126 7.4 Development of MCFC Work, 128 7.5 The Lifetime of MCFCs, 129 References, 131 8 Solid-Oxide Fuel Cells 133 8.1 Schematic Design of Conventional SOFCs, 134 8.2 Tubular SOFCs, 136 8.3 Planar SOFCs, 140 8.4 Monolithic SOFCs, 143 8.5 Varieties of SOFCs, 144 8.6 Utilization of Natural Fuels in SOFCs, 146 8.7 Interim-Temperature SOFCs, 148 8.8 Low-Temperature SOFCs, 152 8.9 Factors Influencing the Lifetime of SOFCs, 154 References, 156 9 Other Types of Fuel Cells 159 9.1 Redox Flow Cells, 159 9.2 Biological Fuel Cells, 162 9.3 Semi-Fuel Cells, 167 9.4 Direct Carbon Fuel Cells, 169 References, 174 10 Fuel Cells and Electrolysis Processes 177 10.1 Water Electrolysis, 177 10.2 Chlor-Alkali Electrolysis, 182 10.3 Electrochemical Synthesis Reactions, 185 References, 187 PART III INHERENT SCIENTIFIC AND ENGINEERING PROBLEMS 189 11 Fuel Management 191 11.1 Reforming of Natural Fuels, 192 11.2 Production of Hydrogen for Autonomous Power Plants, 196 11.3 Purification of Technical Hydrogen, 199 11.4 Hydrogen Transport and Storage, 202 References, 205 12 Electrocatalysis 207 12.1 Fundamentals of Electrocatalysis, 207 12.2 Putting Platinum Catalysts on the Electrodes, 211 12.3 Supports for Platinum Catalysts, 214 12.4 Platinum Alloys and Composites as Catalysts for Anodes, 217 12.5 Nonplatinum Catalysts for Fuel Cell Anodes, 220 12.6 Electrocatalysis of the Oxygen Reduction Reaction, 221 12.7 Stability of Electrocatalysts, 227 References, 228 13 Membranes 233 13.1 Fuel Cell–Related Membrane Problems, 234 13.2 Work to Overcome Degradation of Nafion Membranes, 235 13.3 Modification of Nafion Membranes, 235 13.4 Membranes Made from Polymers Without Fluorine, 237 13.5 Membranes Made from Other Materials, 239 13.6 Matrix-Type Membranes, 239 13.7 Membranes with Hydroxyl Ion Conduction, 240 References, 241 14 Structural and Wetting Properties of Fuel Cell Components 243 Coauthor: Yurij M. Volfkovich 14.1 Methods for Investigating Porous Materials, 244 14.2 A New Method: The Method of Standard Contact Porosimetry, 245 14.3 Catalysts Used in Fuel Cells, 248 14.4 The Catalytic Layer, 252 14.5 The Gas-Diffusion Layer, 254 14.6 Membranes, 257 14.7 Influence of Structural and Wetting Properties on Fuel Cell Performance, 262 References, 264 15 Mathematical Modeling of Fuel Cells 267 Felix N. B¨uchi 15.1 Zero-Dimensional Models, 270 15.2 One-Dimensional Models, 270 15.3 Two-Dimensional Models, 271 15.4 Three-Dimensional Models, 272 15.5 Time Domain, 273 15.6 Concluding Remarks, 273 References, 274 16 Experimental Methods for Investigating Fuel Cell Stacks 275 16.1 Methods Developed Before 2007, 277 16.2 Optical, X-Ray, and EM Methods, 278 16.3 Neutron Beam–Based Methods, 281 16.4 Electrochemical Methods, 283 16.5 Miscellaneous Methods, 286 References, 288 17 Small Fuel Cells for Portable Devices 291 17.1 Special Operating Features of Mini-Fuel Cells, 292 17.2 Flat Mini-Fuel Batteries, 293 17.3 Silicon-Based Mini-Fuel Cells, 296 17.4 PCB-Based Mini-Fuel Cells, 298 17.5 Mini-Solid-Oxide Fuel Cells, 299 17.6 The Problem of Air-Breathing Cathodes, 300 17.7 Prototypes of Power Units with Mini-Fuel Cells, 301 17.8 Concluding Remarks, 304 References, 305 18 Nonconventional Design Principles for Fuel Cells 307 18.1 Conventional Design Principles and Their Drawbacks, 307 18.2 The Principle of Mixed-Reactant Supply: Mixed-Reactant Fuel Cells, 308 18.3 Coplanar Fuel Cell Design: Strip Cells, 310 18.4 The Flow-Through Electrode Principle, 312 18.5 Single-Chamber SOFCs, 313 18.6 Microfluidic Fuel Cells, 319 References, 321 PART IV COMMERCIALIZATION OF FUEL CELLS 325 19 Applications 327 19.1 Large Stationary Power Plants, 327 19.2 Small Stationary Power Units, 332 19.3 Fuel Cells for Transport Applications, 335 19.4 Portables, 341 19.5 Military Applications, 345 19.6 Handicaps Preventing a Broader Commercialization of Fuel Cells, 347 References, 348 20 Fuel Cell Work in Various Countries 351 20.1 Driving Forces for Fuel Cell Work, 351 20.2 Fuel Cells and the Hydrogen Economy, 353 20.3 Activities in North America, 355 20.4 Activities in Europe, 356 20.5 Activities in other Countries, 357 20.6 The Volume of Published Fuel Cell Work, 359 20.7 Legislation and Standardization in the Field of Fuel Cells, 361 References, 362 21 Outlook 363 21.1 Periods of Alternating Hope and Disappointment, 363 21.2 Some Misconceptions, 364 Klaus Müller 21.3 Ideal Fuel Cells, 366 21.4 Projected Future of Fuel Cells, 368 References, 369 GENERAL BIBLIOGRAPHY 371 AUTHOR INDEX 373 SUBJECT INDEX 379
£90.86
John Wiley & Sons Inc Polymers for PEM Fuel Cells
Book SynopsisIncluding chemical, synthetic, and cross-disciplinary approaches; this book includes the necessary techniques and technologies to help readers better understand polymers for polymer electrolyte membrane (PEM) fuel cells.Table of ContentsPreface ix Acknowledgments xi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Principles of Fuel Cells 1 1.2 Types of Fuel Cells 3 1.2.1 AFC 3 1.2.2 PAFC 6 1.2.3 MCFC 7 1.2.4 SOFC 8 1.2.5 PEMFC 11 1.2.6 DMFC 12 1.3 Applications 14 1.3.1 Stationary Power 15 1.3.2 Propulsion of Vehicles 15 1.3.3 Portable Applications 17 1.4 Needs of Fundamental Materials for PEM Fuel Cells 17 1.4.1 Membranes 17 1.4.2 Electrodes 18 1.4.3 Polymeric Materials as Components of Fuel Cell Catalytic System 20 1.4.4 Bipolar Plates 21 1.5 Membranes for PEM Fuel Cells 22 1.5.1 Proton Exchange Membranes 22 1.5.2 PEMs for DMFCs 29 1.5.3 Anion Exchange Membranes (AEMs) 34 1.5.4 Organic–Inorganic Composites 35 1.6 Testing of PEMs 36 References 36 2 Fluoropolymers for Proton Exchange Membranes 50 2.1 Introduction 50 2.2 Perfluorosulfonic Acid Resins 51 2.2.1 PFSA Polymers with Long Side Chains 53 2.2.2 PFSA Polymers with Short Side Chains 55 2.2.3 Sulfonimide Membranes 58 2.3 Partially Fluorinated Polymers 59 2.3.1 Partially Fluorinated Aromatic Polymers 59 2.3.2 Partially Fluorinated Graft Copolymers 67 2.4 Durability of Fluoropolymers for Proton Exchange Membranes 75 2.5 Composite Membranes Based on Fluoropolymers 82 2.5.1 Reinforcement by a Polymer 83 2.5.2 Organic–Inorganic Composite Membranes 83 2.5.3 Nafion®/Sulfonated Polymers 85 2.5.4 Multilayer Membranes 85 2.5.5 Semi-IPN Membranes 86 References 87 3 Nonfluorinated Polymers for Proton Exchange Membranes 102 3.1 Introduction 102 3.2 Sulfonated Polyimides 103 3.2.1 Synthesis of Sulfonated Polyimides 104 3.2.2 Structure and Properties of Sulfonated Polyimide 116 3.2.3 Modification of Sulfonated Polyimides 127 3.2.4 Fuel Cell Performance and Stability of sPI Membranes 136 3.3 Sulfonated Poly(ether ether ketone) 141 3.3.1 Synthesis of sPEEK 142 3.3.2 Structure and Properties 146 3.3.3 Modification of sPEEK Membranes 153 3.4 Sulfonated Polysulfone and Poly(ether sulfone) 160 3.4.1 Polysulfones and Poly(ether sulfone) 160 3.4.2 Sulfonation and Phosphonation of Polysulfones and Poly(ether sulfone)s 162 3.4.3 Poly(arylene thioether sulfone)s 180 3.5 Sulfonated Polyphosphazenes 181 3.5.1 Synthesis of Sulfonated Polyphosphazenes 184 3.5.2 Phenylphosphonic Acid-Functionalized Polyphosphazenes 187 3.5.3 Polyphosphazenes with Sulfonimide Side Groups 188 3.5.4 Modification of Sulfonated Polyphosphazenes 190 3.5.5 Polyphosphazene Membranes for PEMFCs 192 3.5.6 Polyphosphazene Membranes for DMFCs 193 3.6 Sulfonated Polybenzimidazole 194 3.7 Sulfonated Poly(phenylene oxide) 198 3.7.1 Sulfonated PPO for PEMs 198 3.7.2 Modification of sPPO 202 3.7.3 Fuel Cell Performances of sPPO Membranes 210 References 212 4 Anhydrous Proton-Conducting Polymers for High-Temperature PEMFCs 241 4.1 Introduction 241 4.2 Phosphoric Acid-Impregnated Polybenzimidazole Membranes 242 4.2.1 Synthesis of PBIs 243 4.2.2 Membrane Fabrication of PBIs 256 4.2.3 Structure and Properties of PBIs 259 4.2.4 Modification of PBIs 268 4.2.5 Composite Membranes of PBIs 271 4.2.6 Fuel Cell Technologies 272 References 276 5 Anion Exchange Membranes for Alkaline Fuel Cells 293 5.1 Introduction 293 5.2 Anion Exchange Membranes for Alkaline Fuel Cells 296 5.2.1 Heterogeneous Membranes 296 5.2.2 Interpenetrating Polymer Network 303 5.2.3 Homogeneous Membranes 304 5.3 Structure and Properties of AEMs 329 5.3.1 General Properties of AEMs 329 5.3.2 Properties of the Ionic Groups 331 5.3.3 Transport Mechanisms in AEMs 332 5.3.4 Stability of Alkaline AEMs 335 5.3.5 Examples of Chemical Stability of Ammonium Groups Toward OH- Attack 338 5.4 Application of AEMs 340 References 345 6 Polymers for New Types of Fuel Cells 360 6.1 Direct Liquid-Feed Fuel Cells 360 6.1.1 Introduction 360 6.1.2 Direct Liquid-Feed Fuels 361 6.1.3 Carbon-Free Fuels 369 6.2 Microbial Fuel Cells 373 6.2.1 Introduction 373 6.2.2 Materials of Construction 377 6.2.3 Outlook and Application of MFCs 379 6.3 Microfuel Cells 380 6.3.1 Introduction 380 6.3.2 Different Types of Microfuel Cells 382 6.3.3 Commercial Developments of Microfuel Cells 392 References 395 Index 407
£121.46
John Wiley & Sons Inc PID and Predictive Control of Electrical Drives
Book SynopsisWritten by a leading author on the subject, PID and Predictive Control of Electric Drives and Power Supplies using MATLAB / Simulink provides a timely introduction to current research on PID and predictive control.Table of ContentsAbout the Authors xiii Preface xv Acknowledgment xix List of Symbols and Acronyms xxi 1 Modeling of AC Drives and Power Converter 1 1.1 Space Phasor Representation 1 1.1.1 Space Vector for Magnetic Motive Force 1 1.1.2 Space Vector Representation of Voltage Equation 4 1.2 Model of Surface Mounted PMSM 5 1.2.1 Representation in Stationary Reference Frame 5 1.2.2 Representation in Synchronous Reference Frame 7 1.2.3 Electromagnetic Torque 8 1.3 Model of Interior Magnets PMSM 10 1.3.1 Complete Model of PMSM 11 1.4 Per Unit Model and PMSM Parameters 11 1.4.1 Per Unit Model and Physical Parameters 11 1.4.2 Experimental Validation of PMSM Model 12 1.5 Modeling of Induction Motor 13 1.5.1 Space Vector Representation of Voltage Equation of Induction Motor 13 1.5.2 Representation in Stationary Reference Frame 17 1.5.3 Representation in Reference Frame 17 1.5.4 Electromagnetic Torque of Induction Motor 19 1.5.5 Model Parameters of Induction Motor and Model Validation 19 1.6 Modeling of Power Converter 21 1.6.1 Space Vector Representation of Voltage Equation for Power Converter 22 1.6.2 Representation in Reference Frame 22 1.6.3 Representation in Reference Frame 23 1.6.4 Energy Balance Equation 24 1.7 Summary 25 1.8 Further Reading 25 References 25 2 Control of Semiconductor Switches via PWM Technologies 27 2.1 Topology of IGBT Inverter 28 2.2 Six-step Operating Mode 30 2.3 Carrier Based PWM 31 2.3.1 Sinusoidal PWM 31 2.3.2 Carrier Based PWM with Zero-sequence Injection 32 2.4 Space Vector PWM 35 2.5 Simulation Study of the Effect of PWM 37 2.6 Summary 40 2.7 Further Reading 40 References 40 3 PID Control System Design for Electrical Drives and Power Converters 41 3.1 Overview of PID Control Systems Using Pole-assignment Design Techniques 42 3.1.1 PI Controller Design 42 3.1.2 Selecting the Desired Closed-loop Performance 43 3.1.3 Overshoot in Reference Response 45 3.1.4 PID Controller Design 46 3.1.5 Cascade PID Control Systems 48 3.2 Overview of PID Control of PMSM 49 3.2.1 Bridging the Sensor Measurements to Feedback Signals (See the lower part of Figure 3.6) 50 3.2.2 Bridging the Control Signals to the Inputs to the PMSM (See the top part of Figure 3.6) 51 3.3 PI Controller Design for Torque Control of PMSM 52 3.3.1 Set-point Signals to the Current Control Loops 52 3.3.2 Decoupling of the Current Control Systems 53 3.3.3 PI Current Controller Design 54 3.4 Velocity Control of PMSM 55 3.4.1 Inner-loop Proportional Control of q-axis Current 55 3.4.2 Cascade Feedback Control of Velocity:P Plus PI 57 3.4.3 Simulation Example for P Plus PI Control System 59 3.4.4 Cascade Feedback Control of Velocity:PI Plus PI 61 3.4.5 Simulation Example for PI Plus PI Control System 63 3.5 PID Controller Design for Position Control of PMSM 64 3.6 Overview of PID Control of Induction Motor 65 3.6.1 Bridging the Sensor Measurements to Feedback Signals 67 3.6.2 Bridging the Control Signals to the Inputs to the Induction Motor 67 3.7 PID Controller Design for Induction Motor 68 3.7.1 PI Control of Electromagnetic Torque of Induction Motor 68 3.7.2 Cascade Control of Velocity and Position 70 3.7.3 Slip Estimation 73 3.8 Overview of PID Control of Power Converter 74 3.8.1 Bridging Sensor Measurements to Feedback Signals 75 3.8.2 Bridging the Control Signals to the Inputs of the Power Converter 76 3.9 PI Current and Voltage Controller Design for Power Converter 76 3.9.1 P Control of d-axis Current 76 3.9.2 PI Control of q-axis Current 77 3.9.3 PI Cascade Control of Output Voltage 79 3.9.4 Simulation Example 80 3.9.5 Phase Locked Loop 80 3.10 Summary 82 3.11 Further Reading 83 References 83 4 PID Control System Implementation 87 4.1 P and PI Controller Implementation in Current Control Systems 87 4.1.1 Voltage Operational Limits in Current Control Systems 87 4.1.2 Discretization of Current Controllers 90 4.1.3 Anti-windup Mechanisms 92 4.2 Implementation of Current Controllers for PMSM 93 4.3 Implementation of Current Controllers for Induction Motors 95 4.4 Current Controller Implementation for Power Converter 97 4.4.1 Constraints on the Control Variables 97 4.5 Implementation of Outer-loop PI Control System 98 4.5.1 Constraints in the Outer-loop 98 4.5.2 Over Current Protection for AC Machines 99 4.5.3 Implementation of Outer-loop PI Control of Velocity 100 4.5.4 Over Current Protection for Power Converters 100 4.6 MATLAB Tutorial on Implementation of PI Controller 100 4.7 Summary 102 4.8 Further Reading 103 References 103 5 Tuning PID Control Systems with Experimental Validations 105 5.1 Sensitivity Functions in Feedback Control Systems 105 5.1.1 Two-degrees of Freedom Control System Structure 105 5.1.2 Sensitivity Functions 109 5.1.3 Disturbance Rejection and Noise Attenuation 110 5.2 Tuning Current-loop q-axis Proportional Controller (PMSM) 111 5.2.1 Performance Factor and Proportional Gain 112 5.2.2 Complementary Sensitivity Function 112 5.2.3 Sensitivity and Input Sensitivity Functions 114 5.2.4 Effect of PWM Noise on Current Proportional Control System 114 5.2.5 Effect of Current Sensor Noise and Bias 116 5.2.6 Experimental Case Study of Current Sensor Bias Using P Control 118 5.2.7 Experimental Case Study of Current Loop Noise 119 5.3 Tuning Current-loop PI Controller (PMSM) 123 5.4 Performance Robustness in Outer-loop Controllers 128 5.4.1 Sensitivity Functions for Outer-loop Control System 131 5.4.2 Input Sensitivity Functions for the Outer-loop System 135 5.5 Analysis of Time-delay Effects 136 5.5.1 PI Control of q-axis Current 137 5.5.2 P Control of q-axis Current 137 5.6 Tuning Cascade PI Control Systems for Induction Motor 138 5.6.1 Robustness of Cascade PI Control System 140 5.6.2 Robustness Study Using Nyquist Plot 143 5.7 Tuning PI Control Systems for Power Converter 147 5.7.1 Overview of the Designs 147 5.7.2 Tuning the Current Controllers 149 5.7.3 Tuning Voltage Controller 150 5.7.4 Experimental Evaluations 154 5.8 Tuning P Plus PI Controllers for Power Converter 157 5.8.1 Design and Sensitivity Functions 157 5.8.2 Experimental Results 158 5.9 Robustness of Power Converter Control System Using PI Current Controllers 159 5.9.1 Variation of Inductance Using PI Current Controllers 160 5.9.2 Variation of Capacitance on Closed-loop Performance 163 5.10 Summary 167 5.10.1 Current Controllers 167 5.10.2 Velocity, Position and Voltage Controllers 168 5.10.3 Choice between P Current Control and PI Current Control 169 5.11 Further Reading 169 References 169 6 FCS Predictive Control in d − q Reference Frame 171 6.1 States of IGBT Inverter and the Operational Constraints 172 6.2 FCS Predictive Control of PMSM 175 6.3 MATLAB Tutorial on Real-time Implementation of FCS-MPC 177 6.3.1 Simulation Results 179 6.3.2 Experimental Results of FCS Control 181 6.4 Analysis of FCS-MPC System 182 6.4.1 Optimal Control System 182 6.4.2 Feedback Controller Gain 184 6.4.3 Constrained Optimal Control 185 6.5 Overview of FCS-MPC with Integral Action 187 6.6 Derivation of I-FCS Predictive Control Algorithm 191 6.6.1 Optimal Control without Constraints 191 6.6.2 I-FCS Predictive Controller with Constraints 194 6.6.3 Implementation of I-FCS-MPC Algorithm 196 6.7 MATLAB Tutorial on Implementation of I-FCS Predictive Controller 197 6.7.1 Simulation Results 198 6.8 I-FCS Predictive Control of Induction Motor 201 6.8.1 The Control Algorithm for an Induction Motor 202 6.8.2 Simulation Results 204 6.8.3 Experimental Results 205 6.9 I-FCS Predictive Control of Power Converter 209 6.9.1 I-FCS Predictive Control of a Power Converter 209 6.9.2 Simulation Results 211 6.9.3 Experimental Results 214 6.10 Evaluation of Robustness of I-FCS-MPC via Monte-Carlo Simulations 215 6.10.1 Discussion on Mean Square Errors 216 6.11 Velocity and Position Control of PMSM Using I-FCS-MPC 218 6.11.1 Choice of Sampling Rate for the Outer-loop Control System 219 6.11.2 Velocity and Position Controller Design 223 6.12 Velocity and Position Control of Induction Motor Using I-FCS-MPC 224 6.12.1 I-FCS Cascade Velocity Control of Induction Motor 225 6.12.2 I-FCS-MPC Cascade Position Control of Induction Motor 226 6.12.3 Experimental Evaluation of Velocity Control 228 6.13 Summary 232 6.13.1 Selection of sampling interval 233 6.13.2 Selection of the Integral Gain 233 6.14 Further Reading 234 References 234 7 FCS Predictive Control in Reference Frame 237 7.1 FCS Predictive Current Control of PMSM 237 7.1.1 Predictive Control Using One-step-ahead Prediction 238 7.1.2 FCS Current Control in Reference Frame 239 7.1.3 Generating Current Reference Signals in Frame 240 7.2 Resonant FCS Predictive Current Control 241 7.2.1 Control System Configuration 241 7.2.2 Outer-loop Controller Design 242 7.2.3 Resonant FCS Predictive Control System 243 7.3 Resonant FCS Current Control of Induction Motor 247 7.3.1 The Original FCS Current Control of Induction Motor 247 7.3.2 Resonant FCS Predictive Current Control of Induction Motor 250 7.3.3 Experimental Evaluations of Resonant FCS Predictive Control 252 7.4 Resonant FCS Predictive Power Converter Control 255 7.4.1 FCS Predictive Current Control of Power Converter 255 7.4.2 Experimental Results of Resonant FCS Predictive Control 260 7.5 Summary 261 7.6 Further Reading 262 References 262 8 Discrete-time Model Predictive Control (DMPC) of Electrical Drives and Power Converter 265 8.1 Linear Discrete-time Model for PMSM 266 8.1.1 Linear Model for PMSM 266 8.1.2 Discretization of the Continuous-time Model 267 8.2 Discrete-time MPC Design with Constraints 268 8.2.1 Augmented Model 269 8.2.2 Design without Constraints 270 8.2.3 Formulation of the Constraints 272 8.2.4 On-line Solution for Constrained MPC 272 8.3 Experimental Evaluation of DMPC of PMSM 274 8.3.1 The MPC Parameters 274 8.3.2 Constraints 275 8.3.3 Response to Load Disturbances 275 8.3.4 Response to a Staircase Reference 277 8.3.5 Tuning of the MPC controller 278 8.4 Power Converter Control Using DMPC with Experimental Validation 280 8.5 Summary 281 8.6 Further Reading 282 References 283 9 Continuous-time Model Predictive Control (CMPC) of Electrical Drives and PowerConverter 285 9.1 Continuous-time MPC Design 286 9.1.1 Augmented Model 286 9.1.2 Description of the Control Trajectories Using Laguerre Functions 287 9.1.3 Continuous-time Predictive Control without Constraints 289 9.1.4 Tuning of CMPC Control System Using Exponential Data Weighting and Prescribed Degree of Stability 292 9.2 CMPC with Nonlinear Constraints 294 9.2.1 Approximation of Nonlinear Constraint Using Four Linear Constraints 294 9.2.2 Approximation of Nonlinear Constraint Using Sixteen Linear Constraints 294 9.2.3 State Feedback Observer 297 9.3 Simulation and Experimental Evaluation of CMPC of Induction Motor 298 9.3.1 Simulation Results 298 9.3.2 Experimental Results 300 9.4 Continuous-time Model Predictive Control of Power Converter 301 9.4.1 Use of Prescribed Degree of Stability in the Design 302 9.4.2 Experimental Results for Rectification Mode 303 9.4.3 Experimental Results for Regeneration Mode 303 9.4.4 Experimental Results for Disturbance Rejection 304 9.5 Gain Scheduled Predictive Controller 305 9.5.1 The Weighting Parameters 305 9.5.2 Gain Scheduled Predictive Control Law 307 9.6 Experimental Results of Gain Scheduled Predictive Control of Induction Motor 309 9.6.1 The First Set of Experimental Results 309 9.6.2 The Second Set of Experimental Results 311 9.6.3 The Third Set of Experimental Results 312 9.7 Summary 312 9.8 Further Reading 313 References 313 10 MATLAB®/Simulink® Tutorials on Physical Modeling and Test-bed Setup 315 10.1 Building Embedded Functions for Park-Clarke Transformation 315 10.1.1 Park-Clarke Transformation for Current Measurements 316 10.1.2 Inverse Park-Clarke Transformation for Voltage Actuation 317 10.2 Building Simulation Model for PMSM 318 10.3 Building Simulation Model for Induction Motor 320 10.4 Building Simulation Model for Power Converter 325 10.4.1 Embedded MATLAB Function for Phase Locked Loop (PLL) 325 10.4.2 Physical Simulation Model for Grid Connected Voltage Source Converter 328 10.5 PMSM Experimental Setup 332 10.6 Induction Motor Experimental Setup 334 10.6.1 Controller 334 10.6.2 Power Supply 334 10.6.3 Inverter 335 10.6.4 Mechanical Load 335 10.6.5 Induction Motor and Sensors 335 10.7 Grid Connected Power Converter Experimental Setup 335 10.7.1 Controller 335 10.7.2 Inverter 336 10.7.3 Sensors 336 10.8 Summary 337 10.9 Further Reading 337 References 337 Index 339
£108.86
John Wiley & Sons Inc Instantaneous Power Theory and Applications to
Book SynopsisThis book covers instantaneous power theory as well as the importance of design of shunt, series, and combined shunt-series power active filters and hybrid passive-active power filters Illustrates pioneering applications of the p-q theory to power conditioning, which highlights distinct differences from conventional theories Explores p-q-r theory to give a new method of analyzing the different powers in a three-phase circuit Provides exercises at the end of many chapters that are unique to the second edition Table of ContentsPREFACE xiii CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1.1 Concepts and Evolution of Electric Power Theory 1 1.2 Applications of the P-q Theory to Power Electronics Equipment 4 1.3 Harmonic Voltages in Power Systems 5 1.4 Identified and Unidentified Harmonic-Producing Loads 6 1.5 Harmonic Current and Voltage Sources 8 1.6 Basic Principles of Harmonic Compensation 9 1.7 Basic Principle of Power Flow Control 13 References 15 CHAPTER 2 ELECTRIC POWER DEFINITIONS: BACKGROUND 17 2.1 Power Definitions Under Sinusoidal Conditions 18 2.2 Voltage and Current Phasors and Complex Impedance 20 2.3 Complex Power and Power Factor 21 2.4 Concepts of Power Under Nonsinusoidal Conditions: Conventional Approaches 22 2.4.1 Power Definitions by Budeanu 22 2.4.1.A Power Tetrahedron and Distortion Factor 25 2.4.2 Power Definitions by Fryze 27 2.5 Electric Power in Three-Phase Systems 28 2.5.1 Classifications of Three-Phase Systems 28 2.5.2 Power in Balanced Three-Phase Systems 31 2.5.3 Power in Three-Phase Unbalanced Systems 33 2.6 Summary 34 2.7 Exercises 34 References 35 CHAPTER 3 THE INSTANTANEOUS POWER THEORY 37 3.1 Basis of the p-q Theory 37 3.1.1 Historical Background of the p-q Theory 38 3.1.2 The Clarke Transformation 39 3.1.2.A Calculation of Voltage and Current Vectors When Zero-Sequence Components Are Excluded 41 3.1.3 Three-Phase Instantaneous Active Power in Terms of Clarke Components 43 3.1.4 The Instantaneous Powers of the p-q Theory 44 3.2 The p-q Theory in Three-Phase, Three-Wire Systems 44 3.2.1 Comparisons with the Conventional Theory 48 3.2.1.A Example #1—Sinusoidal Voltages and Currents 49 3.2.1.B Example #2—Balanced Voltages and Capacitive Loads 49 3.2.1.C Example #3—Sinusoidal Balanced Voltage and Nonlinear Load 50 3.2.2 Use of the p-q Theory for Shunt Current Compensation 54 3.2.2.A Examples of Appearance of Hidden Currents 59 3.2.3 The Dual p-q Theory 63 3.3 The p-q Theory in Three-Phase, Four-Wire Systems 65 3.3.1 The Zero-Sequence Power in a Three-Phase Sinusoidal Voltage Source 67 3.3.2 Presence of Negative-Sequence Components 68 3.3.3 General Case Including Distortions and Imbalances in the Voltages and in the Currents 69 3.3.4 Physical Meanings of the Instantaneous Real, Imaginary, and Zero-Sequence Powers 74 3.3.5 Avoiding the Clarke Transformation in the p-q Theory 75 3.3.6 Modified p-q Theory 77 3.4 Instantaneous abc Theory 81 3.4.1 Active and Nonactive Current Calculation by Means of a Minimization Method 83 3.4.2 Generalized Fryze Currents Minimization Method 88 3.5 Comparisons Between the p-q Theory and the abc Theory 91 3.5.1 Selection of Power Components to be Compensated 95 3.6 The p-q-r Theory 97 3.7 Summary 104 3.8 Exercises 105 References 106 CHAPTER 4 SHUNT ACTIVE FILTERS 111 4.1 General Description of Shunt Active Filters 113 4.1.1 PWM Converters for Shunt Active Filters 114 4.1.2 Active Filter Controllers 115 4.2 Three-Phase, Three-Wire Shunt Active Filters 118 4.2.1 Active Filters for Constant Power Compensation 119 4.2.2 Active Filters for Sinusoidal Current Control 135 4.2.2.A Positive-Sequence Voltage Detector 138 4.2.2.B Simulation Results 145 4.2.3 Active Filters for Current Minimization 145 4.2.4 Active Filters for Harmonic Damping 149 4.2.4.A Shunt Active Filter Based on Voltage Detection 151 4.2.4.B Active Filter Controller Based on Voltage Detection 152 4.2.4.C An Application Case of an Active Filter for Harmonic Damping 156 4.2.5 A Digital Controller 171 4.2.5.A System Configuration of the Digital Controller 172 4.2.5.B Current Control Methods 177 4.3 Three-Phase, Four-Wire Shunt Active Filters 180 4.3.1 Converter Topologies for Three-Phase, Four-Wire Systems 181 4.3.2 Dynamic Hysteresis-Band Current Controller 182 4.3.3 Active Filter dc Voltage Regulator 184 4.3.4 Optimal Power Flow Conditions 185 4.3.5 Constant Instantaneous Power Control Strategy 187 4.3.6 Sinusoidal Current Control Strategy 189 4.3.7 Performance Analysis and Parameter Optimization 192 4.3.7.A Influence of the System Parameters 192 4.3.7.B Dynamic Response of the Shunt Active Filter 193 4.3.7.C Economical Aspects 198 4.3.7.D Experimental Results 199 4.4 Compensation Methods Based on the p-q-r Theory 204 4.4.1 Reference Power Control Method 206 4.4.2 Reference Current Control Method 211 4.4.3 Alternative Control Method 213 4.4.4 The Simplified Sinusoidal Source Current Strategy 215 4.4.4.A The PLL Circuit and the Positive-Sequence Detector 215 4.4.4.B The Sinusoidal Source Current Control Strategy with Energy Balance Inside the Active Filter 217 4.5 Comparisons Between Control Methods Based on the p-q Theory and the p-q-r Theory 218 4.6 Shunt Selective Harmonic Compensation 224 4.7 Summary 231 4.8 Exercises 231 References 233 CHAPTER 5 HYBRID AND SERIES ACTIVE FILTERS 237 5.1 Basic Series Active Filter 237 5.2 Combined Series Active Filter and Shunt Passive Filter 239 5.2.1 Example of an Experimental System 242 5.2.1.A Compensation Principle 243 5.2.1.B Filtering Characteristics 245 5.2.1.C Control Circuit 246 5.2.1.D Filter to Suppress Switching Ripples 248 5.2.1.E Experimental Results 249 5.2.2 Some Remarks about the Hybrid Filters 252 5.3 Series Active Filter Integrated with a Double-Series Diode Rectifier 253 5.3.1 The First-Generation Control Circuit 255 5.3.1.A Circuit Configuration and Delay Time 255 5.3.1.B Stability of the Active Filter 257 5.3.2 The Second-Generation Control Circuit 258 5.3.3 Stability Analysis and Characteristics Comparison 260 5.3.3.A Transfer Function of the Control Circuits 260 5.3.3.B Characteristics Comparisons 261 5.3.4 Design of a Switching-Ripple Filter 263 5.3.4.A Design Principle 263 5.3.4.B Effect on the System Stability 263 5.3.4.C Experimental Testing 264 5.3.5 Experimental Results 266 5.4 Comparisons Between Hybrid and Pure Active Filters 268 5.4.1 Low-Voltage Transformerless Hybrid Active Filter 268 5.4.2 Low-Voltage, Transformerless, Pure Shunt Active Filter 271 5.4.3 Comparisons through Simulation Results 273 5.5 Hybrid Active Filters for Medium-Voltage Motor Drives 274 5.5.1 Hybrid Active Filter for a Three-Phase Six-Pulse Diode Rectifier 275 5.5.1.A System Configuration 275 5.5.1.B Experimental System 277 5.5.1.C Control System 277 5.5.1.D Common Sixth-Harmonic Zero-Sequence Voltage Injection 281 5.5.1.E Three-Phase Second-Harmonic Negative Sequence Voltages Injection 283 5.5.1.F Experimental Results 286 5.5.1.G Appendix 292 5.5.2 Hybrid Active Filter for a Three-Phase 12-Pulse Diode Rectifier 292 5.5.2.A Medium-Voltage High-Power Motor Drive Systems 293 5.5.2.B Experimental System 295 5.5.2.C Control System 298 5.5.2.D Three-Phase Second-Harmonic Negative Sequence Voltages Injection 300 5.5.2.E Experimental Results 303 5.5.2.F Overall System Efficiency 308 5.6 Summary 308 5.7 Exercises 309 References 310 CHAPTER 6 COMBINED SERIES AND SHUNT POWER CONDITIONERS 313 6.1 The Unified Power Flow Controller 314 6.1.1 FACTS and UPFC Principles 315 6.1.1.A Voltage Regulation Principle 317 6.1.1.B Power Flow Control Principle 318 6.1.2 A Controller Design for the UPFC 321 6.1.3 UPFC Approach Using a Shunt Multipulse Converter 328 6.1.3.A Six-Pulse Converter 328 6.1.3.B Quasi 24-Pulse Converter 332 6.1.3.C Control of Active and Reactive Power in Multipulse Converters 334 6.1.3.D Shunt Multipulse Converter Controller 336 6.2 The Unified Power Quality Conditioner 339 6.2.1 General Description of the UPQC 340 6.2.2 A Three-Phase, Four-Wire UPQC 342 6.2.2.A Power Circuit of the UPQC 343 6.2.2.B The UPQC Controller 344 6.2.2.C Analysis of the UPQC Dynamic 353 6.2.3 The UPQC Combined with Passive Filters (the Hybrid UPQC) 370 6.2.3.A Controller of the Hybrid UPQC 374 6.2.3.B Experimental Results 380 6.3 The Universal Active Power Line Conditioner 386 6.3.1 General Description of the UPLC 386 6.3.2 The Controller of the UPLC 389 6.3.2.A Controller for Configuration #2 of the UPLC 396 6.3.3 Performance of the UPLC 397 6.3.3.A Normalized System Parameters 397 6.3.3.B Simulation Results of Configuration #1 of the UPLC 401 6.3.3.C Simulation Results of Configuration #2 of the UPLC 409 6.3.4 General Aspects 411 6.4 Combined Shunt-Series Filters for AC and DC Sides of Three-Phase Rectifiers 411 6.4.1 The Combined Shunt-Series Filter 414 6.4.2 Instantaneous Real and Imaginary Powers in the ac Source 415 6.4.3 The Instantaneous Power in the dc Side of the Rectifier 416 6.4.4 Comparison of Instantaneous Powers on the ac and dc Sides of the Rectifier 418 6.4.5 Control Algorithm of the Active Shunt-Series Filter 418 6.4.6 The Common dc Link 421 6.4.7 Digital Simulation 424 6.4.8 Experimental Results 426 6.5 Summary 427 6.6 Exercises 428 References 429 INDEX 431
£103.46
John Wiley & Sons Inc Fuel Cell Systems Explained
Book SynopsisSince publication of the first edition ofFuel Cell Systems Explained, three compelling drivers have supported the continuing development of fuel cell technology. These are: the need to maintain energy security in an energy-hungry world, the desire to move towards zero-emission vehicles and power plants, and the mitigation of climate change by lowering of CO2 emissions. New fuel cell materials, enhanced stack performance and increased lifetimes are leading to the emergence of the first truly commercial systems in applications that range from fork-lift trucks to power sources for mobile phone towers. Leading vehicle manufacturers have embraced the use of electric drive-trains and now see hydrogen fuel cells complementing advanced battery technology in zero-emission vehicles. After many decades of laboratory development, a global but fragile fuel cell industry is bringing the first commercial products to market. This thoroughly revised edition includes several new sections devoted to, for example, fuel cell characterisation, improved materials for low-temperature hydrogen and liquid-fuelled systems, and real-world technology implementation. Assuming no prior knowledge of fuel cell technology, the third edition comprehensively brings together all of the key topics encompassed in this diverse field. Practitioners, researchers and students in electrical, power, chemical and automotive engineering will continue to benefit from this essential guide to the principles, design and implementation of fuel cell systems.Trade ReviewEver since its initial publication, Fuel Cell Systems Explained has been one of the most approachable books on the subject. Well-written and concise, the third edition maintains that tradition. The scientific and technical sections are clear and logical, and lead the reader carefully through the complexities of fuel cell materials and operating conditions, from basic principles to specific fuel cell types. This is all prefaced by a history of the sector. While this latter may seem tangential to those seeking electrochemical equations, in fact it is both interesting and useful, for example in helping me understand some of the technology development decisions that have been made over the years. It is also interesting to discover that one of the very first applications was of a fuel cell developed by Bacon and trialled in a forklift, perhaps not coincidentally one of the most successful sectors today, and that fuel cells were viewed as superior to batteries as far back as the Gemini space missions; a technology supremacy discussion which is just as live today. - David Hart, Director, E4tech and lead author of the annual Fuel Cell Industry Review The Third Edition of Fuel Cell Systems Explained is an updated version of a book that has always been essential reading for everyone entering into the fuel cell sector, be they student or industrial practitioner. This edition introduces the basic principles of thermodynamics and electrochemical kinetics pertinent to the understanding of fuel cell operation, and determining fuel cell efficiency and voltage losses. But the heart of the book are the six chapters detailing each of the principal fuel cell technologies; proton-exchange membrane fuel cells; alkaline fuel cells; direct liquid fuel cells; phosphoric acid fuel cells; molten carbonate fuel cells and solid oxide fuel cells. There are also useful chapters covering different fuels and fuel processing options, hydrogen storage and a short discussion of balance-of-plant. I am delighted to say that it is a book that I will continue to recommend highly as a first read to all those who join my own research group to work on this exciting technology. - Professor Nigel Brandon OBE FREng, Imperial College London, UKTable of ContentsBrief Biographies xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii Acronyms and Initialisms xix Symbols and Units xxv 1 Introducing Fuel Cells 1 1.1 Historical Perspective 1 1.2 Fuel-Cell Basics 7 1.3 Electrode Reaction Rates 9 1.4 Stack Design 11 1.5 Gas Supply and Cooling 14 1.6 Principal Technologies 17 1.7 Mechanically Rechargeable Batteries and Other Fuel Cells 19 1.7.1 Metal–Air Cells 20 1.7.2 Redox Flow Cells 20 1.7.3 Biological Fuel Cells 23 1.8 Balance-of-Plant Components 23 1.9 Fuel-Cell Systems: Key Parameters 24 1.10 Advantages and Applications 25 Further Reading 26 2 Efficiency and Open-Circuit Voltage 27 2.1 Open-Circuit Voltage: Hydrogen Fuel Cell 27 2.2 Open-Circuit Voltage: Other Fuel Cells and Batteries 31 2.3 Efficiency and Its Limits 32 2.4 Efficiency and Voltage 35 2.5 Influence of Pressure and Gas Concentration 36 2.5.1 Nernst Equation 36 2.5.2 Hydrogen Partial Pressure 38 2.5.3 Fuel and Oxidant Utilization 39 2.5.4 System Pressure 39 2.6 Summary 40 Further Reading 41 3 Operational Fuel-Cell Voltages 43 3.1 Fundamental Voltage: Current Behaviour 43 3.2 Terminology 44 3.3 Fuel-Cell Irreversibilities 46 3.4 ActivationLosses 46 3.4.1 The Tafel Equation 46 3.4.2 The Constants in the Tafel Equation 48 3.4.3 Reducing the Activation Overpotential 51 3.5 InternalCurrents and Fuel Crossover 52 3.6 Ohmic Losses 54 3.7 Mass-Transport Losses 55 3.8 Combining the Irreversibilities 57 3.9 The Electrical Double-Layer 58 3.10 Techniques for Distinguishing Irreversibilities 60 3.10.1 Cyclic Voltammetry 60 3.10.2 AC Impedance Spectroscopy 61 3.10.3 Current Interruption 65 Further Reading 68 4 Proton-Exchange Membrane Fuel Cells 69 4.1 Overview 69 4.2 Polymer Electrolyte: Principles of Operation 72 4.2.1 Perfluorinated Sulfonic Acid Membrane 72 4.2.2 Modified Perfluorinated Sulfonic Acid Membranes 76 4.2.3 Alternative Sulfonated and Non-Sulfonated Membranes 77 4.2.4 Acid–Base Complexes and Ionic Liquids 79 4.2.5 High-Temperature Proton Conductors 80 4.3 Electrodes and Electrode Structure 81 4.3.1 Catalyst Layers: Platinum-Based Catalysts 82 4.3.2 Catalyst Layers: Alternative Catalysts for Oxygen Reduction 85 4.3.2.1 Macrocyclics 86 4.3.2.2 Chalcogenides 87 4.3.2.3 Conductive Polymers 87 4.3.2.4 Nitrides 87 4.3.2.5 Functionalized Carbons 87 4.3.2.6 Heteropolyacids 88 4.3.3 Catalyst Layer: Negative Electrode 88 4.3.4 Catalyst Durability 88 4.3.5 Gas-Diffusion Layer 89 4.4 Water Management 92 4.4.1 Hydration and Water Movement 92 4.4.2 Air Flow and Water Evaporation 94 4.4.3 Air Humidity 96 4.4.4 Self-Humidified Cells 98 4.4.5 External Humidification: Principles 100 4.4.6 External Humidification: Methods 102 4.5 Cooling and Air Supply 104 4.5.1 Cooling with Cathode Air Supply 104 4.5.2 Separate Reactant and Cooling Air 104 4.5.3 Water Cooling 105 4.6 Stack Construction Methods 107 4.6.1 Introduction 107 4.6.2 Carbon Bipolar Plates 107 4.6.3 Metal Bipolar Plates 109 4.6.4 Flow-Field Patterns 110 4.6.5 Other Topologies 112 4.6.6 Mixed Reactant Cells 114 4.7 Operating Pressure 115 4.7.1 Technical Issues 115 4.7.2 Benefits of High Operating Pressures 117 4.7.2.1 Current 117 4.7.3 Other Factors 120 4.8 Fuel Types 120 4.8.1 Reformed Hydrocarbons 120 4.8.2 Alcohols and Other Liquid Fuels 121 4.9 Practical and Commercial Systems 122 4.9.1 Small-Scale Systems 122 4.9.2 Medium-Scale for Stationary Applications 123 4.9.3 Transport System Applications 125 4.10 System Design, Stack Lifetime and Related Issues 129 4.10.1 Membrane Degradation 129 4.10.2 Catalyst Degradation 129 4.10.3 System Control 129 4.11 Unitized Regenerative Fuel Cells 130 Further Reading 132 5 Alkaline Fuel Cells 135 5.1 Principles of Operation 135 5.2 System Designs 137 5.2.1 Circulating Electrolyte Solution 137 5.2.2 Static Electrolyte Solution 140 5.2.3 Dissolved Fuel 142 5.2.4 Anion-Exchange Membrane Fuel Cells 144 5.3 Electrodes 147 5.3.1 Sintered Nickel Powder 147 5.3.2 Raney Metals 147 5.3.3 Rolled Carbon 148 5.3.4 Catalysts 150 5.4 Stack Designs 151 5.4.1 Monopolar and Bipolar 151 5.4.2 Other Stack Designs 152 5.5 Operating Pressure and Temperature 152 5.6 Opportunities and Challenges 155 Further Reading 156 6 Direct Liquid Fuel Cells 157 6.1 Direct Methanol Fuel Cells 157 6.1.1 Principles of Operation 160 6.1.2 Electrode Reactions with a Proton-Exchange Membrane Electrolyte 160 6.1.3 Electrode Reactions with an Alkaline Electrolyte 162 6.1.4 Anode Catalysts 162 6.1.5 Cathode Catalysts 163 6.1.6 System Designs 164 6.1.7 Fuel Crossover 165 6.1.8 Mitigating Fuel Crossover: Standard Techniques 166 6.1.9 Mitigating Fuel Crossover: Prospective Techniques 167 6.1.10 Methanol Production 168 6.1.11 Methanol Safety and Storage 168 6.2 Direct Ethanol Fuel Cells 169 6.2.1 Principles of Operation 170 6.2.2 Ethanol Oxidation, Catalyst and Reaction Mechanism 170 6.2.3 Low-Temperature Operation: Performance and Challenges 172 6.2.4 High-Temperature Direct Ethanol Fuel Cells 173 6.3 Direct Propanol Fuel Cells 173 6.4 Direct Ethylene Glycol Fuel Cells 174 6.4.1 Principles of Operation 174 6.4.2 Ethylene Glycol: Anodic Oxidation 175 6.4.3 Cell Performance 176 6.5 Formic Acid Fuel Cells 176 6.5.1 Formic Acid: Anodic Oxidation 177 6.5.2 Cell Performance 177 6.6 Borohydride Fuel Cells 178 6.6.1 Anode Catalysts 180 6.6.2 Challenges 180 6.7 Application of Direct Liquid Fuel Cells 182 Further Reading 184 7 Phosphoric Acid Fuel Cells 187 7.1 High- Temperature Fuel-Cell Systems 187 7.2 System Design 188 7.2.1 Fuel Processing 188 7.2.2 Fuel Utilization 189 7.2.3 Heat-Exchangers 192 7.2.3.1 Designs 193 7.2.3.2 Exergy Analysis 193 7.2.3.3 Pinch Analysis 194 7.3 Principles of Operation 196 7.3.1 Electrolyte 196 7.3.2 Electrodes and Catalysts 198 7.3.3 Stack Construction 199 7.3.4 Stack Cooling and Manifolding 200 7.4 Performance 201 7.4.1 Operating Pressure 202 7.4.2 Operating Temperature 202 7.4.3 Effects of Fuel and Oxidant Composition 203 7.4.4 Effects of Carbon Monoxide and Sulfur 204 7.5 Technological Developments 204 Further Reading 206 8 Molten Carbonate Fuel Cells 207 8.1 Principles of Operation 207 8.2 Cell Components 210 8.2.1 Electrolyte 211 8.2.2 Anode 213 8.2.3 Cathode 214 8.2.4 Non-Porous Components 215 8.3 Stack Configuration and Sealing 215 8.3.1 Manifolding 216 8.3.2 Internal and External Reforming 218 8.4 Performance 220 8.4.1 Influence of Pressure 220 8.4.2 Influence of Temperature 222 8.5 Practical Systems 223 8.5.1 Fuel Cell Energy (USA) 223 8.5.2 Fuel Cell Energy Solutions (Europe) 225 8.5.3 Facilities in Japan 228 8.5.4 Facilities in South Korea 228 8.6 Future Research and Development 229 8.7 Hydrogen Production and Carbon Dioxide Separation 230 8.8 Direct Carbon Fuel Cell 231 Further Reading 234 9 Solid Oxide Fuel Cells 235 9.1 Principles of Operation 235 9.1.1 High-Temperature (HT) Cells 235 9.1.2 Low-Temperature (IT) Cells 237 9.2 Components 238 9.2.1 Zirconia Electrolyte for HT-Cells 238 9.2.2 Electrolytes for IT-Cells 240 9.2.2.1 Ceria 240 9.2.2.2 Perovskites 241 9.2.2.3 Other Materials 243 9.2.3 Anodes 243 9.2.3.1 Nickel-YSZ 243 9.2.3.2 Cathode 245 9.2.3.3 Mixed Ionic–Electronic Conductor Anode 246 9.2.4 Cathode 247 9.2.5 Interconnect Material 247 9.2.6 Sealing Materials 248 9.3 Practical Design and Stacking Arrangements 249 9.3.1 Tubular Design 249 9.3.2 Planar Design 251 9.4 Performance 253 9.5 Developmental and Commercial Systems 254 9.5.1 Tubular SOFCs 255 9.5.2 Planar SOFCs 256 9.6 Combined-Cycle and Other Systems 258 Further Reading 260 10 Fuels for Fuel Cells 263 10.1 Introduction 263 10.2 Fossil Fuels 266 10.2.1 Petroleum 266 10.2.2 Petroleum from Tar Sands, Oil Shales and Gas Hydrates 268 10.2.3 Coal and Coal Gases 268 10.2.4 Natural Gas and Coal-Bed Methane (Coal-Seam Gas) 270 10.3 Biofuels 272 10.4 Basics of Fuel Processing 275 10.4.1 Fuel-Cell Requirements 275 10.4.2 Desulfurization 275 10.4.3 Steam Reforming 277 10.4.4 Carbon Formation and Pre-Reforming 280 10.4.5 Internal Reforming 281 10.4.5.1 Indirect Internal Reforming (IIR) 283 10.4.5.2 Direct Internal Reforming (DIR) 283 10.4.6 Direct Hydrocarbon Oxidation 284 10.4.7 Partial Oxidation and Autothermal Reforming 285 10.4.8 Solar–Thermal Reforming 286 10.4.9 Sorbent-Enhanced Reforming 287 10.4.10 Hydrogen Generation by Pyrolysis or Thermal Cracking of Hydrocarbons 289 10.4.11 Further Fuel Processing: Removal of Carbon Monoxide 290 10.5 Membrane Developments for Gas Separation 293 10.5.1 Non-Porous Metal Membranes 293 10.5.2 Non-Porous Ceramic Membranes 294 10.5.3 Porous Membranes 294 10.5.4 Oxygen Separation 295 10.6 Practical Fuel Processing: Stationary Applications 295 10.6.1 Industrial Steam Reforming 295 10.6.2 Fuel-Cell Plants Operating with Steam Reforming of Natural Gas 296 10.6.3 Reformer and Partial Oxidation Designs 298 10.6.3.1 Conventional Packed-Bed Catalytic Reactors 298 10.6.3.2 Compact Reformers 299 10.6.3.3 Plate Reformers and Microchannel Reformers 300 10.6.3.4 Membrane Reactors 301 10.6.3.5 Non-Catalytic Partial Oxidation Reactors 302 10.6.3.6 Catalytic Partial Oxidation Reactors 303 10.7 Practical Fuel Processing: Mobile Applications 304 10.8 Electrolysers 305 10.8.1 Operation of Electrolysers 305 10.8.2 Applications 307 10.8.3 Electrolyser Efficiency 312 10.8.4 Photoelectrochemical Cells 312 10.9 Thermochemical Hydrogen Production and Chemical Looping 314 10.9.1 Thermochemical Cycles 314 10.9.2 Chemical Looping 317 10.10 Biological Production of Hydrogen 318 10.10.1 Introduction 318 10.10.2 Photosynthesis and Water Splitting 318 10.10.3 Biological Shift Reaction 320 10.10.4 Digestion Processes 320 Further Reading 321 11 Hydrogen Storage 323 11.1 Strategic Considerations 323 11.2 Safety 326 11.3 Compressed Hydrogen 327 11.3.1 Storage Cylinders 327 11.3.2 Storage Efficiency 329 11.3.3 Costs of Stored Hydrogen 330 11.3.4 Safety Aspects 330 11.4 Liquid Hydrogen 331 11.5 Reversible Metal Hydrides 333 11.6 Simple Hydrogen-Bearing Chemicals 338 11.6.1 Organic Chemicals 338 11.6.2 Alkali Metal Hydrides 339 11.6.3 Ammonia, Amines and Ammonia Borane 340 11.7 Complex Chemical Hydrides 341 11.7.1 Alanates 342 11.7.2 Borohydrides 342 11.8 Nanostructured Materials 344 11.9 Evaluation of Hydrogen Storage Methods 347 Further Reading 350 12 The Complete System and Its Future 351 12.1 Mechanical Balance-of-Plant Components 351 12.1.1 Compressors 351 12.1.1.1 Efficiency 354 12.1.1.2 Power 356 12.1.1.3 Performance Charts 356 12.1.1.4 Selection 359 12.1.2 Turbines 361 12.1.3 Ejector Circulators 362 12.1.4 Fans and Blowers 363 12.1.5 Pumps 364 12.2 Power Electronics 365 12.2.1 DC Regulators (Converters) and Electronic Switches 366 12.2.2 Step-Down Regulators 368 12.2.3 Step-Up Regulators 370 12.2.4 Inverters 371 12.2.4.1 Single Phase 372 12.2.4.2 Three Phase 376 12.2.5 Fuel-Cell Interface and Grid Connection Issues 378 12.2.6 Power Factor and Power Factor Correction 378 12.3 Hybrid Fuel-Cell + Battery Systems 380 12.4 Analysis of Fuel-Cell Systems 384 12.4.1 Well-to-Wheels Analysis 385 12.4.2 Power-Train Analysis 387 12.4.3 Life-Cycle Assessment 388 12.4.4 Process Modelling 389 12.4.5 Further Modelling 392 12.5 Commercial Reality 394 12.5.1 Back to Basics 394 12.5.2 Commercial Progress 395 12.6 Future Prospects: The Crystal Ball Remains Cloudy 397 Further Reading 399 Appendix 1 Calculations of the Change in Molar Gibbs Free Energy 401 A1.1 Hydrogen Fuel Cell 401 A1.2 Carbon Monoxide Fuel Cell 403 Appendix 2 Useful Fuel-Cell Equations 405 A2.1 Introduction 405 A2.2 Oxygen and Air Usage 406 A2.3 Exit Air Flow Rate 407 A2.4 Hydrogen Usage 407 A2.5 Rate of Water Production 408 A2.6 Heat Production 409 Appendix 3 Calculation of Power Required by Air Compressor and Power Recoverable by Turbine in Fuel-Cell Exhaust 411 A3.1 Power Required by Air Compressor 411 A3.2 Power Recoverable from Fuel-Cell Exhaust with a Turbine 412 Glossary of Terms 415 Index 437
£92.10
John Wiley & Sons Inc Microgrids
Book SynopsisMicrogrids are the most innovative area in the electric power industry today. Future microgrids could exist as energy-balanced cells within existing power distribution grids or stand-alone power networks within small communities.Table of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xv List of Contributors xix 1 The Microgrids Concept 1Christine Schwaegerl and Liang Tao 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 The Microgrid Concept as a Means to Integrate Distributed Generation 3 1.3 Clarification of the Microgrid Concept 4 1.4 Operation and Control of Microgrids 8 1.5 Market Models for Microgrids 12 1.6 Status Quo and Outlook of Microgrid Applications 22 2 Microgrids Control Issues 25Aris Dimeas, Antonis Tsikalakis, George Kariniotakis and George Korres 2.1 Introduction 25 2.2 Control Functions 25 2.3 The Role of Information and Communication Technology 27 2.4 Microgrid Control Architecture 28 2.5 Centralized and Decentralized Control 32 2.6 Forecasting 35 2.7 Centralized Control 40 2.8 Decentralized Control 51 2.9 State Estimation 72 2.10 Conclusions 76 3 Intelligent Local Controllers 81Thomas Degner, Nikos Soultani, Alfred Engler and Asier Gil de Muro 3.1 Introduction 81 3.2 Inverter Control Issues in the Formation of Microgrids 82 3.4 Implications of Line Parameters on Frequency and Voltage Droop Concepts 92 3.5 Development and Evaluation of Innovative Local Controls to Improve Stability 98 3.6 Conclusions 115 4 Microgrid Protection 117Alexander Oudalov, Thomas Degner, Frank van Overbeeke and Jose Miguel Yarza 4.1 Introduction 117 4.2 Challenges for Microgrid Protection 118 4.3 Adaptive Protection for Microgrids 125 4.4 Fault Current Source for Effective Protection in Islanded Operation 146 4.5 Fault Current Limitation in Microgrids 151 4.6 Conclusions 154 5 Operation of Multi-Microgrids 165Joao Abel PeScas Lopes, Andre Madureira, Nuno Gil and Fernanda Resende 5.1 Introduction 165 5.2 Multi-Microgrid Control and Management Architecture 167 5.3 Coordinated Voltage/var Support 169 5.4 Coordinated Frequency Control 178 5.5 Emergency Functions (Black Start) 186 5.6 Dynamic Equivalents 192 5.7 Conclusions 202 6 Pilot Sites: Success Stories and Learnt Lessons 206George Kariniotakis, Aris Dimeas and Frank Van Overbeeke (Sections 6.1, 6.2) 6.1 Introduction 206 6.2 Overview of Microgrid Projects in Europe 206 6.3 Overview of Microgrid Projects in the USA 231John Romankiewicz, Chris Marnay (Section 6.3) 6.4 Overview of Japanese Microgrid Projects 249Satoshi Morozumi (Section 6.4) 6.5 Overview of Microgrid Projects in China 262Meiqin Mao (Section 6.5) 6.6 An Off-Grid Microgrid in Chile 270Rodrigo Palma Behnke and Guillermo Jimenez-Estevez (Section 6.6) 7 Quantification of Technical, Economic, Environmental and Social Benefits of Microgrid Operation 275Christine Schwaegerl and Liang Tao 7.1 Introduction and Overview of Potential Microgrid Benefits 275 7.2 Setup of Benefit Quantification Study 278 7.3 Quantification of Microgrids Benefits under Standard Test Conditions 285 7.4 Impact of External Market Prices and Pricing Policies 296 7.5 Impact of Microgrid Operation Strategy 303 7.6 Extension to European Scale 307 7.7 Conclusions 310 References 313 Index 315
£72.86
R.S. Means Company Ltd Electrical Estimating Methods
Book Synopsis
£999.99
John Wiley & Sons Inc Introduction to Modern Power Electronics
Book SynopsisProvides comprehensive coverage of the basic principles and methods of electric power conversion and the latest developments in the fieldThis book constitutes a comprehensive overview of the modern power electronics. Various semiconductor power switches are described, complementary components and systems are presented, and power electronic converters that process power for a variety of applications are explained in detail. This third edition updates all chapters, including new concepts in modern power electronics. New to this edition is extended coverage of matrix converters, multilevel inverters, and applications of the Z-source in cascaded power converters. The book is accompanied by a website hosting an instructor's manual, a PowerPoint presentation, and a set of PSpice files for simulation of a variety of power electronic converters.Introduction to Modern Power Electronics, Third Edition: Discusses power conversion tTrade Review"This book would be an excellent introduction for those who want to learn about power electronics, or a refresher for those already familiar with the topic. The descriptions are clearly written and supported by numerous circuit schematics, drawings, and tables, which will help the reader fully grasp the subject matter.[Overall]... the book admirably serves the purpose of introducing power electronics to a wide audience of engineers." (IEEE Electrical Insulation magazine May 2017) Table of ContentsPreface xiii About the Companion Website xv 1 Principles of Electric Power Conversion 1 1.1 What is Power Electronics? 1 1.2 Generic Power Converter 3 1.3 Waveform Components and Figures of Merit 8 1.4 Phase Control and Square-Wave Mode 16 1.5 Pulse Width Modulation 22 1.6 Computation of Current Waveforms 30 1.6.1 Analytical Solution 30 1.6.2 Numerical Solution 35 1.6.3 Practical Example: Single-Phase Diode Rectifiers 38 Summary 43 Examples 43 Problems 50 Computer Assignments 53 Further Reading 56 2 Semiconductor Power Switches 57 2.1 General Properties of Semiconductor Power Switches 57 2.2 Power Diodes 59 2.3 Semi-Controlled Switches 63 2.3.1 SCRs 64 2.3.2 Triacs 67 2.4 Fully Controlled Switches 68 2.4.1 GTOs 68 2.4.2 IGCTs 69 2.4.3 Power BJTs 70 2.4.4 Power MOSFETs 74 2.4.5 IGBTs 75 2.5 Comparison of Semiconductor Power Switches 77 2.6 Power Modules 79 2.7 Wide Bandgap Devices 84 Summary 86 Further Reading 87 3 Supplementary Components and Systems 88 3.1 What Are Supplementary Components and Systems? 88 3.2 Drivers 89 3.2.1 Drivers for SCRs, Triacs, and BCTs 89 3.2.2 Drivers for GTOs and IGCTs 90 3.2.3 Drivers for BJTs 91 3.2.4 Drivers for Power MOSFETs and IGBTs 94 3.3 Overcurrent Protection Schemes 96 3.4 Snubbers 98 3.4.1 Snubbers for Power Diodes, SCRs, and Triacs 101 3.4.2 Snubbers for GTOs and IGCTs 102 3.4.3 Snubbers for Transistors 103 3.4.4 Energy Recovery from Snubbers 104 3.5 Filters 106 3.6 Cooling 109 3.7 Control 111 Summary 113 Further Reading 114 4 AC-to-DC Converters 115 4.1 Diode Rectifiers 115 4.1.1 Three-Pulse Diode Rectifier 115 4.1.2 Six-Pulse Diode Rectifier 117 4.2 Phase-Controlled Rectifiers 130 4.2.1 Phase-Controlled Six-Pulse Rectifier 130 4.2.2 Dual Converters 143 4.3 PWM Rectifiers 149 4.3.1 Impact of Input Filter 149 4.3.2 Principles of PWM 150 4.3.3 Current-Type PWM Rectifier 158 4.3.4 Voltage-Type PWM Rectifier 163 4.3.5 Vienna Rectifier 175 4.4 Device Selection for Rectifiers 178 4.5 Common Applications of Rectifiers 180 Summary 184 Examples 185 Problems 191 Computer Assignments 193 Further Reading 195 5 AC-to-AC Converters 196 5.1 AC Voltage Controllers 196 5.1.1 Phase-Controlled Single-Phase AC Voltage Controller 196 5.1.2 Phase-Controlled Three-Phase AC Voltage Controllers 203 5.1.3 PWM AC Voltage Controllers 211 5.2 Cycloconverters 215 5.3 Matrix Converters 220 5.3.1 Classic Matrix Converters 220 5.3.2 Sparse Matrix Converters 227 5.3.3 Z-Source Matrix Converters 230 5.4 Device Selection for AC-to-AC Converters 234 5.5 Common Applications of AC-to-AC Converters 235 Summary 236 Examples 237 Problems 241 Computer Assignments 242 Further Reading 243 6 DC-to-DC Converters 245 6.1 Static DC Switches 245 6.2 Step-Down Choppers 248 6.2.1 First-Quadrant Chopper 250 6.2.2 Second-Quadrant Chopper 254 6.2.3 First-and-Second-Quadrant Chopper 256 6.2.4 First-and-Fourth-Quadrant Chopper 258 6.2.5 Four-Quadrant Chopper 260 6.3 Step-Up Chopper 262 6.4 Current Control in Choppers 265 6.5 Device Selection for Choppers 265 6.6 Common Applications of Choppers 267 Summary 269 Examples 269 Problems 272 Computer Assignments 274 Further Reading 275 7 DC-to-AC Converters 276 7.1 Voltage-Source Inverters 276 7.1.1 Single-Phase VSI 277 7.1.2 Three-Phase VSI 286 7.1.3 Voltage Control Techniques for PWM Inverters 295 7.1.4 Current Control Techniques for VSIs 306 7.2 Current-Source Inverters 315 7.2.1 Three-Phase Square-Wave CSI 315 7.2.2 Three-Phase PWM CSI 319 7.3 Multilevel Inverters 322 7.3.1 Diode-Clamped Three-Level Inverter 324 7.3.2 Flying-Capacitor Three-Level Inverter 327 7.3.3 Cascaded H-Bridge Inverter 329 7.4 Soft-Switching Inverters 333 7.5 Device Selection for Inverters 341 7.6 Common Applications of Inverters 344 Summary 352 Examples 352 Problems 359 Computer Assignments 360 Further Reading 362 8 Switching Power Supplies 364 8.1 Basic Types of Switching Power Supplies 364 8.2 Nonisolated Switched-Mode DC-to-DC Converters 365 8.2.1 Buck Converter 366 8.2.2 Boost Converter 369 8.2.3 Buck–Boost Converter 371 8.2.4 Ĉuk Converter 374 8.2.5 SEPIC and Zeta Converters 378 8.2.6 Comparison of Nonisolated Switched-Mode DC-to-DC Converters 379 8.3 Isolated Switched-Mode DC-to-DC Converters 382 8.3.1 Single-Switch-Isolated DC-to-DC Converters 383 8.3.2 Multiple-Switch-Isolated DC-to-DC Converters 386 8.3.3 Comparison of Isolated Switched-Mode DC-to-DC Converters 389 8.4 Resonant DC-to-DC Converters 390 8.4.1 Quasi-Resonant Converters 391 8.4.2 Load-Resonant Converters 395 8.4.3 Comparison of Resonant DC-to-DC Converters 402 Summary 402 Examples 403 Problems 406 Computer Assignments 408 Further Reading 410 9 Power Electronics and Clean Energy 411 9.1 Why is Power Electronics Indispensable in Clean Energy Systems? 411 9.2 Solar and Wind Renewable Energy Systems 413 9.2.1 Solar Energy Systems 413 9.2.2 Wind Energy Systems 417 9.3 Fuel Cell Energy Systems 422 9.4 Electric Cars 424 9.5 Hybrid Cars 426 9.6 Power Electronics and Energy Conservation 430 Summary 431 Further Reading 432 Appendix A Spice Simulations 433 Appendix B Fourier Series 438 Appendix C Three-Phase Systems 442 Index 447
£90.86
John Wiley & Sons Inc Current Signature Analysis for Condition
Book SynopsisProvides coverage of Motor Current Signature Analysis (MCSA) for cage induction motors This book is primarily for industrial engineers. It has 13 chapters and contains a unique data base of 50 industrial case histories on the application of MCSA to diagnose broken rotor bars or unacceptable levels of airgap eccentricity in cage induction motors with ratings from 127 kW (170 H.P.) up to 10,160 kW (13,620 H.P.). There are also unsuccessful case histories, which is another unique feature of the book. The case studies also illustrate the effects of mechanical load dynamics downstream of the motor on the interpretation of current signatures. A number of cases are presented where abnormal operation of the driven load was diagnosed. Chapter 13 presents a critical appraisal of MCSA including successes, failures and lessons learned via industrial case histories. The case histories are presented in a step by step format, with predictions and outcomes supported by cuTable of ContentsABOUT THE AUTHORS xiii OBITUARY TO IAN CULBERT xv ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xvii FOREWORD xix PREFACE xxiii NOMENCLATURE xxvii ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS xxxiii RELEVANT UNITS OF EQUIVALENCE USEFUL FOR THIS BOOK xxxv CHAPTER 1 MOTOR CURRENT SIGNATURE ANALYSIS FOR INDUCTION MOTORS 1 1.0 Introduction 1 1.1 Historical Development of MCSA and Goals of This Book 4 1.2 Basic Theory of Operation of the 3-Phase Induction Motor 6 1.3 Starting and Run-Up Characteristics of SCIMs 20 1.4 Illustrations of Construction of a Large HV SCIM 29 1.5 Questions 33 References 34 CHAPTER 2 DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION, AND MANUFACTURE OF SQUIRREL CAGE ROTORS 39 2.0 Introduction 39 2.1 Aluminum and Copper Die-Cast Windings 40 2.2 Fabricated Squirrel Cage Windings 43 2.3 Design and Manufacturing Features of Squirrel Cage Rotor Windings to Minimize Failures 52 2.4 Questions 53 References 54 CHAPTER 3 CAUSES OF BREAKS IN SQUIRREL CAGE WINDINGS DURING DIRECT-ON-LINE STARTS AND STEADY-STATE OPERATION 55 3.0 Introduction 55 3.1 Mechanical Stresses and Consequential Forces on Rotor Bars and End Rings 56 3.2 Thermal Stresses in the Rotor Bars and End Rings 57 3.3 Broken Bars and End Rings Due to Combined Mechanical and Thermal Stresses When Starting High Inertia Loads 59 3.4 Rotor Bar Stresses Resulting from a Loose Slot Fit 60 3.5 Strengths and Weaknesses of Certain Bar and End Ring Shapes and Types of Joints 62 3.6 Pulsating Loads Due to Crushers and Compressors 62 3.7 Direct-On-Line Starting of Large Induction Motors Driving High Inertia Fans 63 3.8 Direct-On-Line Starting of Large Induction Motors Driving Centrifugal Pumps 66 3.9 Limitations on Repetitive Motor Starts 68 3.10 Criteria for Design of Squirrel Cage Rotor Windings 69 3.11 Samples of Breaks in Squirrel Cage Rotor Windings 72 3.12 Questions 77 References 77 Further Reading 78 CHAPTER 4 MOTOR CURRENT SIGNATURE ANALYSIS (MCSA) TO DETECT CAGE WINDING DEFECTS 79 4.0 Summary 79 4.1 Introduction 79 4.2 Derivation of Current Component at f (1 − 2s) 82 4.3 Reasons for Current Component at f (1 + 2s) 83 4.4 Spectrum Analysis of Current 85 4.5 Severity Indicators for Assessing Condition of Cage Windings at Full-Load 93 4.6 The dB Broken Bar Severity Chart 110 4.7 Influence of Number of Rotor Bars and Pole Number on the Equivalent Broken Bar Factor with Measured dB Difference Values 111 4.8 Questions 116 References 118 CHAPTER 5 MCSA INDUSTRIAL CASE HISTORIES—DIAGNOSIS OF CAGE WINDING DEFECTS IN SCIMs DRIVING STEADY LOADS 119 5.0 Introduction and Summary of Case Histories 119 5.1 Case History (2000–2014)—Summary and Key Features 120 5.2 Case History (1983)—Summary and Key Features 122 5.3 Case History (1982)—Summary and Key Features 125 5.4 Case History (2002)—Summary and Key Features 128 5.5 Case History (1985–1987)—Summary and Key Features 133 5.6 Case History (2006)—Summary and Key Features 136 5.7 MCSA Case History (2004)—Summary and Key Features 139 5.8 MCSA Case History (2004)—Summary and Key Features 141 5.9 Questions 143 References 144 CHAPTER 6 MCSA CASE HISTORIES—DIAGNOSIS OF CAGE WINDING DEFECTS IN SCIMs FITTED WITH END RING RETAINING RINGS 147 6.0 Introduction and Summary of Case Histories 147 6.1 Case History (2006)—Summary 148 6.2 Concluding Remarks on this Challenging Case History 160 6.3 Case History (1990)—Summary and Key Features 161 6.4 Summary and Lessons Learned from Industrial Case Histories in Chapters 5 and 6 166 6.5 Questions 170 References 172 CHAPTER 7 MCSA CASE HISTORIES—CYCLIC LOADS CAN CAUSE FALSE POSITIVES OF CAGE WINDING BREAKS 173 7.1 Introduction and Summary of Case Histories 173 7.2 Case History (2006)—Effect of Gas Recycling in a Centrifugal Gas Compressor and the Detection of Broken Rotor Bars 179 7.3 Case History: False Positive of Broken Rotor Bars Due to Recycling of Gas in a Centrifugal Compressor 180 7.4 Two Case Histories (2002 and 2013)—Broken Rotor Bars in the Same SCIM without and with Gas Recycling in a Gas Compressor 185 7.5 Case History 1986–Fluid Coupling Dynamics Caused a False Positive of a Cage Winding Break 193 7.6 Questions 198 References 200 CHAPTER 8 MCSA CASE HISTORIES—SCIM DRIVES WITH SLOW SPEED GEARBOXES AND FLUCTUATING LOADS CAN GIVE FALSE POSITIVES OF BROKEN ROTOR BARS 201 8.1 Introduction and Summary of Case Histories 201 8.2 Case History (1989)—Slow Speed Coal Conveyor, Load Fluctuations, and Gearbox in the Drive Train 213 8.3 MCSA Case History (1990)—Possible False Positive of Broken Rotor Bars in a SCIM Driving a Coal Conveyor Via a Slow Speed Gearbox 216 8.4 Case History (1992)—Impossible to Analyze MCSA Data Due to Severe Random Current Fluctuations from The Mechanical Load Dynamics from the Coal Crusher 217 8.5 Case History (1995)—Successful Assessment of Cage Windings When the Load Current Fluctuations are Normal from a SCIM Driving Coal Crusher 221 8.6 Two Case Histories (2015)—False Positive of Broken Bars in One of the SCIMs Driving Thrusters on an FPSO If Influence of Drive Dynamics is Discounted 227 8.7 Questions 237 References 238 CHAPTER 9 MISCELLANEOUS MCSA CASE HISTORIES 241 9.0 Introduction and Summary of Case Histories 241 9.1 Possible False Positives of Cage Winding Breaks in Two 1850 kW SCIMs, Due to Number of Poles (2p) Equal to Number of Spider Support Arms (Sp) on Shaft (1991) 242 9.2 Case History (2007)—SCIM with Number of Poles Equal to Number of Kidney Shaped Axial Ducts in the Rotor—False Positive of Broken Bars Prevented by Load Changes 251 9.3 Two Case Histories (2005–2008)—Normal and Abnormal Pumping Dynamics in Two SCIM Seawater Lift Pump Drive Trains 253 9.4 MCSA Case History (2006–2007)—Slack and Worn Belt Drives in Two SCIM Cooling Fan Drives in a Cement Factory 259 9.5 Application of MCSA to Inverter-FED LV and HV SCIMs 263 9.6 Case History (1990)—Assessment of the Mechanical Operational Condition of an Electrical Submersible Pump (ESP) Driven by a SCIM Used in Artificial Oil Lift 267 9.7 Questions 270 References 271 CHAPTER 10 MCSA TO ESTIMATE THE OPERATIONAL AIRGAP ECCENTRICITY IN SQUIRREL CAGE INDUCTION MOTORS 273 10.0 Summary and Introduction 273 10.1 Definition of Airgap Eccentricity 274 10.2 Causes and Associated Types of Airgap Eccentricity 276 10.3 Unbalanced Magnetic Pull (UMP) and Rotor Pull-Over 281 10.4 Current Signature Pattern due to Airgap Eccentricity 284 10.5 Questions 294 References 295 CHAPTER 11 CASE HISTORIES—SUCCESSFUL AND UNSUCCESSFUL APPLICATION OF MCSA TO ESTIMATE OPERATIONAL AIRGAP ECCENTRICITY IN SCIMS 299 11.0 Summary and List of Case Histories 299 11.1 Flow Chart of MCSA Procedure to Estimate Operational Airgap Eccentricity 300 11.2 Case History (1989)—Low Level of Airgap Eccentricity in a SCIM Driving a Centrifugal Air Compressor 302 11.3 Two Case Histories (2004)—Operational Airgap Eccentricity in Nominally Identical SCIMs Driving Pumps in a CCGT Power Station 307 11.4 Four Case Histories (2005)—Abnormal Level of Airgap Eccentricity in a Large, Low Speed, HV Motor Driving a Cooling Water Pump in a Power Station 310 11.5 Case History (1988)—High Level of Airgap Eccentricity in an HV SCIM Driving a Pump in a Large Oil Storage Tank Facility 318 11.6 Case History (2001)—High Airgap Eccentricity in a Cooling Water Pump Motor that Caused Severe Mechanical Damage to HV Stator Coils 324 11.7 Case History (2008)—Unsuccessful Application of MCSA Applied to a Large (6300 kW), Inverter-FED, 6600 V SCIM During a No-Load Run to Assess Its Operational Airgap Eccentricity 332 11.8 Case History (2008)—Successful Application of MCSA Applied to a Large (4500 kW), Inverter-Fed, 3300 V SCIM to Assess its Operational Airgap Eccentricity 335 11.9 Case History (2007)—Advanced MCSA Interpretation of Current Spectra Was Required to Verify High Airgap Eccentricity in an HV SCIM Driving a Primary Air (PA) Fan in a Power Station 339 11.10 Case History (1990)—Unsuccessful MCSA Case History to Assess Operational Airgap Eccentricity in an HV SCIM Driving a Slow Speed Reciprocating Compressor 343 11.11 Case History (2002)—Predict Number of Rotor Slots and Assessment of Operational Airgap Eccentricity in a Large 6600 V, 6714 kW/9000 HP SCIM Driving a Centrifugal Compressor 347 11.12 Questions 353 References 357 CHAPTER 12 CRITICAL APPRAISAL OF MCSA TO DIAGNOSE SHORT CIRCUITED TURNS IN LV AND HV STATOR WINDINGS AND FAULTS IN ROLLER ELEMENT BEARINGS IN SCIMS 359 12.1 Summary 359 12.2 Shorted Turns in HV Stator Winding Coils 361 12.3 Detection of Shorted Turns Via MCSA under Controlled Experimental Conditions 364 12.4 Detection of Defects in Roller Element Bearings Via MCSA 368 12.5 Questions 371 References 372 CHAPTER 13 APPRAISAL OF MCSA INCLUDING LESSONS LEARNED VIA INDUSTRIAL CASE HISTORIES 375 13.1 Summary of MCSA in Industry to Diagnose Cage Winding Breaks 375 13.2 Flow Chart for Measurement and Analysis of Current to Diagnose Cage Winding Breaks 375 13.3 MCSA to Diagnose Broken Rotor Bars in SCIMs Driving Steady Loads 379 13.4 Number of Rotor Bars, External Constraints, and Lessons Learned 380 13.5 Effect of End Ring Retaining Rings (ERRS) on Diagnosis of Broken Rotor Bars 381 13.6 MCSA Applied to SCIMs Driving Complex Mechanical Plant, Lessons Learned, and Recommendations 382 13.7 Double Cage Rotors—Classical MCSA can only Detect Cage Winding Breaks in Inner Run Winding 382 13.8 MCSA to Diagnose Operational Levels of Airgap Eccentricity in SCIMs 383 13.9 Recommendations to End Users 385 13.10 Suggested Research and Development Projects 386 References 388 Appendix 13.A Commentary on Interpretation of LV and HV Used in SCIMs 388 LIST OF EQUATIONS 389 INDEX 393
£106.16
John Wiley & Sons Inc Technology Manufacturing and Grid Connection of
Book SynopsisA unique guide to the most important technical aspects of photovoltaic power generation with comprehensive analysis and author industry-experience Unique from other books in the area in that it explains profound theories in simple language, introduces widely used production equipment and processes for industry professionals, and explains the complete PV industry chain from material to power generationHas originated from the author's practical industry experience, enabling the use of up-to-date information during this time of new development in the Chinese PV industryContent includes approximately 255 illustrations and 46 tables to help clarify complex theories.Table of ContentsAbout the Author xv Preface xvii 1 Basic Physics of Solar Cells 1 1.1 Development of Solar Cells 1 1.1.1 Solar Energy Is the Most Promising Renewable Energy Source in the World 1 1.1.2 Development of Solar Cells 4 1.2 Solar Radiation and Air Mass 6 1.2.1 Conversion of Sunlight Into Electricity Using Photoelectric Effect Is an ImportantWay to Make Use of Solar Energy 6 1.2.2 Basics of Solar Radiation and Definition of Air Mass 6 1.2.3 Wavelength of Solar Radiation 7 1.3 Basics of Semiconductors 8 1.3.1 Communisation Motion of Electrons in a Crystalline and Formation of Energy Bands 9 1.3.2 Atomic Structures of Conductors, Insulators and Semiconductors and Energy Bands Image 9 1.3.3 Energy Band Structure of Dope Semiconductor 10 1.3.4 Fermi Level 11 1.3.5 DirectionalMovement of Electrons and Holes 12 1.3.6 Generation and Recombination of Carriers 13 1.4 Light Absorption of Semiconductor Materials 14 1.4.1 Light Absorption of Semiconductor 14 1.4.2 Intrinsic and Non-Intrinsic Absorptions of Semiconductor Materials 15 1.4.3 Light Absorption Coefficient and Semiconductor Materials of Direct/Indirect Transition 16 1.5 P-N Junctions and PV Effect of Solar Cells 18 1.5.1 Bending of a P-N Junction Band and Formation of a Built-In Field 18 1.5.2 Effect of an External Voltage on the P-N Junction Band Structure 20 1.5.3 Effect of Solar Radiation on a P-N Junction’s Band Structure and the PV Effect 20 1.5.4 Composition of the Photo-Generated Current in the Solar Cell 22 1.5.5 Key Parameters of the Solar Cell 24 1.5.5.1 I-V Characteristic Curve of a Solar Cell 24 1.5.5.2 Relations of the Open-Circuit Voltage and the Height of the P-N Junction Potential Barrier in a Solar Cell 24 1.5.5.3 Short-Circuit Current of a Solar Cell Isc 24 1.5.5.4 The Optimum Operation Point of Solar Cells, the Optimum Operation Voltage and Current 25 1.5.5.5 Filling Factor (FF) 26 1.5.5.6 Power Conversion Efficiency of a Solar Cell η 26 1.5.5.7 Temperature Characteristics of a Solar Cell 27 1.5.6 Application of a Concentration Junction in a PV Cell for Back Surface Field (BSF) 27 1.5.7 Basic Structure of Homogeneous P-N Junction Crystalline Silicon Solar Cells and Analysis on the Cell’s Efficiency 29 1.6 Solar Cells of Heterojunctions 32 1.6.1 Composition of Heterojunctions 32 1.6.2 Construction andWorking Principle of the Solar Cell with Heterojunctions 32 2 Materials of Solar Cells 35 2.1 Low-Cost Solar-Grade Polycrystalline Silicon 35 2.1.1 Polycrystalline Silicon—The Most Important Raw Material of the PV Industry 35 2.1.2 Meaning of Solar-Grade Polycrystalline Silicon 38 2.1.3 Preparation of Solar-Grade Polycrystalline Silicon (UMG Silicon) by MetallurgicalMethod 41 2.1.4 Preparation of Solar-Grade Polycrystalline Silicon by FBR Method 45 2.1.5 Preparation of Solar-Grade Polycrystalline Silicon by SiCl4 Zinc Reduction Method 45 2.1.6 Preparation of Solar-Grade Granular Polycrystalline Silicon by VLD Method 47 2.1.7 Hydrogenation of the Main By-Product SiCl4 Produced in the Production Process of Polycrystalline Silicon by the SiemensMethod 48 2.2 Casting Polycrystalline Silicon 49 2.2.1 General 49 2.2.2 Preparation Process of Casting Crystalline Silicon 50 2.2.3 Impurities and Defects in Casting Crystalline Silicon 54 2.2.3.1 Non-Metal Impurities in Casting Crystalline Silicon 54 2.2.3.2 Metal Impurities and Gettering in Casting Crystalline Silicon 56 2.2.3.3 Crystal Boundaries and Dislocations in Casting Crystalline Silicon 57 2.2.4 Latest Development of Casting Crystalline Silicon andWafers 58 2.2.4.1 Casting of Pseudo-Single Crystal 58 2.2.4.2 Continuous Output Improvement of Casting Crystalline Silicon Furnaces 59 2.3 CZ Monocrystalline Silicon 60 2.3.1 Heat Flow Continuity Equation of Grain Growth Interface and its Application 60 2.3.2 Heat Conduction in the Melt 62 2.3.3 Temperature Distribution in the Crystal 63 2.3.4 Impurity Segregation Between Solid and Liquid 64 2.4 Nature of a-Si/μC-SiThin Film 66 2.4.1 Nature of a-SiThin Film 66 2.4.1.1 Basic Nature of a-Si Thin Film and its Application to PV Sector 67 2.4.1.2 Fermi Level Pinning and Efficiency DegradationMechanism for a-Si Thin-film Cells 69 2.4.2 Nature of μC-SiThin Film 70 2.5 PreparationMethods of a-Si/μC-Si Film 72 2.5.1 A Main Raw Material for Silicon Film Preparation—Silane 72 2.5.2 Introduction to Silicon Thin-film Growth Methods 74 2.5.3 Preparation of a-Si/μC-SiThin Film by PECVD Method 74 2.5.4 Preparation of a-Si/μC-SiThin Film by HWCVD Method 75 2.5.5 Growing SiliconThin Film by Other Methods 76 2.5.5.1 Direct Preparation of μC-SiThin Film by LPCVD Technique 76 2.5.5.2 a-Si Crystallised to Polycrystalline SiliconThin Film by SPC Technique 77 2.5.5.3 a-Si Crystallised to Polycrystalline SiliconThin Film by Metal-Induced Method 77 2.5.5.4 a-Si Crystallised to Polycrystalline SiliconThin Film by RTP Technique 77 2.5.5.5 a-Si Crystallised to Polycrystalline SiliconThin Film by Linear Laser Technique 78 2.5.6 Comparisons of Various Silicon Film Growth Methods 78 2.6 Compound Semiconductor Materials 79 2.6.1 GaAs and Other Semiconductor Materials 79 2.6.2 CdTe and CdSThin Film Materials 80 2.6.3 CuInSe2 and CuInS2 Thin Film Materials 80 2.7 Analysis on Impurities in Semiconductor Materials 81 2.7.1 Glow Discharge Mass Spectrometry (GDMS) Analysis 81 2.7.2 Secondary Ion Mass Spectrometry (SIMS) Analysis 82 2.7.3 Infrared Spectroscopy to Detect the Carbon and Oxygen Contents in SiliconWafer 84 3 Preparation Methods of Crystalline Silicon Solar Cells 85 3.1 Preparation Process Flow of CSSCs 85 3.1.1 Basic Structure of CSSCs 85 3.1.2 Production Flow of CSSCs 87 3.2 Performance Detection and Sorting of Raw SiliconWafer 88 3.2.1 Measurement of SiliconWafer Conduction Type 88 3.2.2 Measurement of SiliconWafer Resistivity and Thin Layer Square Resistance 89 3.2.3 Measurement of the Minority Carrier Lifetime 90 3.2.4 Measurement of SiliconWafer Thickness 92 3.2.5 High-Speed Multi-Purpose SiliconWafer Testers 92 3.3 SiliconWafer Surface Cleaning and Texturing 93 3.3.1 Principles of Chemical Cleaning and Texturing 93 3.3.2 Production Equipment and Process of Chemical Corrosion Texturing 94 3.3.3 Laser Texturing and Reactive Ion Etching (RIE) Techniques 95 3.3.3.1 Laser Texturing 97 3.3.3.2 RIE 98 3.4 Junction Preparation by Diffusion 99 3.4.1 Principles 99 3.4.2 Process and Equipment 100 3.4.2.1 Gaseous Diffusion of POCl3 in Tubular Furnace 100 3.4.2.2 Dilute Phosphoric Acid Doper and Chain-Type Diffusion Furnace 102 3.4.3 Measurement of Diffusion LayerThickness (Junction Depth) 103 3.4.3.1 Measurement of the Longitudinal Distribution of the Phosphorus Concentration on the Diffusion Layer by SIMS Method 103 3.4.3.2 Measurement of PN Junction Depth by SRP 103 3.4.4 CSSC Phosphorus Impurity Gettering 104 3.5 Plasma Corrosion and Laser Edging Isolation 106 3.5.1 Objectives and Means of Edging Isolation 106 3.5.2 Principles and Equipment of Plasma Etching 107 3.5.3 Laser Edging Isolation 109 3.6 Removal of PSG 110 3.6.1 Principles and Processes of PSG Removal 110 3.6.2 Equipment and Production Line for PSG Removal 111 3.6.2.1 Bath-Type PSG-Removal Integrated Production System 111 3.6.2.2 Chain-Type PSG-Removal Production System 112 3.7 Preparation of Anti-Reflection Coating by PECVD and PVD Methods 112 3.7.1 Objectives and Principles for Anti-Reflection Coating Preparation 112 3.7.2 Principles of Silicon Nitride Coating Prepared by PECVD 113 3.7.3 Direct (Tubular) PECVD and Indirect (Plate-Type) PECVD 115 3.7.4 Typical PECVD Systems 117 3.7.4.1 Tubular Direct PECVD System 117 3.7.4.2 Plate-Type Direct PECVD System 117 3.7.4.3 Plate-Type Indirect PECVD System 118 3.7.5 Preparation of Silicon Nitride Coating by Physical Vapour Deposition (PVD) 119 3.7.5.1 Principles of Silicon Nitride Coating Prepared by PVD 119 3.7.5.2 Comparisons of Silicon Nitride Coating Deposited by PVD and PECVD 121 3.7.5.3 ATON Sputtering System Produced by Applied Materials, USA 122 3.7.6 Measurement of theThickness and Refractive Index of the Anti-Reflection Coating by Ellipsometer 122 3.8 Preparation of Top/Bottom Electrodes (Surface Metallisation) 123 3.8.1 Technical Requirements and Production Flow for Top/Bottom Electrode Preparation 123 3.8.2 Electrode Printing, Drying, Testing and Cell sorting 125 3.8.3 Fast Sintering Furnace System 126 3.8.4 Electrode Slurry 128 3.8.5 Aluminum Impurity Gettering 130 3.9 Cell Testing and Sorting 130 3.9.1 Objectives of Solar Cell Testing and Sorting 130 3.9.2 Cell-sorting Equipment 130 3.10 Automation of CSSC Production Techniques 133 3.10.1 Promotion of Cascading/Chain-Type Production Lines 133 3.10.2 Mounting/Dismounting the SiliconWafer by Robots Instead of Manual Operation 133 3.11 ParameterMeasurement in CSSC Production Process 136 3.11.1 Solar Simulator 136 3.11.2 Measurement of V-I Characteristics and PV Conversion Efficiency for Solar Cells 136 3.11.3 Measurement of Spectral Response for Solar Cells 139 3.12 Product Quality Control and Cost Analysis for Solar Cell Production Lines 140 3.12.1 On-line Inspection of Solar Cell Production 140 3.12.2 Traditional Process Quality Control on the Solar Cell Production Line 140 3.12.2.1 Working Environment 140 3.12.2.2 Quality Control of the Cleaning and Texturing Process 140 3.12.2.3 Quality Control of Diffusion Process 141 3.12.2.4 Quality Control inWafer Edging Isolation and PSG Removal Procedures 141 3.12.2.5 Quality Control in PECVD Procedure 141 3.12.2.6 Quality Control in Print and Sintering Procedures 141 3.12.3 Cost Analysis for CSSCs 142 4 Preparation Methods of Thin Film Silicon Solar Cells 143 4.1 Advantages and Prospects of TFSSCs 143 4.1.1 Advantages of TFSSCs 143 4.1.2 History and Prospects of TFSSCs 144 4.2 Structures and Power Generation Principles of TFSSCs 146 4.2.1 Structures of a-Si:H and μC-Si THSCs 146 4.2.2 Power Generation Principle of TFSSCs 147 4.2.3 Light Absorption of a-SiC:H/μC-Si and a-Si:H/a-SiGe:H Stacked Solar Cells 150 4.3 Preparation Techniques of TFSSCs 151 4.3.1 TCO Sputtered on Glass Substrate 151 4.3.2 P-Type (a-SiC:H) Film Deposited by PECVD Method 152 4.3.3 I (a-Si:H) Intrinsic Zone Deposited by PECVD Method 152 4.3.4 N-Type (a-Si:H) Layer Thin Film Deposited by PECVD Method 154 4.3.5 Al(Ag) Back Electrodes Sputtered by PVD Method 154 4.3.6 Integration of TFSCs and Modules 154 4.4 Main Production Equipment for TFSSCs 155 4.4.1 Production System of TFSSCs 155 4.4.2 Glass Cleaning and Surface Texturing Equipment 158 4.4.3 TCO Sputtering Equipment and ZAO Target 158 4.4.4 PECVD System forThin Film Silicon Deposition 160 4.4.5 Back Contact Sputtering Equipment 163 4.4.6 Laser Scriber 164 4.4.7 Testing Equipment 165 4.5 Discussion on Some Issues Concerning TFSSC Preparation 166 4.5.1 Performance, Preparation and Testing of TCO 166 4.5.2 Influence of PECVD Process Parameters on Deposition and Crystallisation Rates of Silicon Thin Film 167 4.5.2.1 Hydrogen Dilution 167 4.5.2.2 Gas Pressure 167 4.5.2.3 Deposition Temperature 168 4.5.2.4 Distance Between the Electrode and the Substrate 168 4.5.2.5 Power Excited by Plasma 169 4.5.2.6 Frequency Excited by Plasma 169 4.5.3 VHF-PECVD Method to Deposit Silicon Film 169 4.5.4 HWCVD Method to Deposit Silicon Film 170 4.6 Adjustment of TFSSC Energy Band Structure 171 4.6.1 Methods to Adjust the Band Gap of Thin Film Silicon 171 4.6.1.1 Significance of Energy Band Structure Adjustment for TFSSCs 171 4.6.1.2 Gap Adjustment by a-Si Hydrogen Content and Deposition Temperature 172 4.6.1.3 a-SiC Carbon Material toWiden the Gap 172 4.6.1.4 a-Si Ge Material to Narrow Down the Gap 172 4.6.2 a-SiGe TFSCs 172 4.6.3 Boron, Phosphorous and Hydrogen in a-Si Film 175 4.7 Physical Principle of PECVD and Deposition of SiliconThin Film 175 4.7.1 Glow Discharge and Plasma Generation 175 4.7.2 Mechanism on a-Si Thin Film Grown by PECVD Method 177 4.7.2.1 Basic Principles of PECVD 177 4.7.2.2 a-Si:H (a-Si-Containing Hydrogen) Deposited by PECVD Method 178 4.7.2.3 Growth Mechanism 179 4.8 Physical Sputtering Principles and TCO and Back Metal Preparation System 179 4.8.1 Overview on TCO and Back Metal Deposited by Physical Sputtering 179 4.8.2 A Simple Parallel Metal DC Diode Sputtering System 182 4.8.3 RF and MC Sputtering Systems 183 5 High-Efficiency Silicon Solar Cells and Non-Silicon-Based New Solar Cells 187 5.1 High-Efficiency Crystalline Silicon Solar Cells (CSSCs) 187 5.1.1 Selective Emitters and Buried Contact Silicon Solar Cells 188 5.1.2 Passivation Emitter Silicon Solar Cells 190 5.1.3 Back Finger Electrodes and Boron Diffusion N-Type Crystalline Silicon (IBC) Solar Cells 192 5.1.4 MetallisationWrap-Through (MWT) Silicon Solar Cells 193 5.2 Production Techniques of HIT High-Efficiency Solar Cells 196 5.2.1 a-Si/Monocrystalline Silicon Heterojunctions with Intrinsic Layer 196 5.2.2 Structure and Techniques of Double-Surface HIT Cells 196 5.2.3 Characteristics of HIT Cells 197 5.3 Compound Semiconductor Solar Cells 197 5.3.1 Fabrication Methods of Compound Solar Cells 197 5.3.1.1 Vacuum Evaporation Technique 197 5.3.1.2 Liquid Phase Epitaxy (LPE) Technique 198 5.3.1.3 Metal Organic Chemical Vapour Deposition (MOCVD) Technique 198 5.3.1.4 Molecular Beam Epitaxy (MBE) 198 5.3.2 III–V Compound Multi-Junction Crystalline Solar Cells 199 5.3.3 Cadmium Telluride (CdTe) TFSCs 201 5.3.4 CIGS TFSCs 204 5.3.4.1 Vacuum Co-Evaporation and Vacuum-Sputtering Methods 205 5.3.4.2 Non-Vacuum Method 207 5.3.4.3 Roll to Roll Method 209 5.4 Next-Generation Solar Cells 210 5.4.1 Organic Solar Cells 210 5.4.2 Dye-Sensitised Solar Cells 213 5.4.3 Perovskite Solar Cells 215 5.4.4 Concentrator Solar Cells 217 5.4.5 Multiple QuantumWell (MQW) Solar Cells 219 6 Modules and Arrays of Solar Cells 223 6.1 General 223 6.1.1 Modules and Arrays of Solar Cells 223 6.1.2 Packaging Techniques of Several Solar Cell Modules 224 6.1.3 Packaging Structure of Flat Plate Solar Cell Modules 224 6.1.4 Solar Cell Modules for Building Integrated PV (BIPV) 225 6.1.5 Double-Sided Cells and Modules 228 6.2 Module Packaging Materials 229 6.2.1 Inspection and Sorting of CellWafers 230 6.2.2 Upper Cover Glass 231 6.2.3 Adhesives and Modified EVA Film 232 6.2.4 Back Plate and Localisation 233 6.2.5 Frameworks and Junction Boxes and Other Materials 235 6.3 Module Packaging Techniques 237 6.4 Module Packaging System 239 6.4.1 Main Equipment in the Production Line of Solar Cell Modules 239 6.4.2 Laser Scribers 240 6.4.3 CellWelders 240 6.4.4 Solar Cell Module Laminators 242 6.4.5 Solar Simulators, Turnover Trolleys and Frame Machines 242 6.5 Reliability of Solar Cell Modules and Inspection After Packaging 242 6.5.1 Module Packaging and PV System Reliability 242 6.5.2 Objectives and Descriptions of Solar Cell and Module Tests 244 6.5.2.1 Indoor Tests of PV Cells 245 6.5.2.2 Indoor Tests of PV Modules 245 6.5.2.3 Outdoor Tests of PV Modules 245 6.5.3 Testing Methods and Verification Standards of Solar Cell Modules 246 6.5.4 Tests of PV Performance and Macro Defects of Solar Cell Modules 247 6.5.4.1 Tests of PV Performance of Solar Cell Modules 247 6.5.4.2 Tests of Macro Defects of Solar Cells and the Modules 247 6.5.4.3 Testing Principles of Electroluminescence 249 6.6 Efficiency, Common Specifications and Market Development Trend of Solar Cell Modules 250 6.6.1 Estimates of Solar Cell Module Power and Efficiency 250 6.6.2 Common Specifications in the Solar Cell Module Market 252 6.6.3 Attenuation of Solar Cell Module Power During Usage 253 6.6.4 Development Trend of Solar Cell Modules in China 253 6.7 Solar Cell Arrays 254 6.7.1 Design of Solar Cell Arrays 254 6.7.2 Array Electrical Connections and Hot Spot Effect 255 6.7.3 Installation and Measurement of Arrays 256 7 PV Systems and Grid-Connected Technologies 259 7.1 Overview on the PV System 259 7.1.1 Characteristics, Classifications and Compositions of the PV System 259 7.1.2 Composition and SimpleWorking Principles of the PV System 263 7.2 Energy Storage Batteries 265 7.2.1 Energy Storage Batteries andTheir Application to PV System 265 7.2.2 Lead-Acid Batteries 266 7.2.3 Lithium Ion Batteries 268 7.2.4 Liquid Flow Energy Storage Batteries 269 7.2.4.1 Sodium-Sulphur Batteries 269 7.2.4.2 Vanadium Redox Batteries 270 7.2.4.3 Zinc-Bromine Flow Batteries 270 7.2.5 Super Capacitors 271 7.2.6 Fuel Cells 272 7.2.6.1 General 272 7.2.7 Capacity Design of Battery Packs 274 7.3 Core of the Inverter—Power-Switching Devices 275 7.3.1 MOSFET and IGBT and Other Power Electronic Power-Switching Devices 275 7.3.2 Structure andWorking Principles of IGBT 275 7.3.3 Development History of IGBT 278 7.3.3.1 Trench Gate Technology 278 7.3.3.2 Non-Punch-Through (NPT) Technique 278 7.3.3.3 Filed Stop (FS) Technology 279 7.4 Inverters 281 7.4.1 Role of the Inverter in the PV System 281 7.4.2 Working Principles of the Inverter 282 7.4.3 Control of the Inverter 285 7.4.4 Inverter Circuit and Inverter Types 285 7.4.5 Selection and Requirements of Inverters for PV Applications 286 7.5 Controllers: Module Power Optimisation and IntelligentMonitoring 287 7.5.1 Functions of the PV System Controllers 287 7.5.2 Maximum Power Point Tracking Technology (MPPT) of Solar Cell Controllers 289 7.5.3 Installation Angle and Position Regulation of Solar Cell Arrays by the Controller 291 7.5.4 Other Functions of the Controller 293 7.6 Applications of PV Systems 294 7.6.1 Classifications of PV Systems 294 7.6.2 Application Type, Size and Load Types of the PV System 294 7.6.2.1 Small-Power DC PV Systems 294 7.6.2.2 DC Power Supply Systems Required of Controllers 295 7.6.2.3 AC/DC Power Supply Systems Required of Inverters 295 7.6.2.4 Small-/Medium-Sized Distributed PV Systems with the Grid-Connected Inverter 296 7.6.2.5 Large-Sized Centralised Grid-Connected PV Stations 296 7.6.2.6 Hybrid Power System 297 7.6.3 Energy Storage Device Charging/Discharging by Small-/Medium-Sized PV Systems 298 7.7 BIPV and Distributed PV Stations 299 7.7.1 BIPV 299 7.7.2 Design Principles of BIPV Grid-Connected Power Systems 301 7.7.3 National Policies and Certification of BIPV in China 301 7.7.4 Encouragement of Distributed PV Stations by the Chinese Government 301 7.8 Grid-Connected PV Systems and Intelligent Grids 302 7.8.1 Grid-Connected PV Systems 302 7.8.2 Technical Specifications of the Grid on the Grid-Connected PV System 303 7.8.3 Significance of the Intelligent Grid on PV Power and Other New Energy Utilisation 305 7.8.4 Development of China’s PV Industry in the Past 10 Years and Its Outlook 307 7.9 Codes and Test Verifications of the PV System 309 7.9.1 Necessity and Main Contents of PV Product Certification 309 7.9.2 TUV Certification Oriented to the European Market 311 7.9.3 UL Certification Oriented to the U.S. and Canadian Market 311 7.9.4 Certification of PV Products in China 313 Bibliography 319 Index 321
£108.86
John Wiley & Sons Inc Fuel Cell Fundamentals
Book SynopsisA complete, up-to-date, introductory guide to fuel cell technology and application Fuel Cell Fundamentalsprovides a thorough introduction to the principles and practicalities behind fuel cell technology. Beginning with the underlying concepts, the discussion explores fuel cell thermodynamics, kinetics, transport, and modeling before moving into the application side with guidance on system types and design, performance, costs, and environmental impact. This new third edition has been updated with the latest technological advances and relevant calculations, and enhanced chapters on advanced fuel cell design and electrochemical and hydrogen energy systems. Worked problems, illustrations, and application examples throughout lend a real-world perspective, and end-of chapter review questions and mathematical problems reinforce the material learned. Fuel cells produce more electricity than batteries or combustion engines, with far fewer emissions. This book is the esseTable of ContentsPREFACE xi ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xiii NOMENCLATURE xvii I FUEL CELL PRINCIPLES 1 Introduction 3 1.1 What Is a Fuel Cell? / 3 1.2 A Simple Fuel Cell / 6 1.3 Fuel Cell Advantages / 8 1.4 Fuel Cell Disadvantages / 11 1.5 Fuel Cell Types / 12 1.6 Basic Fuel Cell Operation / 14 1.7 Fuel Cell Performance / 18 1.8 Characterization and Modeling / 20 1.9 Fuel Cell Technology / 21 1.10 Fuel Cells and the Environment / 21 1.11 Chapter Summary / 22 Chapter Exercises / 23 2 Fuel Cell Thermodynamics 25 2.1 Thermodynamics Review / 25 2.2 Heat Potential of a Fuel: Enthalpy of Reaction / 34 2.3 Work Potential of a Fuel: Gibbs Free Energy / 37 2.4 Predicting Reversible Voltage of a Fuel Cell under Non-Standard-State Conditions / 47 2.5 Fuel Cell Efficiency / 60 2.6 Thermal and Mass Balances in Fuel Cells / 65 2.7 Thermodynamics of Reversible Fuel Cells / 67 2.8 Chapter Summary / 71 Chapter Exercises / 72 3 Fuel Cell Reaction Kinetics 77 3.1 Introduction to Electrode Kinetics / 77 3.2 Why Charge Transfer Reactions Have an Activation Energy / 82 3.3 Activation Energy Determines Reaction Rate / 84 3.4 Calculating Net Rate of a Reaction / 85 3.5 Rate of Reaction at Equilibrium: Exchange Current Density / 86 3.6 Potential of a Reaction at Equilibrium: Galvani Potential / 87 3.7 Potential and Rate: Butler–Volmer Equation / 89 3.8 Exchange Currents and Electrocatalysis: How to Improve Kinetic Performance / 94 3.9 Simplified Activation Kinetics: Tafel Equation / 97 3.10 Different Fuel Cell Reactions Produce Different Kinetics / 100 3.11 Catalyst–Electrode Design / 103 3.12 Quantum Mechanics: Framework for Understanding Catalysis in Fuel Cells / 104 3.13 The Sabatier Principle for Catalyst Selection / 107 3.14 Connecting the Butler–Volmer and Nernst Equations (Optional) / 108 3.15 Chapter Summary / 112 Chapter Exercises / 113 4 Fuel Cell Charge Transport 117 4.1 Charges Move in Response to Forces / 117 4.2 Charge Transport Results in a Voltage Loss / 121 4.3 Characteristics of Fuel Cell Charge Transport Resistance / 124 4.4 Physical Meaning of Conductivity / 128 4.5 Review of Fuel Cell Electrolyte Classes / 132 4.6 More on Diffusivity and Conductivity (Optional) / 153 4.7 Why Electrical Driving Forces Dominate Charge Transport (Optional) / 160 4.8 Quantum Mechanics–Based Simulation of Ion Conduction in Oxide Electrolytes (Optional) / 161 4.9 Chapter Summary / 163 Chapter Exercises / 164 5 Fuel Cell Mass Transport 167 5.1 Transport in Electrode versus Flow Structure / 168 5.2 Transport in Electrode: Diffusive Transport / 170 5.3 Transport in Flow Structures: Convective Transport / 183 5.4 Chapter Summary / 199 Chapter Exercises / 200 6 Fuel Cell Modeling 203 6.1 Putting It All Together: A Basic Fuel Cell Model / 203 6.2 A 1D Fuel Cell Model / 206 6.3 Fuel Cell Models Based on Computational Fluid Dynamics (Optional) / 227 6.4 Chapter Summary / 230 Chapter Exercises / 231 7 Fuel Cell Characterization 237 7.1 What Do We Want to Characterize? / 238 7.2 Overview of Characterization Techniques / 239 7.3 In Situ Electrochemical Characterization Techniques / 240 7.4 Ex Situ Characterization Techniques / 265 7.5 Chapter Summary / 268 Chapter Exercises / 269 II FUEL CELL TECHNOLOGY 8 Overview of Fuel Cell Types 273 8.1 Introduction / 273 8.2 Phosphoric Acid Fuel Cell / 274 8.3 Polymer Electrolyte Membrane Fuel Cell / 275 8.4 Alkaline Fuel Cell / 278 8.5 Molten Carbonate Fuel Cell / 280 8.6 Solid-Oxide Fuel Cell / 282 8.7 Other Fuel Cells / 284 8.8 Summary Comparison / 298 8.9 Chapter Summary / 299 Chapter Exercises / 301 9 PEMFC and SOFC Materials 303 9.1 PEMFC Electrolyte Materials / 304 9.2 PEMFC Electrode/Catalyst Materials / 308 9.3 SOFC Electrolyte Materials / 317 9.4 SOFC Electrode/Catalyst Materials / 326 9.5 Material Stability, Durability, and Lifetime / 336 9.6 Chapter Summary / 340 Chapter Exercises / 342 10 Overview of Fuel Cell Systems 347 10.1 Fuel Cell Subsystem / 348 10.2 Thermal Management Subsystem / 353 10.3 Fuel Delivery/Processing Subsystem / 357 10.4 Power Electronics Subsystem / 364 10.5 Case Study of Fuel Cell System Design: Stationary Combined Heat and Power Systems / 369 10.6 Case Study of Fuel Cell System Design: Sizing a Portable Fuel Cell / 383 10.7 Chapter Summary / 387 Chapter Exercises / 389 11 Fuel Processing Subsystem Design 393 11.1 Fuel Reforming Overview / 394 11.2 Water Gas Shift Reactors / 409 11.3 Carbon Monoxide Clean-Up / 411 11.4 Reformer and Processor Efficiency Losses / 414 11.5 Reactor Design for Fuel Reformers and Processors / 416 11.6 Chapter Summary / 417 Chapter Exercises / 419 12 Thermal Management Subsystem Design 423 12.1 Overview of Pinch Point Analysis Steps / 424 12.2 Chapter Summary / 440 Chapter Exercises / 441 13 Fuel Cell System Design 447 13.1 Fuel Cell Design Via Computational Fluid Dynamics / 447 13.2 Fuel Cell System Design: A Case Study / 462 13.3 Chapter Summary / 476 Chapter Exercises / 477 14 Environmental Impact of Fuel Cells 481 14.1 Life Cycle Assessment / 481 14.2 Important Emissions for LCA / 490 14.3 Emissions Related to Global Warming / 490 14.4 Emissions Related to Air Pollution / 502 14.5 Analyzing Entire Scenarios with LCA / 507 14.6 Chapter Summary / 510 Chapter Exercises / 511 A Constants and Conversions 517 B Thermodynamic Data 519 C Standard Electrode Potentials at 25∘C 529 D Quantum Mechanics 531 D.1 Atomic Orbitals / 533 D.2 Postulates of Quantum Mechanics / 534 D.3 One-Dimensional Electron Gas / 536 D.4 Analogy to Column Buckling / 537 D.5 Hydrogen Atom / 538 D.6 Multielectron Systems / 540 D.7 Density Functional Theory / 540 E Periodic Table of the Elements 543 F Suggested Further Reading 545 G Important Equations 547 H Answers to Selected Chapter Exercises 551 BIBLIOGRAPHY 555 INDEX 565
£122.50
John Wiley & Sons Inc Battery Management System and its Applications
Book SynopsisBATTERY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND ITS APPLICATIONS Enables readers to understand basic concepts, design, and implementation of battery management systems Battery Management System and its Applications is an all-in-one guide to basic concepts, design, and applications of battery management systems (BMS), featuring industrially relevant case studies with detailed analysis, and providing clear, concise descriptions of performance testing, battery modeling, functions, and topologies of BMS. In Battery Management System and its Applications, readers can expect to find information on: Core and basic concepts of BMS, to help readers establish a foundation of relevant knowledge before more advanced concepts are introducedPerformance testing and battery modeling, to help readers fully understand Lithium-ion batteriesBasic functions and topologies of BMS, with the aim of guiding readers to design simple BMS themselvesSome advanced functions of BMS, drawing from the research achievements of the auTable of ContentsPreface xiii About the Authors xv Part I Introduction 1 1 Why Does a Battery Need a BMS? 3 1.1 General Introduction to a BMS 3 1.2 Example of a BMS in a Real System 5 1.3 System Failures Due to the Absence of a BMS 7 2 General Requirements (Functions and Features) 11 2.1 Basic Functions of a BMS 11 2.2 Topological Structure of a BMS 16 3 General Procedure of the BMS Design 19 3.1 Universal Battery Management System and Customized Battery Management System 19 3.2 General Development Flow of the Power Battery Management System 21 Part II Li-Ion Batteries 27 4 Introduction to Li-Ion Batteries 29 4.1 Components of Li-Ion Batteries: Electrodes, Electrolytes, Separators, and Cell Packing 29 4.2 Li-Ion Electrode Manufacturing 31 4.3 Cell Assembly in an Li-Ion Battery 32 4.4 Safety and Cost Prediction 33 5 Schemes of Battery Testing 37 5.1 Battery Tests for BMS Development 37 5.2 Capacity and the Charge and Discharge Rate Test 41 5.3 Discharge Rate Characteristic Test 44 5.4 Charge and Discharge Equilibrium Potential Curves and Equivalent Internal Resistance Tests 46 5.5 Battery Cycle Test 49 5.6 Phased Evaluation of the Cycle Process 58 6 Test Results and Analysis 67 6.1 Characteristic Test Results and Their Analysis 67 6.2 Degradation Test and Analysis 80 7 Battery Modeling 101 7.1 Battery Modeling for BMS 101 7.2 Common Battery Models and Their Deficiencies 102 7.3 External Characteristics of the Li-Ion Power Battery and Their Analysis 105 7.4 A Power Battery Model Based on a Three-Order RC Network 110 7.5 Model Parameterization and Its Online Identification 117 7.6 Battery Cell Simulation Model 124 Part III Functions of BMS 133 8 Battery Monitoring 135 8.1 Discussion on Real Time and Synchronization 135 8.2 Battery Voltage Monitoring 139 8.3 Battery Current Monitoring 145 8.4 Temperature Monitoring 149 9 SoC Estimation of a Battery 153 9.1 Different Understandings of the SoC Definition 153 9.2 Classical Estimation Methods 158 9.3 Difficulty in an SoC Estimation 162 9.4 Actual Problems to Be Considered During an SoC Estimation 166 9.5 Estimation Method Based on the Battery Model and the Extended Kalman Filter 169 9.6 Error Spectrum of the SoC Estimation Based on the EKF 177 10 Charge Control 193 10.1 Introduction 193 10.2 Charging Power Categories 196 10.3 Charge Control Methods 198 10.4 Effect of Charge Control on Battery Performance 203 10.5 Charging Circuits 204 10.6 Infrastructure Development and Challenges 209 10.7 Isolation and Safety Requirement for EC Chargers 211 11 Balancing/Balancing Control 213 11.1 Balancing Control Management and Its Significance 213 11.2 Classification of Balancing Control Management 218 11.3 Review and Analysis of Active Balancing Technologies 221 11.4 Balancing Strategy Study 226 11.5 Two Active Balancing Control Strategies 234 11.6 Evaluation and Comparison of Balancing Control Strategies 245 12 State of Health (SoH) Estimation of a Battery 257 12.1 Definition and Indices/Parameters of SoH 257 12.2 Modeling of Battery Degradation (Aging) and SoH Estimation 265 12.3 Battery Degradation Diagnosis for EVs 278 13 Communication Interface for BMS 291 13.1 BMS Communication Bus and Protocols 293 13.2 Higher-Layer Communication Protocols 298 13.3 A Case Study: Universal CiA EnergyBus for a Low-Emission Vehicle (LEV) 299 14 Battery Lifecycle Information Management 301 14.1 Data Type of Power Battery 301 14.2 Vehicle Instrument Data Display 302 14.3 Battery Data Transmission Mode 306 14.4 Information Concerning a Full-Power Battery Lifecycle 311 14.5 Storage and Analysis of Historical Information of a Battery 316 14.6 Battery Detection System Based on a Mobile Terminal 320 Part IV Case Studies 327 15 BMS for an E-Bike 329 15.1 Balancing 329 15.2 Battery Pack Design for an E-Bike 331 15.3 Methodology 333 15.4 Active Balancing Solutions 337 15.5 Test Results 341 15.6 Possibility with Active Balancing 349 15.7 Results and Evaluation 349 16 BMS for a Fork-Lift 353 16.1 Lithium-Iron-Phosphate Batteries for Fork-Lifts 353 16.2 Battery Management Systems for Fork-Lifts 355 16.3 The LIONIC Battery System for Truck Applications 356 16.4 Application 357 16.5 The Usable Energy Li-Ion Traction Batteries 359 17 BMS for a Minibus 363 17.1 Internal Resistance Analysis of a Power Battery System and Discharging Strategy Research of Vehicles 361 17.2 Consistency Evaluation Research of a Power Battery System 377 17.3 Safety Management and Protection of a Power Battery System 386 Index 389
£90.00
John Wiley & Sons Inc Electric Power System Basics for the
Book SynopsisThe second edition of Steven W. Blume's bestseller provides a comprehensive treatment of power technology for the non-electrical engineer working in the electric power industry This book aims to give non-electrical professionals a fundamental understanding of large interconnected electrical power systems, better known as the Power Grid, with regard to terminology, electrical concepts, design considerations, construction practices, industry standards, control room operations for both normal and emergency conditions, maintenance, consumption, telecommunications and safety. The text begins with an overview of the terminology and basic electrical concepts commonly used in the industry then it examines the generation, transmission and distribution of power. Other topics discussed include energy management, conservation of electrical energy, consumption characteristics and regulatory aspects to help readers understand modern electric power systems. This second edition Table of ContentsPreface ix Acknowledgments xv Chapter 1 System Overview, Terminology, and Basic Concepts 1 Chapter Objectives 1 History of Electric Power 1 System Overview 2 Terminology 3 AC Voltage Generation 9 AC Connections 14 Three Types of Electrical Load 15 Chapter 2 Generation 19 Chapter Objectives 19 Real-Time Generation 19 Power Plants and Prime Movers 20 Chapter 3 Transmission Lines 43 Chapter Objectives 43 Transmission Lines 43 Conductors 45 Transmission Line Design Parameters (Optional Supplementary Reading) 50 Underground Transmission (Optional Supplementary Reading) 51 DC Transmission Systems (Optional Supplementary Reading) 52 Chapter 4 Substations 53 Chapter Objectives 53 Substation Equipment 53 Transformers 54 Regulators 63 Circuit Breakers 69 Reclosers 74 Disconnect Switches 75 Lightning Arresters 79 Electrical Bus 81 Capacitor Banks 83 Reactors 84 Static Var Compensators 86 Control Building 87 Preventive Maintenance 88 Chapter 5 Distribution 91 Chapter Objectives 91 Distribution Systems 91 Transformer Connections (Optional Supplementary Reading) 102 Fuses and Cutouts 110 Riser or Dip Pole 112 Underground Service 112 Chapter 6 Consumption 119 Chapter Objectives 119 Electrical Energy Consumption 119 Power System Efficiency 121 Power Factor 122 Supply and Demand 123 Demand Side Management 124 Metering 125 Performance-Based Rates 131 Service Entrance Equipment 132 Chapter 7 System Protection 147 Chapter Objectives 147 Two Types of Protection 147 System Protection Equipment and Concepts 148 Distribution Protection 152 Transmission Protection 155 Substation Protection 157 Generator Protection 158 Generator Synchronization 160 Overall Transmission Protection 162 Substation Automation 162 Chapter 8 Interconnected Power Systems 165 Chapter Objectives 165 Interconnected Power Systems 165 The North American Power Grids 166 Regulatory Environment 167 Interchange Scheduling 170 Interconnected System Operations 171 System Demand and Generator Loading 177 Reliable Grid Operations 180 Chapter 9 System Control Centers and Telecommunications 187 Chapter Objectives 187 Electric System Control Centers 187 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 189 Energy Management Systems 191 Wide Area Monitoring Systems (WAMS) 194 Smart Grid 196 Utility Communications Systems 207 Chapter 10 Personal Protection (Safety) 209 Chapter Objectives 209 Electrical Safety 209 Personal Protection 210 ARC-Flash 218 Electrical Safety Around the Home 222 Appendix A The Derivation of Root Mean Squared 225 Appendix B Graphical Power Factor Analysis 227 Recommended Reading 229 Index231
£72.15
John Wiley and Sons Ltd GridIntegrated and Standalone Photovoltaic
Book SynopsisA practical and systematic elaboration on the analysis, design and control of grid integrated and standalone distributed photovoltaic (PV) generation systems, with Matlab and Simulink models Analyses control of distribution networks with high penetration of PV systems and standalone microgrids with PV systemsCovers in detail PV accommodation techniques including energy storage, demand side management and PV output power regulationFeatures examples of real projects/systems given in OPENDSS codes and/or Matlab and Simulink modelsProvides a concise summary of up-to-date research around the word in distributed PV systemsTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Overview 1 1.1 Current Status and Future Development Trends of Photovoltaic Generation around theWorld 1 1.1.1 USA 3 1.1.2 Japan 5 1.1.3 Germany 5 1.1.4 China 6 1.2 Current Research Status of Grid-Connected Photovoltaic Generation 8 1.2.1 Characteristics of Grid-Connected Photovoltaic Generation 8 1.2.2 Impact of High-Penetration Photovoltaic Generations on Distribution Networks 9 1.2.3 Research Needs on Massive Distributed Grid-Connected Photovoltaic Generation 11 1.3 Summary 13 References 14 2 Techniques of Distributed Photovoltaic Generation 17 2.1 Introduction to Distributed Photovoltaic Generation 17 2.1.1 Distributed Generation: Definition and Advantages 17 2.1.2 Principle and Structure of Distributed Photovoltaic Generation 18 2.2 Photovoltaic Cells 20 2.2.1 Classification of the Photovoltaic Cells 20 2.2.1.1 Classification Based on Cell Structure 20 2.2.1.2 Material-based PV Cell Classification 21 2.2.2 Development History of Solar Cells 21 2.2.3 Model of a Silicon Solar Cell 22 2.3 Inverter 26 2.3.1 Topology of Connection between Inverter and Photovoltaic Module 26 2.3.2 The Classification and Characteristics of the Inverter 28 2.3.3 Requirements of a Grid-Connected Photovoltaic Inverter 29 2.4 Maximum Power Point Tracking Control 32 2.4.1 Hill Climbing/Perturb and Observe 33 2.4.2 Incremental Conductance 34 2.4.3 Open-Circuit Voltage Method 36 2.4.4 Short-Circuit Current Method 36 2.4.5 Ripple Correlation Control 36 2.4.6 Load Current or Load Voltage MaximizationMethod 37 2.4.7 dP/dV or dP/dI Close-Loop Control 38 2.4.8 Maximum Power Point Tracking Efficiency 38 2.5 Summary 39 References 40 3 Load Characteristics in Distribution Networks with Distributed Photovoltaic Generation 43 3.1 Introduction 43 3.2 Load Characteristics of a Distribution Network 43 3.2.1 Load Types and Indices 43 3.2.2 Time-Sequence Characteristics of Typical Loads 45 3.2.3 Case Study 46 3.3 The Output Characteristics of Photovoltaic Generation 48 3.3.1 Regulations on Grid-Connected Photovoltaic Generation 48 3.3.2 Time-Sequence Characteristics of Photovoltaic Generation 49 3.3.3 Case Study 51 3.4 Characteristics of the Net Load in a Distribution Network with Distributed Photovoltaic Generation 53 3.4.1 Influence of Distributed Photovoltaic Generation on System Load Level 54 3.4.2 Influences of Distributed Photovoltaic Generation on Load Fluctuation 56 3.5 Power and Energy Analysis of Distributed Photovoltaic Generation 57 3.5.1 Effective Power and Equivalent Electricity Generation of Distributed Photovoltaic Generation 57 3.5.2 CalculationMethods of the Correction Coefficients 58 3.6 Summary 61 References 62 4 Penetration Analysis of Large-Scale Distributed Grid-Connected Photovoltaics 65 4.1 Introduction 65 4.2 Economic Analysis of Distributed Photovoltaic Systems 66 4.2.1 Cost/Benefit Analysis of Distributed Grid-Connected Photovoltaic Systems 66 4.2.1.1 Cost Composition 66 4.2.1.2 Income Composition 67 4.2.2 Grid Parity 68 4.3 Large-Scale Photovoltaic Penetration Analysis 70 4.3.1 Further Explanation of Some Concepts 70 4.3.2 Concepts and Assumptions 71 4.3.2.1 Basic Concepts 71 4.3.2.2 Basic Assumptions 73 4.3.3 Power Penetration Analysis 73 4.3.4 Photovoltaics Penetration with Different Types of Load 79 4.4 Maximum Allowable Capacity of Distributed Photovoltaics in Distribution Network 82 4.4.1 Static Characteristic Constraint Method 82 4.4.1.1 Voltage Constraint 83 4.4.1.2 Protection 83 4.4.1.3 Harmonic Limit 85 4.4.2 Constrained OptimizationMethod 86 4.4.3 Digital SimulationMethod 87 4.4.3.1 Maximum Allowable Photovoltaic Capacity in Static Simulation 87 4.4.3.2 Maximum Allowable Photovoltaic Capacity in Dynamic Simulations 87 4.5 Maximum Allowable Capacity of Distributed Photovoltaics Based on Random Scenario Method 88 4.5.1 Algorithm Introduction 88 4.5.2 Case Study 89 4.6 Photovoltaic Penetration Improvement 93 4.6.1 Full Utilization of the Reactive Power Regulation Capability of a Distributed Photovoltaic System 93 4.6.2 Distribution Network Upgrade 93 4.6.3 Demand-Side Response 93 4.6.4 Energy Storage Technologies 94 4.7 Summary 94 References 94 5 Power Flow Analysis for Distribution Networks with High Penetration of Photovoltaics 97 5.1 Introduction 97 5.2 Power Flow Calculation for Distribution Networks with Distributed Photovoltaics 97 5.2.1 Comparison between Power Flow Calculation Methods for Distribution Networks 97 5.2.2 Power Flow CalculationModel for a Distributed Photovoltaics 99 5.2.3 Power Flow CalculationMethod for Distribution Network with Distributed Photovoltaics 100 5.3 Voltage Impact Analysis of Distributed Photovoltaics on Distribution Networks 101 5.3.1 MathematicalModel 101 5.3.2 Simulation Studies 103 5.4 Loss Analysis in Distribution Network with Distributed Photovoltaics 108 5.4.1 MathematicalModel 108 5.4.2 Simulation Results 110 5.5 Real Case Studies 112 5.5.1 Patterns for Distributed Photovoltaics Interconnection 112 5.5.2 Analysis on a Feeder 114 5.5.3 Analysis on SA Substation 118 5.6 Summary 123 References 123 6 Voltage Control for Distribution Network with High Penetration of Photovoltaics 125 6.1 Introduction 125 6.2 Voltage Impact Analysis in the Distribution Network with Distributed Photovoltaics 126 6.3 Voltage Control Measures 130 6.3.1 Automatic Voltage Control System 130 6.3.2 Feeder-Level Voltage Regulation 130 6.3.3 Photovoltaic Inverter 131 6.4 Photovoltaic Inverter Control Strategies 132 6.4.1 General Control Principle 132 6.4.2 Constant Power Factor Control Strategy 132 6.4.3 Variable Power Factor Control Strategy 133 6.4.4 Voltage Adaptive Control Strategy 134 6.4.4.1 Q/V Droop Control 134 6.4.4.2 P/V Droop control 136 6.4.4.3 Inverter Parameter Optimization 136 6.5 Modeling and Simulation 137 6.5.1 Approaches 137 6.5.2 Introduction to OpenDSS 138 6.5.3 SimulationModels 138 6.5.3.1 Automatic Voltage Control System 139 6.5.3.2 Photovoltaic SystemModel 142 6.6 Simulation Analysis 144 6.6.1 Basic Data Preparation for Simulation 144 6.6.2 Analysis of Power Flow and Voltage in Extreme Scenarios with Automatic Voltage Control 147 6.6.2.1 Working Day (July 16, 2014) Scenario 147 6.6.2.2 Holiday (May 1, 2014) Scenario 149 6.6.3 Participation of Photovoltaic Inverter in Voltage Regulation 151 6.6.3.1 Working Day (July 16, 2014) Scenario 151 6.6.3.2 Holiday (May 1, 2014) Scenario 156 6.7 Summary 163 References 163 7 Short-Circuit Current Analysis of Grid-Connected Distributed Photovoltaic Generation 165 7.1 Introduction 165 7.2 Short-Circuit Characteristic Analysis of Distributed Photovoltaic Generation 165 7.2.1 Short-Circuit Characteristic Analysis of Symmetric Voltage Sag of Power Grid 166 7.2.2 Short-Circuit Characteristic Analysis of Asymmetrical Voltage Sag of Power Grid 167 7.3 Low-Voltage Ride-Through Techniques of Photovoltaic Generation 169 7.3.1 Review of Low-Voltage Ride-Through Standards 170 7.3.2 Low-Voltage Ride-Through Control Strategy for Photovoltaic Generation 171 7.4 Simulation Studies 174 7.4.1 Fault Simulations of Photovoltaic Generation without the Low-Voltage Ride-Through Function 174 7.4.2 Fault Simulation of Photovoltaic Generation with the Low-Voltage Ride-Through Function 176 7.4.2.1 Case 1: 80% Voltage Drop ofThree Phases 176 7.4.2.2 Case 2: 80% Voltage Drop of Two Phases 176 7.4.2.3 Case 3: 80% Voltage Drop of a Single Phase 177 7.5 Calculation Method for Short-Circuit Currents in Distribution Network with Distributed Photovoltaic Generation 179 7.5.1 Distribution NetworkModel 180 7.5.2 Calculation Method for Short-Circuit Currents in a Traditional Distribution Network 180 7.5.2.1 Operational Curve Law 181 7.5.2.2 IEC Standard 181 7.5.2.3 ANSI Standard 181 7.5.3 Calculation Method for Short-Circuit Currents in a Distribution Network with Distributed Photovoltaic Generation 182 7.5.3.1 Calculation Method for Symmetric Fault Short-Circuit Currents 183 7.5.3.2 Calculation Method for Asymmetric Fault Short-Circuit Currents 184 7.5.4 Fault Simulation Studies of Distribution Network with Distributed Photovoltaic Generation 186 7.6 Summary 191 References 192 8 Power Quality in Distribution Networks with Distributed Photovoltaic Generation 195 8.1 Introduction 195 8.2 Power Quality Standards and Applications 195 8.2.1 Power Quality Standards for Grid-Connected Photovoltaic Generation 196 8.2.2 Power Quality Requirements Stipulated in Standards for Grid-Connected Photovoltaic Generation 196 8.2.2.1 Voltage Deviation 197 8.2.2.2 Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker 198 8.2.2.3 Voltage Unbalance Factor 199 8.2.2.4 DC Injection 199 8.2.2.5 Current Harmonics 199 8.2.2.6 Voltage Harmonics 204 8.3 Evaluation and Analysis of Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker for Grid-Connected Photovoltaic Generation 206 8.3.1 Evaluation Process 207 8.3.1.1 First-Level Provisions 207 8.3.1.2 Second-Level Provisions 207 8.3.1.3 Third-Level Provisions 208 8.3.2 Calculation 208 8.3.2.1 The First-Level Evaluation for Photovoltaic Integration 208 8.3.2.2 The Second-Level Evaluation 208 8.4 Harmonic Analysis for Grid-Connected Photovoltaic Generation 211 8.4.1 Fundamentals of Harmonic Analysis 211 8.4.1.1 Harmonic Simulation Platform 211 8.4.1.2 Photovoltaic Harmonic Model 213 8.4.2 Harmonic Analysis of Photovoltaic Generation Connected to a Typical Feeder 218 8.4.2.1 Harmonics Analysis of Centralized Photovoltaic Connection 219 8.4.2.2 Harmonics Analysis of Photovoltaic Connection in a DistributedWay 223 8.4.3 Analysis of Practical Cases 224 8.5 Summary 225 References 225 9 Techniques for Mitigating Impacts of High-Penetration Photovoltaics 227 9.1 Introduction 227 9.2 Energy Storage Technology 227 9.2.1 Classification of Energy Storage Technologies 228 9.2.1.1 Mechanical Energy Storage 228 9.2.1.2 Electromagnetic Energy Storage 229 9.2.1.3 Phase-Change Energy Storage 229 9.2.1.4 Chemical Energy Storage 229 9.2.2 Electrochemical Energy Storage 229 9.2.2.1 Lead–Acid Battery 230 9.2.2.2 Lithium-Ion Battery 231 9.2.2.3 Flow Cell 232 9.2.3 Electrochemical Energy Storage Model 233 9.2.3.1 MathematicalModel 233 9.2.3.2 Life Model 235 9.3 Application of Energy Storage Technology in High-Penetration Distributed Photovoltaics 236 9.3.1 Siting and Sizing Methods for Energy Storage System 236 9.3.1.1 Siting of Energy Storage System 236 9.3.1.2 Sizing of the Energy Storage System 237 9.3.2 Case Simulation 238 9.4 Demand Response 242 9.4.1 Introduction 242 9.4.1.1 Price-Based Demand Response 242 9.4.1.2 Incentive-Based Demand Response 243 9.4.2 Load Characteristics of Demand Response 245 9.5 Application of Demand Response in Distribution Networks with High Penetration of Distributed Photovoltaics 247 9.5.1 Incentive-Based Demand Response OptimizationModel 247 9.5.1.1 Incentive-Based Demand Response Model 247 9.5.1.2 Constraints 249 9.5.2 Incentive-Based Demand Response Algorithm 249 9.5.3 Case Simulation 251 9.6 Cluster Partition Control 252 9.7 Application of Cluster Partition Control in Distributed Grid with High-Penetration Distributed Photovoltaics 256 9.7.1 Community-Detection-Based Optimal Network Partition 256 9.7.2 Sub-community Reactive/Active Power-Voltage Control Scheme 259 9.7.3 Case Study 261 9.8 Summary 270 References 271 10 Design and Implementation of Stand-aloneMultisource Microgrids with High-Penetration Photovoltaic Generation 273 10.1 Introduction 273 10.2 System Configurations of Microgrids with Multiple Renewable Sources 274 10.2.1 Integration Schemes 274 10.2.2 Unit Sizing and Technology Selection 277 10.3 Controls and Energy Management 278 10.3.1 Centralized Control Paradigm 278 10.3.2 Distributed Control Paradigm 279 10.3.3 Hybrid Hierarchical Control Paradigm 280 10.4 Implementation of Stand-alone Microgrids 281 10.4.1 Dongfushan Microgrid: Joint Optimization of Operation and Component Sizing 282 10.4.1.1 System Configuration 282 10.4.1.2 Operating Strategy 283 10.4.1.3 OptimizationModel 287 10.4.1.4 System Sizing Optimization 291 10.4.1.5 Optimal Configuration and Operation Practice 297 10.4.2 Plateau Microgrid: A Multiagent-System-Based Energy Management System 299 10.4.2.1 System Configuration 299 10.4.2.2 Multiagent-System-Based Energy ManagementMethod 301 10.4.2.3 Validation of the Microgrid Energy Management System 307 10.5 Summary 309 References 310 Index 315
£999.99
John Wiley & Sons Inc Ceramics for Energy Conversion Storage and
Book SynopsisA collection of 25 papers presented at the 11th International Symposium on Ceramic Materials and Components for Energy and Environmental Applications (CMCEE-11), June 14-19, 2015 in Vancouver, BC, Canada. Paper in this volume were presented in the below six symposia from Track 1 on the topic of Ceramics for Energy Conversion, Storage, and Distribution Systems: High-Temperature Fuel Cells and Electrolysis Ceramic-Related Materials, Devices, and Processing for Heat-to-Electricity Direct Conversion Material Science and Technologies for Advanced Nuclear Fission and Fusion Energy Advanced Batteries and Supercapacitors for Energy Storage Applications Materials for Solar Thermal Energy Conversion and Storage High Temperature Superconductors: Materials, Technologies, and Systems Table of ContentsPreface ix HIGH-TEMPERATURE FUEL CELLS AND ELECTROLYSIS Effect of Additives on Self-Healing of Plasma Sprayed Ceramic Coatings 3N. Sata, A. Ansar, and K. A. Friedrich Development of Ceramic Functional Layers for Solid Oxide Cells 19Günter Schiller, Rémi Costa, and K. Andreas Friedrich BICU(TI)VOX as a Low/Intermediate Temperature SOFC Electrolyte: Another Look 29Paul Fuierer, Kevin Ring, Joerg Exner, and Ralf Moos Symbolic Analysis of Multi-Stage Electrochemical Oxidation for Enhancement of Electric Efficiency of SOFCs 41Y. Matsuzaki, Y. Tachikawa, T. Hatae, H. Matsumoto, S. Taniguchi, and K. Sasaki Low Temperature AC Electric Field-Assisted Sintering of Unitary Anode-Supported Solid Oxide Fuel Cell 47R. Muccillo, E. N. S. Muccillo, F. C. Fonseca, and D. Z. de Florio SOFC System Development and Field Trials for Commercial Applications 61T. Pfeifer, S. Reuber, M. Hartmann, M. Barthel, and J. Baade Technology Readiness of SOFC Stacks—A Review 77C. Wunderlich High-Temperature Direct Fuel Cell Material Experience 89Chao-Yi Yuh, A. Hilmi, and R. Venkataraman Development of Highly-Efficient Energy Storage System using Solid Oxide Electrolysis Cell 101Masato Yoshino, Tsuneji Kameda, Hisao Watanabe, and Masahiko Yamada CERAMIC-RELATED MATERIALS, DEVICES, AND PROCESSING FOR HEAT-TO-ELECTRICITY DIRECT CONVERSION Thermoelectric Properties Higher Manganese Silicide Containing Small Amount of MnSi/Si Nano-Particles 115Swapnil Ghodke, A. Yamamoto, H. Ikuta, and T. Takeuchi Anomalous Temperature Gradient in Non-Maxwellian Gases 123George S. Levy Thermophysical Property of Poly-Si Phononic Crystals for Thermoelectrics 135Masahiro Nomura and Oliver Paul The Potential of Maximal ZT-Value for Thermoelectric Materials of Mn11Si19 HMS Phase by Calculating Electronic Structure 147Akio Yamamoto, Koichi Kitahara, Hidetoshi Miyazaki, Manabu Inukai, and Tsunehiro Takeuchi MATERIAL SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGIES FOR ADVANCED NUCLEAR FISSION AND FUSION ENERGY Development of Ga Doped Hollandites BaxCsy(Ga2x+yTi8-2x-y)O16 for Cs Immobilization 159Y. Xu, R. Grote, Y. Wen, L. Shuller-Nickles, and K.S. Brinkman Atomistic Simulations of Ceramic Materials Relevant for Nuclear Waste Management: Cases of Monazite and Pyrochlore 165Y. Li, P. M. Kowalski, G. Beridze, A.Blanca-Romero, Y. Ji, V. L. Vinograd, J. Gale, and D. Bosbach Development of Joining Method for Zircaloy and SiC/SiC Composite Tubes by using Fiber Laser 177Hisashi Serizawa, Yuuki Asakura, Joon-Soo Park, Hirotatsu Kishimoto, and Akira Kohyama ADVANCED BATTERIES AND SUPERCAPACITORS FOR ENERGY STORAGE APPLICATIONS An Investigation on the Cycle Performance of LiFePO4 Pouch Cells by a Combination of Synchrotron Based X-Ray Diffraction and Absorption Spectroscopy 187G. T. K. Fey, Y. C. Lin, K. P. Huang, P. J. Wu, J. K. Chang, and H. M. Kao The Influence of the Synthesis Route on Electrochemical Properties of Spinel Type High-Voltage Cathode Material LiNi0.5Mn15O4 for Lithium Ion Batteries 197M. Seidel, K. Nikolowski, M. Wolter, I. Kinski, and A. Michaelis MATERIALS FOR SOLAR THERMAL ENERGY CONVERSION AND STORAGE High Temperature Solar Receiver with Ceramic Materials 207Birgit Gobereit, Daniela Hofmann, Peter Schwarzbözl, and Ralf Uhlig Determination of Parameters for Improved Efficiency in Thermal Energy Storage using Encapsulated Phase Change Materials 219Laura Solomon, Alparslan Oztekin, Sudhakar Neti, and Himanshu Jain Tuning the Spectral Selectivity of SiC-Based Volumetric Solar Receivers with Ultra-High Temperature Ceramic Coatings 227Benoit Rousseau, Simon Guevelou, Jérôme Vicente, Cyril Caliot, and Gilles Flamant Thermo-Mechanical Analysis of a Silicon Carbide Honeycomb Component Applied as an Absorber for Concentrated Solar Radiation 239Thomas Fend, Peter Schwarzboezl, Olena Smirnova, Martin Schmuecker, Ferdinand Flucht, and Sven Dathe HIGH-TEMPERATURE SUPERCONDUCTORS: MATERIALS, TECHNOLOGIES, AND SYSTEMS Anomalous Proximity Effect and More than One Majorana Fermion 253S. Ikegaya and Y. Asano Atomic-Scale Study of the Superconducting Proximity Effect in Manganite/Cuprate Thin-Film Heterostructures 261Hao Zhang, Igor Fridman, Nicolas Gauquelin, Gianluigi Botton, and John Y. T. Wei Tunneling and Photoemission Spectra in Cuprate Superconductors: Evidence for Strong Multiple-Phonon Coupling and Polaronic Effects 273Guo-meng Zhao Author Index 289
£136.76
John Wiley and Sons Ltd Power System Widearea Stability Analysis and
Book SynopsisAn essential guide to the stability and control of power systems integrating large-scale renewable energy sources The rapid development of smart grids and the integration of large scale renewable energy have added daunting new layers of complexity to the long-standing problem of power system stability control. This book offers a systematic stochastic analysis of these nonlinear problems and provides comprehensive countermeasures to improve power system performance and control with large-scale, hybrid power systems. Power system stability analysis and control is by no means a new topic. But the integration of large scale renewable energy sources has added many new challenges which must be addressed, especially in the areas of time variance, time delay, and uncertainties. Robust, adaptive control strategies and countermeasures are the key to avoiding inadequate, excessive, or lost loads within hybrid power systems. Written by an internationally recognized innovator in the field this bTable of ContentsAbout the Author ix Preface xi 1 Basic Theories of Power System Security Defense 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Power System Reliability and Stability 2 1.2.1 Reliability of Power System 2 1.2.2 Stability of Power System 4 1.3 Three Defense Lines in the Power System 7 1.3.1 Classification of Disturbance in the Power System 7 1.3.2 Power System Operation State 8 1.3.3 Three Defense Lines in Power System Stability Control 10 1.3.4 Functions of Defense System 12 1.4 Summary 15 References 15 2 Power System Analysis and Control Theory 17 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Mathematical Model of Power System 17 2.2.1 Mathematical Model of Synchronous Generator 17 2.2.2 Mathematical Model of Excitation System 22 2.2.3 Mathematical Model of Prime Mover and Speed Governor 24 2.2.4 Mathematical Model of Load 27 2.3 Power System Stability Analysis Method 29 2.3.1 Time‐Domain Simulation Method 29 2.3.2 Eigenvalue Analysis Method 31 2.3.3 Transient Energy Function Method 33 2.4 Automatic Control Theory 33 2.4.1 Classical Control Theory 34 2.4.2 Modern Control Theory 35 2.4.3 Large System Theory and Intelligent Control Theory 36 2.5 Summary 38 References 38 3 Wide‐Area Information Monitoring 41 3.1 Introduction 41 3.2 Test System 41 3.2.1 Four‐Generator Two‐Area System 41 3.2.2 Sixteen‐Generator System 42 3.2.3 Western Electricity Coordinating Council 43 3.3 Optimal Selection of Wide‐Area Signal 44 3.3.1 Wide‐Area Signal Selection Method Based on the Contribution Factor 44 3.3.2 Simulation Verification 48 3.4 Optimal Selection of Wide‐Area Controller 57 3.4.1 Mathematical Background 57 3.4.2 Example Test System 62 3.4.3 GPSS Based on Collocated Controller Design 63 3.4.4 Testing Results and Analysis 64 3.5 Summary 70 References 71 4 Stability Analysis of Stochastic System 73 4.1 Introduction 73 4.2 Stability Analysis of Stochastic Parameter System 74 4.2.1 Interval Model and Second‐Order Perturbation Theory‐Based Modal Analysis 74 4.2.2 Power System Small‐Signal Stability Region Calculation Method Based on the Guardian Map Theory 82 4.3 Stability Analysis of Stochastic Structure System 102 4.3.1 Model‐Trajectory‐Based Method for Analyzing the Fault System 102 4.3.2 Angle Stability Analysis of Power System Considering Cascading Failure 119 4.4 Stability Analysis of Stochastic Excitation System 137 4.4.1 Model of Multiple Operating Conditions System Considering the Stochastic Characteristic of Wind Speed 137 4.4.2 Simulation Analysis 146 4.5 Summary 152 References 153 5 Stability Analysis of Time‐Delay System 155 5.1 Introduction 155 5.2 Stability Analysis of a Non‐Jump Time‐Delay System 156 5.2.1 Stochastic Stability Analysis of Power System with Time Delay Based on Itô Differential 156 5.2.2 Stochastic Time‐Delay Stability Analysis of a Power System with Wind Power Connection 168 5.3 Stability Analysis of a Jump Time‐Delay System 182 5.3.1 Jump Power System Time‐Delay Stability Analysis Based on Discrete Markov Theory 182 5.3.2 Time‐Delay Stability Analysis of Power System Based on the Fault Chains and Markov Process 196 5.4 Summary 208 Appendix A 209 References 210 6 Wide‐Area Robust Control 213 6.1 Introduction 213 6.2 Robust Control for Internal Uncertainties 214 6.2.1 Multiobjective Robust H 2 /H ∞ Control Considering Uncertainties for Damping Oscillation 214 6.2.2 Robust H 2 /H ∞ Control Strategy Based on Polytope Uncertainty 221 6.3 Optimal Robust Control 226 6.3.1 Wide‐Area Damping Robust Control Based on Nonconvex Stable Region 226 6.3.2 Wide‐Area Damping Robust H 2 /H ∞ Control Strategy Based on Perfect Regulation 236 6.4 Error Tracking Robust Control 243 6.4.1 Control Algorithm 245 6.4.2 Simulation Verification 248 6.5 Summary 251 References 252 7 Wide‐Area Adaptive Control 253 7.1 Introduction 253 7.2 Adaptive Control Considering Operating Condition Identification 254 7.2.1 Federated Kalman Filter Based Adaptive Damping Control of Inter‐Area Oscillations 254 7.2.2 Classification and Regression Tree Based Adaptive Damping Control of Inter‐Area Oscillations 268 7.3 Adaptive Control Considering Controller Switching 288 7.3.1 Dual Youla Parameterization Based Adaptive Wide‐Area Damping Control 288 7.3.2 Continuous Markov Model Based Adaptive Control Strategy for Time‐Varying Power System 303 7.3.3 Discrete Markov Model Based Adaptive Control Strategy of Multiple‐Condition Power System 318 7.3.4 Adaptive Controller Switching Considering Time Delay 327 7.4 Summary 339 References 340 Index 341
£999.99
John Wiley & Sons Inc Computational Methods in Electromagnetic
Book SynopsisOffers a comprehensive overview of the recent advances in the area of computational electromagnetics Computational Method in Electromagnetic Compatibility offers a review of the most recent advances in computational electromagnetics. The authorsnoted experts in the fieldexamine similar problems by taking different approaches related to antenna theory models and transmission line methods. They discuss various solution methods related to boundary integral equation techniques and finite difference techniques. The topics covered are related to realistic antenna systems including antennas for air traffic control or ground penetrating radar antennas; grounding systems (such as grounding systems for wind turbines); biomedical applications of electromagnetic fields (such as transcranial magnetic stimulation); and much more. The text features a number of illustrative computational examples and a reference list at the end of each chapter. The book is grounded in a rigorous theoretical approacTable of ContentsPreface xiii Part I Electromagnetic Field Coupling to ThinWire Configurations of Arbitrary Shape 1 1 Computational Electromagnetics – Introductory Aspects 3 1.1 The Character of Physical Models Representing Natural Phenomena 3 1.1.1 Scientific Method, a Definition, History, Development ... ? 3 1.1.2 Physical Model and the MathematicalMethod to Solve the Problem –The Essence of Scientific Theories 4 1.1.3 Philosophical Aspects Behind Scientific Theories 7 1.1.4 On the Character of Physical Models 8 1.2 Maxwell’s Equations 9 1.2.1 Original Form of Maxwell’s Equations 9 1.2.2 Modern Form of Maxwell’s Equations 10 1.2.3 From the Corner of Philosophy of Science 12 1.2.4 FDTD Solution of Maxwell’s Equations 13 1.2.5 Computational Examples 16 1.3 The ElectromagneticWave Equations 19 1.4 Conservation Laws in the Electromagnetic Field 20 1.5 Density of Quantity of Movement in the Electromagnetic Field 22 1.6 Electromagnetic Potentials 25 1.7 Solution of theWave Equation and Radiation Arrow of Time 25 1.8 Complex Phasor Form of Equations in Electromagnetics 27 1.8.1 The Generalized Symmetric Form of Maxwell’s Equations 27 1.8.2 Complex Phasor Form of ElectromagneticWave Equations 29 1.8.3 Poynting Theorem for Complex Phasors 29 References 31 2 Antenna Theory versus Transmission Line Approximation – General Considerations 33 2.1 A Note on EMC ComputationalModels 33 2.1.1 Classification of EMC Models 34 2.1.2 Summary Remarks on EMC Modeling 34 2.2 Generalized Telegrapher’s Equations for the Field Coupling to Finite LengthWires 35 2.2.1 Frequency Domain Analysis for StraightWires above a Lossy Ground 36 2.2.1.1 Integral Equation for PECWire of Finite Length above a Lossy Ground 37 2.2.1.2 Integral Equation for a Lossy Conductor above a Lossy Ground 39 2.2.1.3 Generalized Telegraphers Equations for PECWires 39 2.2.1.4 Generalized Telegraphers Equations for Lossy Conductors 42 2.2.1.5 Numerical Solution of Integral Equations 43 2.2.1.6 Simulation Results 46 2.2.1.7 Simulation Results and Comparison with TLTheory 46 2.2.2 Frequency Domain Analysis for StraightWires Buried in a Lossy Ground 51 2.2.2.1 Integral Equation for Lossy Conductor Buried in a Lossy Ground 51 2.2.2.2 Generalized Telegraphers Equations for Buried LossyWires 54 2.2.2.3 Computational Examples 56 2.2.3 Time Domain Analysis for StraightWires above a Lossy Ground 61 2.2.3.1 Space–Time Integro-Differential Equation for PECWire above a Lossy Ground 61 2.2.3.2 Space–Time Integro-Differential Equation for Lossy Conductors 65 2.2.3.3 Generalized Telegraphers Equations for PECWires 66 2.2.3.4 Generalized Telegrapher’s Equations for Lossy Conductors 70 2.2.4 Time Domain Analysis for StraightWires Buried in a Lossy Ground 74 2.2.4.1 Space–Time Integro-Differential Equation for PECWire below a Lossy Ground 74 2.2.4.2 Space–Time Integro-Differential Equation for Lossy Conductors 79 2.2.4.3 Generalized Telegrapher’s Equations for BuriedWires 80 2.2.4.4 Computational Results: BuriedWire Scatterer 82 2.2.4.5 Computational Results: Horizontal Grounding Electrode 84 2.3 Single HorizontalWire in the Presence of a Lossy Half-Space: Comparison of Analytical Solution, Numerical Solution, and Transmission Line Approximation 86 2.3.1 Wire above a Perfect Ground 88 2.3.2 Wire above an Imperfect Ground 89 2.3.3 Wire Buried in a Lossy Ground 89 2.3.4 Analytical Solution 90 2.3.5 Boundary Element Procedure 92 2.3.6 The Transmission Line Model 93 2.3.7 Modified Transmission Line Model 94 2.3.8 Computational Examples 95 2.3.8.1 Wire above a PEC Ground 95 2.3.8.2 Wire above a Lossy Ground 95 2.3.8.3 Wire Buried in a Lossy Ground 103 2.3.9 Field Transmitted in a Lower Lossy Half-Space 103 2.3.10 Numerical Results 110 2.4 Single VerticalWire in the Presence of a Lossy Half-Space: Comparison of Analytical Solution, Numerical Solution, and Transmission Line Approximation 114 2.4.1 Numerical Solution 117 2.4.2 Analytical Solution 119 2.4.3 Computational Examples 121 2.4.3.1 Transmitting Antenna 122 2.4.3.2 Receiving Antenna 122 2.5 Magnetic Current Loop Excitation of ThinWires 132 2.5.1 Delta Gap and Magnetic Frill 134 2.5.2 Magnetic Current Loop 135 2.5.3 Numerical Solution 136 2.5.4 Numerical Results 139 References 146 3 Electromagnetic Field Coupling to OverheadWires 153 3.1 Frequency Domain Models and Methods 154 3.1.1 Antenna Theory Approach: Set of Coupled Pocklington’s Equations 154 3.1.2 Numerical Solution 160 3.1.3 Transmission Line Approximation: Telegrapher’s Equations in the Frequency Domain 162 3.1.4 Computational Examples 162 3.2 Time Domain Models and Methods 167 3.2.1 The Antenna Theory Model 167 3.2.2 The Numerical Solution 175 3.2.3 The Transmission Line Model 181 3.2.4 The Solution of Transmission Line Equations via FDTD 182 3.2.5 Numerical Results 184 3.3 Applications to Antenna Systems 187 3.3.1 Helix Antennas 187 3.3.2 Log-Periodic Dipole Arrays 190 3.3.3 GPR Dipole Antennas 198 References 202 4 Electromagnetic Field Coupling to BuriedWires 205 4.1 Frequency Domain Modeling 205 4.1.1 Antenna Theory Approach: Set of Coupled Pocklington’s Equations for ArbitraryWire Configurations 206 4.1.2 Antenna Theory Approach: Numerical Solution 210 4.1.3 Transmission Line Approximation: 212 4.1.4 Computational Examples 213 4.2 Time Domain Modeling 216 4.2.1 Antenna Theory Approach 216 4.2.2 Transmission Line Model 219 4.2.3 Computational Examples 223 References 223 5 Lightning Electromagnetics 225 5.1 AntennaModel of Lightning Channel 225 5.1.1 Integral Equation Formulation 226 5.1.2 Computational Examples 228 5.2 Vertical AntennaModel of a Lightning Rod 230 5.2.1 Integral Equation Formulation 234 5.2.2 Computational Examples 236 5.3 AntennaModel of aWind Turbine Exposed to Lightning Strike 237 5.3.1 Integral Equation Formulation for Multiple OverheadWires 240 5.3.2 Numerical Solution of Integral Equation Set for Overhead Wires 241 5.3.3 Computational Example: Transient Response of aWT Lightning Strike 242 References 247 6 Transient Analysis of Grounding Systems 253 6.1 Frequency Domain Analysis of Horizontal Grounding Electrode 254 6.1.1 Integral Equation Formulation/Reflection Coefficient Approach 254 6.1.2 Numerical Solution 257 6.1.3 Integral Equation Formulation/Sommerfeld Integral Approach 258 6.1.4 Analytical Solution 260 6.1.5 Modified Transmission Line Method (TLM) Approach 261 6.1.6 Computational Examples 261 6.1.7 Application of Magnetic Current Loop (MCL) Source model to Horizontal Grounding Electrode 284 6.2 Frequency Domain Analysis of Vertical Grounding Electrode 288 6.2.1 Integral Equation Formulation/Reflection Coefficient Approach 288 6.2.2 Numerical Solution 290 6.2.3 Analytical Solution 291 6.2.4 Examples 292 6.3 Frequency Domain Analysis of Complex Grounding Systems 297 6.3.1 Antenna Theory Approach: Set of Homogeneous Pocklington’s Integro-Differential Equations for Grounding Systems 298 6.3.2 Antenna Theory Approach: Numerical Solution 300 6.3.3 Modified Transmission Line Method Approach 301 6.3.4 Finite Difference Solution of the Potential Differential Equation for Transient Induced Voltage 301 6.3.5 Computational Examples: Grounding Grids and Rings 304 6.3.6 Computational Examples: Grounding Systems forWTs 311 6.4 Time Domain Analysis of Horizontal Grounding Electrodes 320 6.4.1 Homogeneous Integral Equation Formulation in the Time Domain 321 6.4.2 Numerical Solution Procedure for Pocklington’s Equation 322 6.4.3 Numerical Results for Grounding Electrode 323 6.4.4 Analytical Solution of Pocklington’s Equation 323 6.4.5 Transmission Line Model 324 6.4.6 FDTD Solution of Telegrapher’s Equations 325 6.4.7 The Leakage Current 326 6.4.8 Computational Examples for the Horizontal Grounding Electrode 328 References 331 Part II Advanced Models in Bioelectromagnetics 337 7 Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields – General Aspects 339 7.1 Dosimetry 340 7.1.1 Low Frequency Exposures 341 7.1.2 High Frequency Exposures 342 7.2 Coupling Mechanisms 342 7.2.1 Coupling to LF Electric Fields 343 7.2.2 Coupling to LF Magnetic Fields 343 7.2.3 Absorption of Energy from Electromagnetic Radiation 343 7.2.4 Indirect Coupling Mechanisms 344 7.3 Biological Effects 344 7.3.1 Effects of ELF Fields 345 7.3.2 Effects of HF Radiation 345 7.4 Safety Guidelines and Exposure Limits 348 7.5 Some Remarks 351 References 351 8 Modeling of Human Exposure to Static and Low Frequency Fields 353 8.1 Exposure to Static Fields 354 8.1.1 Finite Element Solution 356 8.1.2 Boundary Element Solution 357 8.1.3 Numerical Results 360 8.2 Exposure to Low Frequency (LF) Fields 361 8.2.1 Numerical Results 362 References 363 9 Modeling of Human Exposure to High Frequency (HF) Electromagnetic Fields 365 9.1 Internal Electromagnetic Field DosimetryMethods 366 9.1.1 Solution by the Hybrid Finite Element/Boundary Element Approach 366 9.1.2 Numerical Results for the Human Eye Exposure 368 9.1.3 Solution by the Method of Moments 372 9.1.4 Computational Example for the Brain Exposure 380 9.2 Thermal Dosimetry Procedures 381 9.2.1 Finite Element Solution of Bio-Heat Transfer Equation 381 9.2.2 Numerical Results 382 References 383 10 Biomedical Applications of Electromagnetic Fields 387 10.1 Modeling of Induced Fields due to Transcranial Magnetic Stimulation (TMS) Treatment 388 10.1.1 Numerical Results 391 10.2 Modeling of Nerve Fiber Excitation 392 10.2.1 Passive Nerve Fiber 396 10.2.2 Numerical Results for Passive Nerve Fiber 397 10.2.3 Active Nerve Fiber 397 10.2.4 Numerical Results for Active Nerve Fiber 401 References 403 Index 407
£102.55
John Wiley & Sons Inc Power System Dynamics with ComputerBased Modeling
Book SynopsisA unique combination of theoretical knowledge and practical analysis experience Derived from Yoshihide Hase?s Handbook of Power Systems Engineering, 2nd Edition, this book provides readers with everything they need to know about power system dynamics. Presented in three parts, it covers power system theories, computation theories, and how prevailed engineering platforms can be utilized for various engineering works. It features many illustrations based on ETAP to help explain the knowledge within as much as possible. Recompiling all the chapters from the previous book, Power System Dynamics with Computer Based Modeling and Analysis offers nineteen new and improved content with updated information and all new topics, including two new chapters on circuit analysis which help engineers with non-electrical engineering backgrounds. Topics covered include: Essentials of Electromagnetism; Complex Number Notation (Symbolic Method) and Laplace-trTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xxix Preface xxxi Acknowledgments xxxiii Part A Power Systems Theories and Practices 1 1 Essentials of Electromagnetism 3 1.1 Overview 3 1.2 Voltage, Current, Electric Power, and Resistance 3 1.3 Electromagnetic Induction (Faraday’s Law) 4 1.4 Self Inductance and Mutual Inductance 6 1.5 Mutual Capacitance 7 2 Complex Number Notation (Symbolic Method) and the Laplace Transform 11 2.1 Euler’s Formula 11 2.2 Complex Number Notation of Electricity Based on Euler’s Formula 12 2.3 LR Circuit Transient Calculation Using Complex Number Notation and the Laplace Transform 14 2.4 LCR Circuit Transient Calculation 16 2.5 Resistive, Inductive, and Capacitive Load, and Phasor Expressions 21 3 Transmission Line Matrices and Symmetrical Components 25 3.1 Overhead Transmission Lines with Inductive LR Constants 25 3.2 Overhead Transmission Lines with Capacitive C Constants 30 3.3 Symmetrical Coordinate Method (Symmetrical Components) 32 3.4 Conversion of a Three-Phase Circuit into a Symmetrical Coordinated Circuit 39 3.5 Transmission Lines by Symmetrical Components 39 3.6 Generator by Symmetrical Components (Simplified Description) 47 3.7 Description of a Three-Phase Load Circuit by Symmetrical Components 49 4 Physics of Transmission Lines and Line Constants 51 4.1 Inductance 51 4.2 Capacitance and Leakage Current 59 4.3 Actual Configuration of Overhead Transmission Lines 66 4.4 Special Properties of Working Inductance and Working Capacitance 68 4.5 MKS Rational Unit System 71 5 The Per-Unit Method 77 5.1 Fundamental Concepts of the PU Method 77 5.2 PU Method for a Single-Phase Circuit 77 5.3 PU Method for Three-Phase Circuits 79 5.4 Base Quantity Modification of Unitized Impedance 80 5.5 Unitized Symmetrical Circuit: Numerical Example 81 6 Transformer Modeling 91 6.1 Single-Phase Three-Winding Transformer 91 6.2 − − Δ-Connected Three-Phase, Three-Winding Transformer 95 6.3 Three-Phase Transformers with Various Winding Connections 101 6.4 Autotransformers 105 6.5 On-Load Tap-Changing Transformer (LTC Transformer) 107 6.6 Phase-Shifting Transformer 109 6.7 Woodbridge Transformers and Scott Transformers 113 6.8 Neutral Grounding Transformer 116 6.9 Transformer Magnetic Characteristics and Inrush Current Phenomena 118 7 Fault Analysis Based on Symmetrical Components 127 7.1 Fundamental Concepts of Fault Analysis Based on the Symmetrical Coordinate Method 127 7.2 Line-to-Ground Fault (Phase-a to Ground Fault: 1ϕG) 127 7.3 Fault Analysis at Various Fault Modes 132 7.4 Conductor Opening 137 7.5 Visual Vector Diagrams of Voltages and Currents under Fault Conditions 139 7.6 Three-Phase-Order Misconnections 151 8 Fault Analysis with the αβ0-Method 155 8.1 αβ0-Method (Clarke-Components) 155 8.2 Fault Analysis with αβ0-Components 166 8.3 Advantages of the αβ0-Method 171 8.4 Fault-Transient Analysis with Symmetrical Components and the αβ0-Method 171 9 Power Cables 175 9.1 Structural Features of Power Cables 175 9.2 Circuit Constants of Power Cables 183 9.3 Metallic Sheaths and Outer Coverings 190 10 Synchronous Generators, Part 1: Circuit Theory 195 10.1 Generator Model in a Phase abc-Domain 195 10.2 dq0 Method (dq0 Components) 203 10.3 Transformation of Generator Equations from the abc-Domain to the dq0-Domain 206 10.4 Physical Meanings of Generator Equations in the dq0-Domain 210 10.5 Generator dq0-Domain Equations 213 10.6 Generator dq0-Domain Equivalent Circuit 218 10.7 Generator Operating Characteristics and Vector Diagram on the d- and q-Axes Plane 220 10.8 Generator Transient Reactance 223 10.9 Symmetrical Equivalent Circuits of Generators 225 10.10 Laplace-Transformed Generator Equations and Time Constants 231 10.12 Relations Between the dq0-Domain and αβ0-Domain 239 10.13 Calculating Generator Short-Circuit Transient Current Under Load 239 11 Synchronous Generators, Part 2: Characteristics of Machinery 251 11.1 Apparent Power P + jQ in the abc-, 012-, dq0-Domains 251 11.2 Mechanical (Kinetic) Power and Generating (Electrical) Power 257 11.3 Kinetic Equation for Generators 259 11.4 Generator Operating Characteristics with P-Q (or p-q) Coordinates 269 11.5 Generator Ratings and Capability Curves 271 11.6 Generator’s Locus in the pq-Coordinate Plane under Various Operating Conditions 275 11.7 Leading Power-Factor (Under-Excitation Domain) Operation, and UEL Function by AVR 277 11.8 Operation at Over-Excitation (Lagging Power-Factor Operation) 282 11.9 Thermal Generators’ Weak Points (Negative-Sequence Current, Higher Harmonic Current, Shaft-Torsional Distortion) 282 11.10 Transient Torsional Twisting Torque of a TG Coupled Shaft 287 11.11 General Description of Modern Thermal/Nuclear TG Units 290 12 Steady-State, Transient, and Dynamic Stability 297 12.1 P-δ Curves and Q-δ Curves 297 12.2 Power Transfer Limits of Grid-Connected Generators (Steady-State Stability) 299 12.3 Transient Stability 306 12.4 Dynamic Stability 309 12.5 Four-Terminal Circuit and the P − δ Curve under Fault Conditions 310 12.6 P-δ Curve under Various Fault-Mode Conditions 312 12.7 PQV Characteristics and Voltage Instability (Voltage Avalanche) 313 12.8 Generator Characteristics with an AVR 319 12.9 Generator Operation Limit With and Without an AVR in PQ Coordinates 330 12.10 VQ (Voltage and Reactive Power) Control with an AVR 332 13 Induction Generators and Motors (Induction Machines) 337 13.1 Introduction to Induction Motors and Generators 337 13.2 Doubly Fed Induction Generators and Motors 337 13.3 Squirrel-Cage Induction Motors 355 13.4 Proportional Relations of Mechanical Quantities and Electrical Quantities as a Basis of Power-Electronic Control 367 14 Directional Distance Relays and R–X Diagrams 371 14.1 Overview of Protective Relays 371 14.2 Directional Distance Relays (DZ-Ry) and R–X Coordinate Plane 372 14.3 R–X Diagram Locus under Fault Conditions 375 14.4 Impedance Locus under Ordinary Load Conditions and Step-Out Conditions 381 14.5 Impedance Locus Under Faults with Load-Flow Conditions 385 14.6 Loss of Excitation Detection by Distance Relays (40-Relay) 386 15 Lightning and Switching Surge Phenomena and Breaker Switching 391 15.1 Traveling Wave on a Transmission Line, and Equations 391 15.2 Four-Terminal Network Equations between Two Arbitrary Points 398 15.3 Examination of Line Constants 399 15.4 Behavior of Traveling Waves at Transition Points 401 15.5 Surge Overvoltages and Their Three Different, Confusing Notations 404 15.6 Behavior of Traveling Waves at a Lightning-Strike Point 406 15.7 Traveling Wave Phenomena of Three-Phase Transmission Lines 408 15.8 Reflection Lattices and Transient Behavior Modes 413 15.9 Switching Surge Phenomena Caused by Breakers Tripping 415 15.10 Breaker Phase Voltages and Recovery Voltages after Fault Tripping 424 15.11 Three-Phase Breaker TRVs across Independent Poles 426 15.12 Circuit Breakers and Switching Practices 432 15.13 Switching Surge Caused by Line Switches (Disconnecting Switches) 452 15.14 Surge Phenomena Caused on Power Cable Systems 454 15.15 Lightning Surge Caused on Cable Lines 456 15.16 Switching Surge Caused on Cable Lines 458 15.17 Surge Voltages Caused on Cables and GIS Jointed Points 459 16 Overvoltage Phenomena 463 16.1 Neutral-Grounding Methods 463 16.2 Arc-Suppression Coil (Petersen Coil) Neutral-Grounded Method 467 16.3 Overvoltages Caused by a Line-to-Ground Fault 467 16.4 Other Low-Frequency Overvoltage Phenomena (Non-resonant Phenomena) 469 16.5 Lower-Frequency Resonant Overvoltages 472 16.6 Interrupted Ground Fault of a Cable Line in a Neutral-Ungrounded System 475 16.7 Switching Surge Overvoltages 475 16.8 Overvoltage Phenomena Caused by Lightning Strikes 477 17 Insulation Coordination 481 17.1 Overvoltages as Insulation Stresses 481 17.2 Classification of Overvoltages 483 17.3 Fundamental Process of Insulation Coordination 486 17.4 Countermeasures on Transmission Lines to Reduce Overvoltages and Flashover 487 17.5 Tower-Mounted Arrester Devices 489 17.6 Using Unequal Circuit Insulation (Double-Circuit Lines) 490 17.7 Using High-Speed Reclosing 490 17.8 Overvoltage Protection with Arresters at Substations 491 17.9 Station Protection Using OGWs and Reduced Grounding Resistance 499 17.10 Insulation Coordination Details 501 17.11 Transfer Surge Voltages through Transformers, and Generator Protection 509 17.12 Transformer Internal High-Frequency Voltage Oscillation Phenomena 518 17.13 Oil-Filled Transformers Versus Gas-Filled Transformers 524 18 Harmonics and Waveform Distortion Phenomena 527 18.1 Classification of Harmonics and Waveform Distortion 527 18.2 Impact of Harmonics 527 18.3 Harmonic Phenomena Caused by Power Cable Line Faults 529 19 Power Electronic Applications, Part 1: Devices 535 19.1 Fundamental Concepts of Power Electronics 535 19.2 Power Switching with Power Devices 535 19.3 Snubber Circuit 539 19.4 Voltage Conversion with Switching 540 19.5 Power Electronics Devices 542 19.6 Mathematical Background for Analyzing Power Electronics Applications 547 20 Power Electronics Applications, Part 2: Circuit Theory 553 20.1 AC-to-DC Conversion: A Rectifier with a Diode 553 20.2 AC-to-DC Controlled Conversion: Rectifier with a Thyristor 562 20.3 DC-to-DC Converters (DC-to-DC Choppers) 571 20.4 DC-to-AC Inverters 579 20.5 PWM Control of Inverters 583 20.6 AC-to-AC Converters (Cycloconverters) 587 21 Power Electronics Applications, Part 3: Control Theory 589 21.1 Introduction 589 21.2 Driving Motors 589 21.3 Static Var Compensators (SVC: A Thyristor-Based Approach) 597 21.4 Active Filters 603 21.5 Generator Excitation Systems 609 21.6 Adjustable-Speed Pumped-Storage Generator-Motor Units 610 21.7 Wind Generation 615 21.8 Small Hydro Generation 618 21.9 Solar Generation (Photovoltaic Generation) 619 21.10 High-Voltage DC Transmission (HVDC Transmission) 621 21.11 FACTS Technology 625 21.12 Railway Applications 62721.13 Uninterruptible Power Supplies 628Appendix A Mathematical Formulae 631Appendix B Matrix Equation Formulae 635 Part B Digital Computation Theories 639 22 Digital Computation Basics 641 22.1 Introduction 641 22.2 Network Types 642 22.3 Circuit Elements 645 22.4 Ohm’s Law 653 22.5 Kirchhoff’s Circuit Laws 655 22.6 Electrical Division Principle 656 22.7 Instantaneous, Average, and RMS Values 657 22.8 Nodal Formulation 658 22.9 Procedure for Mesh Analysis 662 22.10 Norton’s and Thévenin’s Equivalents 664 22.11 Maximum Power Transfer Theorem 668 22.13 Network Topology 675 22.14 Power System Matrices 681 22.15 Transformer Modeling 692 22.16 Transmission Line Modeling 696 23 Power-Flow Methods 701 23.1 Newton–Raphson Method 701 23.2 Gauss–Seidel Method 702 23.3 Adaptive Newton–Raphson Method 703 23.4 Fast-Decoupled Method 703 24 Short-Circuit Methods 705 24.1 ANSI/IEEE Calculation Methods 705 24.2 IEC Calculation Methods 719 25 Harmonics 729 25.1 Problem Formulation 729 25.2 Methodology and Standards 733 25.3 Harmonic Indices 735 25.4 Harmonic Component Modeling 740 25.5 Power System Components 741 25.6 System Resonance 743 25.7 Harmonic Mitigation 744 26 Reliability 749 26.1 Methodology and Standards 749 26.2 Performance Indices 752 27 Numerical Integration Methods 755 27.1 Accuracy 755 27.2 Stability 755 27.3 Stiffness 757 27.4 Predictor–Corrector 757 27.5 Runge–Kutta 758 28 Optimization 761 28.1 Power-Flow Injections 761 28.2 Voltage Magnitude Constraints 762 28.3 Line-Flow Thermal Constraints 762 28.4 Line-Flow Constraints as Current Limitations 763 28.5 Line-Flow Constraints as Voltage Angle Constraints 763 Part C Analytical Practices and Examples using ETAP 765 29 Introduction to Power System Analysis 767 29.1 Planning Studies 767 29.2 Need for Power-System Analysis 768 29.3 Computers in Power Engineering 768 29.4 Study Approach 768 29.5 Operator Training 772 29.6 System Reliability and Maintenance 772 29.7 Electrical Transient Analyzer Program (ETAP) 772 30 One-Line Diagrams 777 30.1 Introduction 777 30.2 Engineering Parameters 777 30.3 One-Line Diagram Symbols 778 30.4 Power-System Configurations 780 30.5 Network Topology Processing 787 30.6 Illustrative Example – Per-Unit and Single-Line Diagram 790 31 Load Flow 791 31.1 Introduction 791 31.2 Study Objectives 791 31.3 Problem Formulation 792 31.4 Calculation Methodology 794 31.5 Required Data for ETAP 796 31.6 Data Collection and Preparation 797 31.7 Model Validation 797 31.8 Study Scenarios 799 31.9 Contingency Analysis 800 31.10 Optimal or Optimum Power Flow 801 31.11 Illustrative Examples 803 32 Short-Circuit/Fault Analysis 841 32.1 Introduction 841 32.2 Analysis Objectives 841 32.3 Methodology and Standards 846 32.4 Study Scenarios 855 32.5 Results and Reports 856 32.6 Illustrative Examples 858 33 Motor Starting 881 33.1 Methods 881 33.2 Analysis Objectives 893 33.3 Methodology and Standards 894 33.4 Required Data 902 33.5 Illustrative Examples 903 33.6 Motor-Starting Plots and Results 913 33.7 Motor-Starting Alerts 916 34 Harmonics 917 34.1 Introduction 917 34.2 Analysis Objectives 919 34.3 Required Data 921 34.4 Harmonic Load Flow and Frequency Scan 923 34.5 Illustrative Examples 924 35 Transient Stability 939 35.1 Introduction 939 35.2 Analysis Objectives 940 35.3 Basic Concepts of Transient Stability 942 35.4 Dynamic Models 944 35.5 User-Defined Models 967 35.6 Parameter Tuning 967 35.7 Single-Generator Power System Model 971 35.8 Data Collection and Preparation 973 35.9 Study Scenarios 974 35.10 Stability Improvement 977 35.11 System Simulation 977 35.12 Illustrative Examples 979 36 Reliability Assessment 1003 36.1 Introduction 1003 36.2 Analysis Objectives 1003 36.3 Problem Formulation 1004 36.4 Required Data 1005 36.5 Illustrative Examples 1005 37 Protective Device Coordination 1019 37.1 Introduction 1019 37.2 Relays 1022 37.3 Methodology 1028 37.4 Required Data 1035 37.5 Principle of Protection 1036 37.6 Principle of Selectivity/Coordination 1037 37.7 Art of Protection and Coordination >600 V 1040 37.8 Illustrative Examples 1048Appendix C Standards, Regulations, and Best Practice 1071 Further Reading 1083 Index 1085
£141.26
John Wiley & Sons Inc Power System Modeling Computation and Control
Book SynopsisProvides students with an understanding of the modeling and practice in power system stability analysis and control design, as well as the computational tools used by commercial vendors Bringing together wind, FACTS, HVDC, and several other modern elements, this book gives readers everything they need to know about power systems. It makes learning complex power system concepts, models, and dynamics simpler and more efficient while providing modern viewpoints of power system analysis. Power System Modeling, Computation, and Control provides students with a new and detailed analysis of voltage stability; a simple example illustrating the BCU method of transient stability analysis; and one of only a few derivations of the transient synchronous machine model. It offers a discussion on reactive power consumption of induction motors during start-up to illustrate the low-voltage phenomenon observed in urban load centers. Damping controller designs using power system stabilizer, HVDC systemTable of ContentsPreface xvii About the Companion Website xxi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Electrification 1 1.2 Generation, Transmission, and Distribution Systems 2 1.2.1 Central Generating Station Model 2 1.2.2 Renewable Generation 4 1.2.3 Smart Grids 5 1.3 Time Scales 5 1.3.1 Dynamic Phenomena 5 1.3.2 Measurements and Data 5 1.3.3 Control Functions and System Operation 7 1.4 Organization of the Book 7 Part I System Concepts 9 2 Steady-State Power Flow 11 2.1 Introduction 11 2.2 Power Network Elements and Admittance Matrix 12 2.2.1 Transmission Lines 12 2.2.2 Transformers 13 2.2.3 Per Unit Representation 14 2.2.4 Building the Network Admittance Matrix 14 2.3 Active and Reactive Power Flow Calculations 16 2.4 Power Flow Formulation 19 2.5 Newton-Raphson Method 21 2.5.1 General Procedure 21 2.5.2 NR Solution of Power Flow Equations 22 2.6 Advanced Power Flow Features 27 2.6.1 Load Bus Voltage Regulation 27 2.6.2 Multi-area Power Flow 28 2.6.3 Active Line Power Flow Regulation 29 2.6.4 Dishonest Newton-Raphson Method 30 2.6.5 Fast Decoupled Loadflow 30 2.6.6 DC Power Flow 31 2.7 Summary and Notes 31 Appendix 2.A Two-winding Transformer Model 32 Appendix 2.B LU Decomposition and Sparsity Methods 36 Appendix 2.C Power Flow and Dynamic Data for the 2-area, 4-machine System 39 Problems 42 3 Steady-State Voltage Stability Analysis 47 3.1 Introduction 47 3.2 Voltage Collapse Incidents 48 3.2.1 Tokyo, Japan: July 23, 1987 48 3.2.2 US Western Power System: July 2, 1996 48 3.3 Reactive Power Consumption on Transmission Lines 49 3.4 Voltage Stability Analysis of a Radial Load System 55 3.4.1 Maximum Power Transfer 59 3.5 Voltage Stability Analysis of Large Power Systems 61 3.6 Continuation Power Flow Method 64 3.6.1 Continuation Power Flow Algorithm 66 3.7 An AQ-Bus Method for Solving Power Flow 67 3.7.1 Analytical Framework for the AQ-Bus Method 69 3.7.2 AQ-Bus Formulation for Constant-Power-Factor Loads 70 3.7.3 AQ-Bus Algorithm for Computing Voltage Stability Margins 71 3.8 Power System Components Affecting Voltage Stability 73 3.8.1 Shunt Reactive Power Supply 74 3.8.2 Under-Load Tap Changer 76 3.9 Hierarchical Voltage Control 79 3.10 Voltage Stability Margins and Indices 80 3.10.1 Voltage Stability Margins 80 3.10.2 Voltage Sensitivities 81 3.10.3 Singular Values and Eigenvalues of the Power Flow Jacobian Matrix 82 3.11 Summary and Notes 82 Problems 83 4 Power System Dynamics and Simulation 87 4.1 Introduction 87 4.2 Electromechanical Model of Synchronous Machines 88 4.3 Single-Machine Infinite-Bus System 90 4.4 Power System Disturbances 94 4.4.1 Fault-On Analysis 94 4.4.2 Post-Fault Analysis 96 4.4.3 Other Types of Faults 98 4.5 Simulation Methods 98 4.5.1 Modified Euler Methods 99 4.5.1.1 Euler Full-Step Modification Method 100 4.5.1.2 Euler Half-Step Modification Method 101 4.5.2 Adams-Bashforth Second-Order Method 101 4.5.3 Selecting Integration Stepsize 102 4.5.4 Implicit Integration Methods 104 4.5.4.1 Integration of DAEs 105 4.6 Dynamic Models of Multi-Machine Power Systems 106 4.6.1 Constant-Impedance Loads 107 4.6.2 Generator Current Injections 108 4.6.3 Network Equation Extended to the Machine Internal Node 108 4.6.4 Reduced Admittance Matrix Approach 109 4.6.5 Method for Dynamic Simulation 109 4.7 Multi-Machine Power System Stability 114 4.7.1 Reference Frames for Machine Angles 115 4.8 Power System Toolbox 117 4.9 Summary and Notes 119 Problems 119 5 Direct Transient Stability Analysis 123 5.1 Introduction 123 5.2 Equal-Area Analysis of a Single-Machine Infinite-Bus System 124 5.2.1 Power-Angle Curve 124 5.2.2 Fault-On and Post-Fault Analysis 126 5.3 Transient Energy Functions 127 5.3.1 Lyapunov Functions 128 5.3.2 Energy Function for Single-Machine Infinite-Bus Electromechanical Model 128 5.4 Energy Function Analysis of a Disturbance Event 131 5.5 Single-Machine Infinite-Bus Model Phase Portrait and Region of Stability 135 5.6 Direct Stability Analysis using Energy Functions 138 5.7 Energy Functions for Multi-Machine Power Systems 139 5.7.1 Direct Stability Analysis for Multi-Machine Systems 142 5.7.2 Computation of Critical Energy 143 5.8 Dynamic Security Assessment 146 5.9 Summary and Notes 146 Problems 147 6 Linear Analysis and Small-Signal Stability 149 6.1 Introduction 149 6.2 Electromechanical Modes 150 6.3 Linearization 151 6.3.1 State-Space Models 151 6.3.2 Input-Output Models 152 6.3.3 Modal Analysis and Time-Domain Solutions 152 6.3.4 Time Response of Linear Systems 154 6.3.5 Participation Factors 156 6.4 Linearized Models of Single-Machine Infinite-Bus Systems 157 6.5 Linearized Models of Multi-Machine Systems 160 6.5.1 Synchronizing Torque Matrix and Eigenvalue Properties 162 6.5.2 Modeshapes and Participation Factors 162 6.6 Developing Linearized Models of Large Power Systems 164 6.6.1 Analytical Partial Derivatives 165 6.6.2 Numerical Linearization 169 6.7 Summary and Notes 171 Problems 171 Part II Synchronous Machine Models and their Control Systems 175 7 Steady-State Models and Operation of Synchronous Machines 177 7.1 Introduction 177 7.2 Physical Description 177 7.2.1 Amortisseur Bars 179 7.3 Synchronous Machine Model 179 7.3.1 Flux Linkage and Voltage Equations 181 7.3.2 Stator (Armature) Self and Mutual Inductances 183 7.3.3 Mutual Inductances between Stator and Rotor 183 7.3.4 Rotor Self and Mutual Inductances 184 7.4 Park Transformation 185 7.4.1 Electrical Power in dq0 Variables 188 7.5 Reciprocal, Equal Lad Per-Unit System 189 7.5.1 Stator Base Values 189 7.5.2 Stator Voltage Equations 190 7.5.3 Rotor Base Values 191 7.5.4 Rotor Voltage Equations 191 7.5.5 Stator Flux-Linkage Equations 192 7.5.6 Rotor Flux-Linkage Equations 192 7.5.7 Equal Mutual Inductance 192 7.6 Equivalent Circuits 196 7.6.1 Flux-Linkage Circuits 196 7.6.2 Voltage Equivalent Circuits 197 7.7 Steady-State Analysis 199 7.7.1 Open-Circuit Condition 199 7.7.2 Loaded Condition 201 7.7.3 Drawing Voltage-Current Phasor Diagrams 202 7.8 Saturation Effects 204 7.8.1 Representations of Magnetic Saturation 205 7.9 Generator Capability Curves 207 7.10 Summary and Notes 209 Problems 209 8 Dynamic Models of Synchronous Machines 213 8.1 Introduction 213 8.2 Machine Dynamic Response During Fault 213 8.2.1 DC Offset and Stator Transients 215 8.3 Transient and Subtransient Reactances and Time Constants 216 8.4 Subtransient Synchronous Machine Model 221 8.5 Other Synchronous Machine Models 227 8.5.1 Flux-Decay Model 227 8.5.2 Classical Model 228 8.6 dq-axes Rotation Between a Generator and the System 229 8.7 Power System Simulation using Detailed Machine Models 230 8.7.1 Power System Simulation Algorithm 231 8.8 Linearized Models 232 8.9 Summary and Notes 234 Problems 235 9 Excitation Systems 237 9.1 Introduction 237 9.2 Excitation System Models 238 9.3 Type DC Exciters 239 9.3.1 Separately Excited DC exciter 239 9.3.2 Self-Excited DC Exciter 243 9.3.3 Voltage Regulator 244 9.3.4 Initialization of DC Type Exciters 245 9.3.5 Transfer Function Analysis 246 9.3.6 Generator and Exciter Closed-Loop System 248 9.3.7 Excitation System Response Ratios 251 9.4 Type AC Exciters 252 9.5 Type ST Excitation Systems 254 9.6 Load Compensation Control 257 9.7 Protective Functions 259 9.8 Summary and Notes 259 Appendix 9.A Anti-Windup Limits 260 Problems 261 10 Power System Stabilizers 265 10.1 Introduction 265 10.2 Single-Machine Infinite-Bus System Model 266 10.3 Synchronizing and Damping Torques 271 10.3.1 ΔTe2 Under Constant Field Voltage 272 10.3.2 ΔTe2 With Excitation System Control 273 10.4 Power System Stabilizer Design using Rotor Speed Signal 275 10.4.1 PSS Design Requirements 276 10.4.2 PSS Control Blocks 277 10.4.3 PSS Design Methods 279 10.4.4 Torsional Filters 284 10.4.5 PSS Field Tuning 287 10.4.6 Interarea Mode Damping 287 10.5 Other PSS Input Signals 288 10.5.1 Generator Terminal Bus Frequency 288 10.5.2 Electrical Power Output ΔPe 288 10.6 Integral-of-Accelerating-Power or Dual-Input PSS 289 10.7 Summary and Notes 293 Problems 293 11 Load and Induction Motor Models 295 11.1 Introduction 295 11.2 Static Load Models 296 11.2.1 Exponential Load Model 296 11.2.2 Polynomial Load Model 297 11.3 Incorporating ZIP Load Models in Dynamic Simulation and Linear Analysis 298 11.4 Induction Motors: Steady-State Models 303 11.4.1 Physical Description 304 11.4.2 Mathematical Description 304 11.4.2.1 Modeling Equations 304 11.4.2.2 Reference Frame Transformation 306 11.4.3 Equivalent Circuits 308 11.4.4 Per-Unit Representation 310 11.4.5 Torque-Slip Characteristics 311 11.4.6 Reactive Power Consumption 313 11.4.7 Motor Startup 314 11.5 Induction Motors: Dynamic Models 315 11.5.1 Initialization 318 11.5.2 Reactive Power Requirement during Motor Stalling 320 11.6 Summary and Notes 323 Problems 324 12 Turbine-Governor Models and Frequency Control 327 12.1 Introduction 327 12.2 Steam Turbines 328 12.2.1 Turbine Configurations 328 12.2.2 Steam Turbine-Governors 331 12.3 Hydraulic Turbines 333 12.3.1 Hydraulic Turbine-Governors 337 12.3.2 Load Rejection of Hydraulic Turbines 338 12.4 Gas Turbines and Co-Generation Plants 339 12.5 Primary Frequency Control 342 12.5.1 Isolated Turbine-Generator Serving Local Load 343 12.5.2 Interconnected Units 347 12.5.3 Frequency Response in US Power Grids 349 12.6 Automatic Generation Control 351 12.7 Turbine-Generator Torsional Oscillations and Subsynchronous Resonance 356 12.7.1 Torsional Modes 356 12.7.2 Electrical Network Modes 363 12.7.3 SSR Occurrence and Countermeasures 365 12.8 Summary and Notes 366 Problems 367 Part III Advanced Power System Topics 371 13 High-Voltage Direct Current Transmission Systems 373 13.1 Introduction 373 13.1.1 HVDC System Installations and Applications 375 13.1.2 HVDC System Economics 377 13.2 AC/DC and DC/AC Conversion 377 13.2.1 AC-DC Conversion using Ideal Diodes 378 13.2.2 Three-Phase Full-Wave Bridge Converter 379 13.3 Line-Commutation Operation in HVDC Systems 383 13.3.1 Rectifier Operation 383 13.3.1.1 Thyristor Ignition Delay Angle 383 13.3.1.2 Commutation Overlap 385 13.3.2 Inverter Operation 388 13.3.3 Multiple Bridge Converters 389 13.3.4 Equivalent Circuit 389 13.4 Control Modes 391 13.4.1 Mode 1: Normal Operation 392 13.4.2 Mode 2: Reduced-Voltage Operation 393 13.4.3 Mode 3: Transitional Mode 394 13.4.4 System Operation Under Fault Conditions 396 13.4.5 Communication Requirements 396 13.5 Multi-terminal HVDC Systems 397 13.6 Harmonics and Reactive Power Requirement 398 13.6.1 Harmonic Filters 398 13.6.2 Reactive Power Support 399 13.7 AC-DC Power Flow Computation 401 13.8 Dynamic Models 406 13.8.1 Converter Control 406 13.8.2 DC Line Dynamics 408 13.8.3 AC-DC Network Solution 409 13.9 Damping Control Design 411 13.10 Summary and Notes 416 Problems 416 14 Flexible AC Transmission Systems 421 14.1 Introduction 421 14.2 Static Var Compensator 422 14.2.1 Circuit Configuration and Thyristor Switching 422 14.2.2 Steady-State Voltage Regulation and Stability Enhancement 423 14.2.2.1 Voltage Stability Enhancement 424 14.2.2.2 Transient Stability Enhancement 427 14.2.3 Dynamic Voltage Control and Droop Regulation 429 14.2.4 Dynamic Simulation 433 14.2.5 Damping Control Design using SVC 435 14.3 Thyristor-Controlled Series Compensator 441 14.3.1 Fixed Series Compensation 442 14.3.2 TCSC Circuit Configuration and Switching 442 14.3.3 Voltage Reversal Control 444 14.3.4 Mitigation of Subsynchronous Oscillations 445 14.3.5 Dynamic Model and Damping Control Design 446 14.4 Shunt VSC Controllers 451 14.4.1 Voltage-Sourced Converters 451 14.4.1.1 Three-Phase Full-Wave VSCs 453 14.4.1.2 Three-Level Converters 455 14.4.1.3 Harmonics 455 14.4.2 Static Compensator 458 14.4.2.1 Steady-State Analysis 458 14.4.2.2 Dynamic Model 459 14.4.3 VSC HVDC Systems 463 14.4.3.1 Steady-State Operation 463 14.4.3.2 Dynamic Model 466 14.5 Series and Coupled VSC Controllers 469 14.5.1 Static Synchronous Series Compensation 469 14.5.1.1 Steady-State Analysis 469 14.5.2 Unified Power Flow Controller 471 14.5.2.1 Steady-State Analysis 471 14.5.3 Interline Power Flow Controller 475 14.5.3.1 Steady-State Analysis 475 14.5.4 Dynamic Model 478 14.5.4.1 Series Voltage Insertion 479 14.5.4.2 Line Active and Reactive Power Flow Control 480 14.6 Summary and Notes 480 Problems 481 15 Wind Power Generation and Modeling 487 15.1 Background 487 15.2 Wind Turbine Components 489 15.3 Wind Power 491 15.3.1 Blade Angle Orientation 492 15.3.2 Power Coefficient 494 15.4 Wind Turbine Types 496 15.4.1 Type 1 496 15.4.2 Type 2 497 15.4.3 Type 3 498 15.4.4 Type 4 498 15.5 Steady-State Characteristics 499 15.5.1 Type-1Wind Turbine 499 15.5.2 Type-2Wind Turbine 501 15.5.3 Type-3Wind Turbine 502 15.6 Wind Power Plant Representation 505 15.7 Overall Control Criteria for Variable-Speed Wind Turbines 510 15.8 Wind Turbine Model for Transient Stability Planning Studies 513 15.8.1 Overall Model Structure 513 15.8.2 Generator/Converter Model 514 15.8.3 Electrical Control Model 515 15.8.4 Drive-Train Model 517 15.8.5 Torque Control Model 519 15.8.6 Aerodynamic Model 520 15.8.7 Pitch Controller 522 15.9 Plant-Level Control Model 526 15.9.1 Simulation Example 526 15.10 Summary and Notes 527 Problems 528 16 Power System Coherency and Model Reduction 531 16.1 Introduction 531 16.2 Interarea Oscillations and Slow Coherency 532 16.2.1 Slow Coherency 534 16.2.2 Slow Coherent Areas 536 16.2.3 Finding Coherent Groups of Machines 541 16.3 Generator Aggregation and Network Reduction 544 16.3.1 Generator Aggregation 545 16.3.2 Dynamic Aggregation 548 16.3.3 Load Bus Elimination 551 16.4 Simulation Studies 555 16.4.1 Singular Perturbations Method 556 16.5 Linear Reduced Model Methods 557 16.5.1 Modal Truncation 558 16.5.2 Balanced Model Reduction Method 559 16.6 Dynamic Model Reduction Software 559 16.7 Summary and Notes 560 Problems 560 References 563 Index 577
£95.36
John Wiley & Sons Inc Energy Storage
Book SynopsisENERGY STORAGE Written and edited by a team of well-known and respected experts in the field, this new volume on energy storage presents the state-of-the-art developments and challenges in the field of renewable energy systems for sustainability and scalability for engineers, researchers, academicians, industry professionals, consultants, and designers. The world's energy landscape is very complex. Fossil fuels, especially because of hydraulic fracturing, are still a mainstay of global energy production, but renewable energy sources, such as wind, solar, and others, are increasing in importance for global energy sustainability. Experts and non-experts agree that the next game-changer in this area will be energy storage. Energy storage is crucial for continuous operation of power plants and can supplement basic power generation sources over a stand-alone system. It can enhance capacity and leads to greater security, including continuous electricity supply and other applications. A depenTable of ContentsList of Contributors xi Preface xiii 1 Thermal Energy Storage Systems for Concentrating Solar Power Plants 1 Dr. Pratibha Biswal 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 Concentrating Solar Power (CSP) Technology 2 1.2.1 CSP Receiver Concepts 4 1.2.1.1 Parabolic Trough System 4 1.2.1.2 Linear Fresnel Reflector Systems 5 1.2.1.3 Central Receiver Plants 6 1.2.1.4 Dish System 7 1.3 Thermal Energy Storage in CSP 7 1.3.1 Active Two-Tank System 9 1.3.1.1 Active Two-Tank Direct 9 1.3.2 Active Single-Tank Thermocline 20 1.3.3 Other TES Systems 21 1.3.3.1 Packed-Bed Storage System 21 1.3.3.2 Passive Thermal Storage System 22 1.3.4 Types of Thermal Energy Storage (TES) 22 1.3.4.1 Sensible Energy Storage 22 1.3.4.2 Latent Heat Storage 24 1.3.4.3 Thermochemical Energy Storage 25 1.4 Corrosion Problem in TES-CSP System 26 1.5 Conclusion 26 References 27 2 Solar Thermal Power Plant with Thermal Energy Storage 31 Anil Kumar, Umakanta Sahoo and BK Jayasimha Rathod 2.1 Introduction 32 2.2 Literature Review 39 2.2.1 Power Installed Capacity of India 39 2.2.2 Energy Storage Systems 40 2.2.3 Thermal Storage Systems 40 2.3 Energy Demand of World 44 2.4 Experimental Set Up 48 2.4.1 Description of Experimental Set Ups 49 2.5 Experimental Data Analysis, Results and Discussions 55 2.5.1 Performance of Reflector Round the Year (Experimental Set up I) 58 2.5.1.1 Simulation Results 63 2.5.1.2 Typical PID of a Solar Module from ‘India One’ Solar Power Plant 66 2.5.1.3 Quantity of Steam to Turbine 67 2.6 Experimental Data Analysis, Results and Discussions 69 2.7 Conclusions 75 Symbols 76 Acknowledgement 77 References 77 3 Efficient Energy Storage Systems for Wind Power Application 81 Pradeep Kumar Sahu, Satyaranjan Jena and Umakanta Sahoo 3.1 Introduction 82 3.2 Energy Storage Devices 84 3.2.1 Electrical Energy Storage 84 3.2.1.1 Superconducting Magnetic Energy Storage (SMES) 85 3.2.1.2 Supercapacitors 86 3.2.2 Mechanical Energy Storage 87 3.2.2.1 Flywheel Energy Storage (FES) 87 3.2.2.2 Pumped Hydroelectric Storage (PHS) 88 3.2.2.3 Compressed Air Energy Storage 89 3.2.3 Chemical Energy Storage 89 3.2.3.1 Battery Storage System (BSS) 90 3.2.3.2 Fuel Cells 90 3.2.3.3 Solar Fuel 90 3.2.4 Thermal Energy Storage 93 3.3 Hybrid Energy Storage System (HESS) 93 3.4 Power Converter Topologies for Hybrid Energy Storage 95 3.4.1 Passive Topology 95 3.4.2 Semi-Active Topology 97 3.4.3 Active Topology 97 3.4.4 Comparison of Different Topologies 98 3.5 HESS Energy Management and Control 99 3.5.1 HESS Control Schemes 99 3.5.1.1 Classical Control Scheme 100 3.5.1.2 Intelligent Control Schemes 102 3.5.2 Comparison of Different Control Schemes 103 3.6 Applications of the Storage Technologies in Wind Power 104 3.6.1 Power Fluctuation Mitigation 104 3.6.2 Low Voltage Ride Through (LVRT) 105 3.6.3 Voltage Control Support 105 3.6.4 Oscillation Damping 106 3.6.5 Peak Shaving 106 3.6.6 Spinning Reserve 107 3.6.7 Time Shifting 108 3.6.8 Transmission Line Curtailment 108 3.6.9 Load Following 109 3.6.10 Unit Commitment 110 3.7 Conclusion 110 References 112 4 Advances in Electrochemical Energy Storage Device: Supercapacitor 119 Swagatika Kamila, Bikash Kumar Jena and Suddhasatwa Basu 4.1 Introduction 120 4.2 Types of Energy Storage Devices 120 4.3 Overview of Supercapacitor and Its Global Scenario 122 4.4 Status of Supercapacitor in India 125 4.5 Types of Supercapacitor According to the Energy Storage Mechanism 126 4.5.1 Electrical Double-Layer Capacitor (EDLC) 126 4.5.2 Pseudocapacitor 128 4.5.3 Hybrid Supercapacitor 129 4.5.3.1 Composite Supercapacitor 129 4.5.3.2 Asymmetric Supercapacitor 130 4.5.3.3 Battery Type 130 4.6 Basic Components of Supercapacitor 130 4.6.1 Current Collector 130 4.6.2 Electrode Materials 131 4.6.2.1 EDLC Materials 131 4.6.2.2 Pseudocapacitive Materials 132 4.6.3 Electrolytes 138 4.6.4 Binders 138 4.6.5 Separators 139 4.7 Conclusion 140 References 140 5 Thermal Energy Storage Systems for Cooling and Heating Applications 149 Pankaj Kalita, Debangsu Kashyap and Urbashi Bordoloi 5.1 Introduction 150 5.2 Classification of Storage Systems 151 5.3 Sensible Heat Storage 151 5.3.1 Water-Based Storage 153 5.3.2 Packed Beds 156 5.3.3 Aquifers 158 5.3.4 Borehole 160 5.4 Latent Heat Storage 163 5.4.1 Enhancement Methods for Thermal Conductivity Enhancement 164 5.4.1.1 Macro and Microencapsulation 165 5.4.1.2 Addition of Fins 166 5.4.1.3 Multiple PCM Technology 167 5.4.1.4 Immersion Through Material Pores 167 5.5 Thermochemical Heat Storage 168 5.5.1 Absorption Cycle 172 5.5.2 Adsorption Cycles 173 5.5.3 Chemical Reaction 174 5.6 Application of Thermal Energy Storage Systems 176 5.6.1 Absorption Refrigeration System 176 5.6.2 Solar Pumps Application in Space Cooling/Heating 177 5.6.3 Solar Pond Integrated Packed-Bed TES System for Space Heating 178 5.6.4 Solar FPC 179 5.6.5 Solar PV/T 181 5.6.6 Solar Air Heater 183 5.7 Design Problems 184 5.8 Conclusion 196 References 196 6 Optimistic Technological Approaches for Sustainable Energy Storage Devices/Materials 201 Benjamin Raj, Arya Das, Suddhasatwa Basu and Mamata Mohapatra 6.1 Introduction 202 6.2 Advancements in Supercapacitor Technology 202 6.2.1 The Current Global Supercapacitor Market 205 6.2.2 Challenges: From Lab to Market 207 6.2.3 Current Trends and Opportunities 209 6.2.4 Composites and Novel Architectures 209 6.2.5 Microsupercapacitors 210 6.2.6 Hybrid Supercapacitors 211 6.2.7 Flexible, Wearable and Smart Supercapacitors 211 6.3 Advancements in Battery Technology 212 6.3.1 Challenges 213 6.3.2 Nickel-Cadmium Batteries 213 6.3.3 Nickel-Metal Hydride Batteries 214 6.3.4 Lead Storage Battery 214 6.3.5 Sodium Sulphur Battery 215 6.3.6 Flow Batteries 217 6.3.7 Lithium Ion Batteries (LIBs) 218 6.4 Conclusion and Outlook 221 References 222 7 Electro-Chemical Battery Energy Storage Systems - A Comprehensive Overview 229 Nikhil P G and G Sivaramakrishnan 7.1 Introduction 229 7.2 Electro-Chemical Storage Devices 231 7.2.1 Definition and Types 231 7.2.2 Energy Storage Landscape and Benefits of Electro-Chemical Storage 235 7.2.3 Drivers and Barriers in Implementation of Energy Storage Systems 240 7.3 Design and Performance Parameters for Electro-Chemical Storage 240 7.3.1 Design Basis for Large Storage Application 240 7.4 Case Study From Industry 243 7.5 Best Practices in Battery Maintenance 245 7.6 End of Life Cycle of Batteries 247 7.6.1 Major Recyclable Products from the Process 248 7.6.2 Disposal Measures 248 7.7 India Energy Storage Mission 249 7.8 Conclusion 251 References 251 8 Simulation of Charging and Discharging a Thermal Energy Storage System Involving Phase Change Material 253 S. Sanyal, A. Borgohain and S.P. Gupta 8.1 Introduction 253 8.2 Design of Latent Heat Storage (LHS) System 256 8.2.1 Identification of Suitable PCM 256 8.2.2 Design of Heat Exchanger 260 8.2.3 Performance Evaluation 261 8.3 Analysis of Phase Change Systems 261 8.4 Simulation 263 8.4.1 Equations Involved 263 8.4.2 Modelling 265 8.4.3 Transient Analysis 269 8.5 Results and Discussion 269 8.5.1 Scalability of Mesh 269 8.5.2 Melting 270 8.5.3 Solidification 271 8.5.4 Performance 273 8.6 Conclusion 274 Acknowledgement 274 Abbreviation 275 References 275 Index 277
£168.26
John Wiley & Sons Inc Algorithms for Communications Systems and their
Book SynopsisThe definitive guide to problem-solving in the design of communications systems In Algorithms for Communications Systems and their Applications, 2nd Edition, authors Benvenuto, Cherubini, and Tomasin have delivered the ultimate and practical guide to applying algorithms in communications systems. Written for researchers and professionals in the areas of digital communications, signal processing, and computer engineering, Algorithms for Communications Systems presents algorithmic and computational procedures within communications systems that overcome a wide range of problems facing system designers. New material in this fully updated edition includes: MIMO systems (Space-time block coding/Spatial multiplexing /Beamforming and interference management/Channel Estimation) OFDM and SC-FDMA (Synchronization/Resource allocation (bit and power loading)/Filtered OFDM) Improved radio channel model (Doppler and shadowing/mmWave) PTable of ContentsPreface 3 Acknowledgments 3 1 Elements of signal theory 7 1.1 Continuous-time linear systems 7 1.2 Discrete-time linear systems 10 Discrete Fourier transform 13 The DFT operator 14 Circular and linear convolution via DFT 15 Convolution by the overlap-save method 17 IIR and FIR filters 19 1.3 Signal bandwidth 22 The sampling theorem 24 Heaviside conditions for the absence of signal distortion 26 1.4 Passband signals and systems 26 Complex representation 26 Relation between a signal and its complex representation 28 Baseband equivalent of a transformation 36 Envelope and instantaneous phase and frequency 37 1.5 Second-order analysis of random processes 38 1.5.1 Correlation 39 Properties of the autocorrelation function 40 1.5.2 Power spectral density 40 Spectral lines in the PSD 40 Cross power spectral density 42 Properties of the PSD 42 PSD through filtering 43 1.5.3 PSD of discrete-time random processes 43 Spectral lines in the PSD 44 PSD through filtering 45 Minimum-phase spectral factorization 46 1.5.4 PSD of passband processes 47 PSD of in-phase and quadrature components 47 Cyclostationary processes 50 1.6 The autocorrelation matrix 56 Properties 56 Eigenvalues 56 Other properties 57 Eigenvalue analysis for Hermitian matrices 58 1.7 Examples of random processes 60 1.8 Matched filter 66 White noise case 68 1.9 Ergodic random processes 69 1.9.1 Mean value estimators 71 Rectangular window 74 Exponential filter 74 General window 75 1.9.2 Correlation estimators 75 Unbiased estimate 76 Biased estimate 76 1.9.3 Power spectral density estimators 77 Periodogram or instantaneous spectrum 77 Welch periodogram 78 Blackman and Tukey correlogram 79 Windowing and window closing 79 1.10 Parametric models of random processes 82 ARMA 82 MA 84 AR 84 Spectral factorization of AR models 87 Whitening filter 87 Relation between ARMA, MA, and AR models 87 1.10.1 Autocorrelation of AR processes 89 1.10.2 Spectral estimation of an AR process 91 Some useful relations 92 AR model of sinusoidal processes 94 1.11 Guide to the bibliography 95 Bibliography 95 Appendixes 97 1.A Multirate systems 98 1.A.1 Fundamentals 98 1.A.2 Decimation 100 1.A.3 Interpolation 102 1.A.4 Decimator filter 104 1.A.5 Interpolator filter 105 1.A.6 Rate conversion 108 1.A.7 Time interpolation 109 Linear interpolation 110 Quadratic interpolation 112 1.A.8 The noble identities 112 1.A.9 The polyphase representation 113 Efficient implementations 114 1.B Generation of a complex Gaussian noise 121 1.C Pseudo-noise sequences 122 Maximal-length 122 CAZAC 124 Gold 125 2 The Wiener filter 129 2.1 The Wiener filter 129 Matrix formulation 130 Optimum filter design 132 The principle of orthogonality 134 Expression of the minimum mean-square error 135 Characterization of the cost function surface 136 The Wiener filter in the z-domain 137 2.2 Linear prediction 140 Forward linear predictor 141 Optimum predictor coefficients 141 Forward prediction error filter 142 Relation between linear prediction and AR models 143 First and second order solutions 144 2.3 The least squares method 145 Data windowing 146 Matrix formulation 146 Correlation matrix 147 Determination of the optimum filter coefficients 147 2.3.1 The principle of orthogonality 148 Minimum cost function 149 The normal equation using the data matrix 149 Geometric interpretation: the projection operator 150 2.3.2 Solutions to the LS problem 151 Singular value decomposition 152 Minimum norm solution 154 2.4 The estimation problem 155 Estimation of a random variable 155 MMSE estimation 155 Extension to multiple observations 157 Linear MMSE estimation of a random variable 158 Linear MMSE estimation of a random vector 158 2.4.1 The Cramér-Rao lower bound 160 Extension to vector parameter 162 2.5 Examples of application 164 2.5.1 Identification of a linear discrete-time system 164 2.5.2 Identification of a continuous-time system 166 2.5.3 Cancellation of an interfering signal 169 2.5.4 Cancellation of a sinusoidal interferer with known frequency 170 2.5.5 Echo cancellation in digital subscriber loops 171 2.5.6 Cancellation of a periodic interferer 172 Bibliography 173 Appendixes 174 2.A The Levinson-Durbin algorithm 175 Lattice filters 176 The Delsarte-Genin algorithm 177 3 Adaptive transversal filters 179 3.1 The MSE design criterion 180 3.1.1 The steepest descent or gradient algorithm 181 Stability 181 Conditions for convergence 183 Adaptation gain 184 Transient behaviour of the MSE 185 3.1.2 The least mean square algorithm 186 Implementation 187 Computational complexity 188 Conditions for convergence 188 3.1.3 Convergence analysis of the LMS algorithm 190 Convergence of the mean 191 Convergence in the mean-square sense: real scalar case 192 Convergence in the mean-square sense: general case 193 Fundamental results 196 Observations 197 Final remarks 199 3.1.4 Other versions of the LMS algorithm 199 Leaky LMS 199 Sign algorithm 200 Normalized LMS 200 Variable adaptation gain 201 3.1.5 Example of application: the predictor 202 3.2 The recursive least squares algorithm 208 Normal equation 209 Derivation 210 Initialization 212 Recursive form of the minimum cost function 212 Convergence 214 Computational complexity 214 Example of application: the predictor 215 3.3 Fast recursive algorithms 215 3.3.1 Comparison of the various algorithms 216 3.4 Examples of application 216 3.4.1 Identification of a linear discrete-time system 217 Finite alphabet case 219 3.4.2 Cancellation of a sinusoidal interferer with known frequency 220 Bibliography 221 4 Transmission channels 223 4.1 Radio channel 223 4.1.1 Propagation and used frequencies in radio transmission 224 Basic propagation mechanisms 224 Frequency ranges 224 4.1.2 Analog front-end architectures 226 Radiation masks 226 Conventional superheterodyne receiver 227 Alternative architectures 227 Direct conversion receiver 228 Single conversion to low-IF 229 Double conversion and wideband IF 229 4.1.3 General channel model 230 High power amplifier 230 Transmission medium 233 Additive noise 234 Phase noise 234 4.1.4 Narrowband radio channel model 235 Equivalent circuit at the receiver 237 Multipath 238 Path loss as a function of distance 240 4.1.5 Fading effects in propagation models 243 Macroscopic fading or shadowing 243 Microscopic fading 245 4.1.6 Doppler shift 245 4.1.7 Wideband channel model 247 Multipath channel parameters 249 Statistical description of fading channels 250 4.1.8 Channel statistics 252 Power delay profile 252 Coherence bandwidth 253 Doppler spectrum 254 Coherence time 255 Doppler spectrum models 256 Power angular spectrum 256 Coherence distance 256 On fading 257 4.1.9 Discrete-time model for fading channels 258 Generation of a process with a preassigned spectrum 259 4.1.10 Discrete-space model of shadowing 261 4.1.11 Multiantenna systems 264 Discrete-time model 266 4.2 Telephone channel 268 Distortion 270 Noise sources 270 Echo 270 Appendixes 272 4.A Discrete-time NB model for mmWave channels 273 Angular domain representation 273 Bibliography 274 5 Vector quantization 277 5.1 Basic concept 277 5.2 Characterization of VQ 278 Parameters determining VQ performance 278 Comparison between VQ and scalar quantization 280 5.3 Optimum quantization 281 Generalized Lloyd algorithm 282 5.4 The Linde, Buzo, and Gray algorithm 284 Choice of the initial codebook 285 Splitting procedure 286 Selection of the training sequence 287 5.4.1 k-means clustering 288 5.5 Variants of VQ 288 Tree search VQ 288 Multistage VQ 289 Product code VQ 291 5.6 VQ of channel state information 292 MISO channel quantization 292 Channel feedback with feedforward information 294 5.7 Principal component analysis 295 5.7.1 PCA and k-means clustering 297 Bibliography 299 6 Digital transmission model and channel capacity 301 6.1 Digital transmission model 301 6.2 Detection 305 6.2.1 Optimum detection 306 ML 307 MAP 307 6.2.2 Soft detection 309 LLRs associated to bits of BMAP 309 Simplified expressions 312 6.2.3 Receiver strategies 314 6.3 Relevant parameters of the digital transmission model 314 Relations among parameters 315 6.4 Error probability 317 6.5 Capacity 320 6.5.1 Discrete-time AWGN channel 321 6.5.2 SISO narrowband AWGN channel 322 6.5.3 SISO dispersive AGN channel 322 6.5.4 MIMO discrete-time NB AWGN channel 325 6.6 Achievable rates of modulations in AWGN channels 326 6.6.1 Rate as a function of the SNR per dimension 327 6.6.2 Coding strategies depending on the signal-to-noise ratio 329 Coding gain 330 6.6.3 Achievable rate of an AWGN channel using PAM 331 Bibliography 333 Appendixes 334 6.A Gray labelling 335 6.B The Gaussian distribution and Marcum functions 336 6.B.1 The Q function 336 6.B.2 Marcum function 338 7 Single-carrier modulation 341 7.1 Signals and systems 341 7.1.1 Baseband digital transmission (PAM) 341 Modulator 342 Transmission channel 343 Receiver 343 Power spectral density 344 7.1.2 Passband digital transmission (QAM) 346 Modulator 346 Power spectral density 347 Three equivalent representations of the modulator 348 Coherent receiver 349 7.1.3 Baseband equivalent model of a QAM system 349 Signal analysis 349 7.1.4 Characterization of system elements 353 Transmitter 353 Transmission channel 354 Receiver 355 7.2 Intersymbol interference 356 Discrete-time equivalent system 356 Nyquist pulses 357 Eye diagram 361 7.3 Performance analysis 365 Signal-to-noise ratio 365 Symbol error probability in the absence of ISI 366 Matched filter receiver 367 7.4 Channel equalization 367 7.4.1 Zero-forcing equalizer 367 7.4.2 Linear equalizer 368 Optimum receiver in the presence of noise and ISI 369 Alternative derivation of the IIR equalizer 370 Signal-to-noise ratio at detector 374 7.4.3 LE with a finite number of coefficients 375 Adaptive LE 376 Fractionally spaced equalizer 378 7.4.4 Decision feedback equalizer 381 Design of a DFE with a finite number of coefficients 384 Design of a fractionally spaced DFE 387 Signal-to-noise ratio at the decision point 389 Remarks 390 7.4.5 Frequency domain equalization 390 DFE with data frame using a unique word 390 7.4.6 LE-ZF 394 7.4.7 DFE-ZF with IIR filters 394 DFE-ZF as noise predictor 400 DFE as ISI and noise predictor 400 7.4.8 Benchmark performance of LE-ZF and DFE-ZF 402 Comparison 402 Performance for two channel models 403 7.4.9 Passband equalizers 404 Passband receiver structure 405 Optimization of equalizer coefficients and carrier phase offset 407 Adaptive method 408 7.5 Optimum methods for data detection 410 7.5.1 Maximum-likelihood sequence detection 412 Lower bound to error probability using MLSD 413 The Viterbi algorithm 414 Computational complexity of the VA 419 7.5.2 Maximum a posteriori probability detector 419 Statistical description of a sequential machine 420 The forward-backward algorithm 421 Scaling 425 The log likelihood function and the Max-Log-MAP criterion 426 LLRs associated to bits of BMAP 427 Relation between Max-Log-MAP and Log-MAP 428 7.5.3 Optimum receivers 428 7.5.4 The Ungerboeck’s formulation of MLSD 430 7.5.5 Error probability achieved by MLSD 433 Computation of the minimum distance 437 7.5.6 The reduced-state sequence detection 441 Trellis diagram 442 The RSSE algorithm 444 Further simplification: DFSE 446 7.6 Numerical results obtained by simulations 447 QPSK over a minimum-phase channel 447 QPSK over a non minimum phase channel 448 8-PSK over a minimum phase channel 449 8-PSK over a non minimum phase channel 449 7.7 Precoding for dispersive channels 451 7.7.1 Tomlinson-Harashima precoding 452 7.7.2 Flexible precoding 454 7.8 Channel estimation 456 7.8.1 The correlation method 456 7.8.2 The LS method 458 Formulation using the data matrix 459 7.8.3 Signal-to-estimation error ratio 460 7.8.4 Channel estimation for multirate systems 464 7.8.5 The LMMSE method 465 7.9 Faster-than-Nyquist Signalling 467 Bibliography 467 Appendixes 470 7.A Simulation of a QAM system 471 7.B Description of a finite-state machine 477 7.C Line codes for PAM systems 478 7.C.1 Line codes 478 Non-return-to-zero format 478 Return-to-zero format 479 Biphase format 480 Delay modulation or Miller code 481 Block line codes 481 Alternate mark inversion 481 7.C.2 Partial response systems 482 The choice of the PR polynomial 485 Symbol detection and error probability 489 Precoding 491 Error probability with precoding 492 Alternative interpretation of PR systems 493 7.D Implementation of a QAM transmitter 497 8 Multicarrier modulation 499 8.1 MC systems 499 8.2 Orthogonality conditions 500 Time domain 501 Frequency domain 501 z-transform domain 501 8.3 Efficient implementation of MC systems 502 MC implementation employing matched filters 502 Orthogonality conditions in terms of the polyphase components 505 MC implementation employing a prototype filter 505 8.4 Non-critically sampled filter banks 510 8.5 Examples of MC systems 515 OFDM or DMT 515 Filtered multitone 516 8.6 Analog signal processing requirements in MC systems 517 8.6.1 Analog filter requirements 517 Interpolator filter and virtual subchannels 517 Modulator filter 519 8.6.2 Power amplifier requirements 520 8.7 Equalization 521 8.7.1 OFDM equalization 521 8.7.2 FMT equalization 524 Per-subchannel fractionally-spaced equalization 524 Per-subchannel T -spaced equalization 524 Alternative per-subchannel T -spaced equalization 525 8.8 Orthogonal time frequency space modulation 526 OTFS equalization 527 8.9 Channel estimation in OFDM 527 Instantaneous estimate or LS method 528 LMMSE 530 The LS estimate with truncated impulse response 531 8.9.1 Channel estimate and pilot symbols 532 8.10 Multiuser access schemes 532 8.10.1 OFDMA 533 8.10.2 SC-FDMA or DFT-spread OFDM 534 8.11 Comparison between MC and SC systems 535 8.12 Other MC waveforms 536 Bibliography 537 9 Transmission over multiple input multiple output channels 539 9.1 The MIMO NB channel 539 Spatial multiplexing and spatial diversity 544 Interference in MIMO channels 544 9.2 CSI only at the receiver 545 9.2.1 SIMO combiner 545 Equalization and diversity 548 9.2.2 MIMO combiner 548 Zero-forcing 549 MMSE 550 9.2.3 MIMO nonlinear detection and decoding 550 V-BLAST system 550 Spatial modulation 552 9.2.4 Space-time coding 553 The Alamouti code 553 The Golden code 555 9.2.5 MIMO channel estimation 556 The least squares method 556 The LMMSE method 557 9.3 CSI only at the transmitter 558 9.3.1 MISO linear precoding 558 MISO antenna selection 559 9.3.2 MIMO linear precoding 560 ZF precoding 561 9.3.3 MIMO nonlinear precoding 562 Dirty paper coding 562 TH precoding 564 9.3.4 Channel estimation for CSIT 564 9.4 CSI at both the transmitter and the receiver 565 9.5 Hybrid beamforming 566 Hybrid beamforming and angular domain representation 567 9.6 Multiuser MIMO: broadcast channel 568 9.6.1 CSI at both the transmitter and the receivers 569 Block diagonalization 570 User selection 571 Joint spatial division and multiplexing 572 9.6.2 Broadcast channel estimation 573 9.7 Multiuser MIMO: multiple-access channel 573 9.7.1 CSI at both the transmitters and the receiver 574 Block diagonalization 575 9.7.2 Multiple-access channel estimation 575 9.8 Massive MIMO 575 9.8.1 Channel hardening 576 9.8.2 Multiuser channel orthogonality 576 Bibliography 576 10 Spread-spectrum systems 581 10.1 Spread-spectrum techniques 581 10.1.1 Direct sequence systems 581 Classification of CDMA systems 589 Synchronization 590 10.1.2 Frequency hopping systems 590 Classification of FH systems 592 10.2 Applications of spread-spectrum systems 593 10.2.1 Anti-jamming 594 10.2.2 Multiple access 596 10.2.3 Interference rejection 597 10.3 Chip matched filter and rake receiver 597 Number of resolvable rays in a multipath channel 597 Chip matched filter 598 10.4 Interference 601 Detection strategies for multiple-access systems 603 10.5 Single-user detection 603 Chip equalizer 603 Symbol equalizer 605 10.6 Multiuser detection 606 10.6.1 Block equalizer 606 10.6.2 Interference cancellation detector 608 Successive interference cancellation 608 Parallel interference cancellation 610 10.6.3 ML multiuser detector 610 Correlation matrix 611 Whitening filter 611 10.7 Multicarrier CDMA systems 612 Bibliography 613 Appendixes 615 10.A Walsh codes 616 11 Channel codes 619 11.1 System model 620 11.2 Block codes 622 11.2.1 Theory of binary codes with group structure 622 Properties 622 Parity check matrix 625 Code generator matrix 628 Decoding of binary parity check codes 628 Cosets 629 Two conceptually simple decoding methods 630 Syndrome decoding 631 11.2.2 Fundamentals of algebra 633 modulo-q arithmetic 634 Polynomials with coefficients from a field 637 Modular arithmetic for polynomials 638 Devices to sum and multiply elements in a finite field 640 Remarks on finite fields 642 Roots of a polynomial 646 Minimum function 648 Methods to determine the minimum function 650 Properties of the minimum function 652 11.2.3 Cyclic codes 653 The algebra of cyclic codes 653 Properties of cyclic codes 654 Encoding by a shift register of length r 658 Encoding by a shift register of length k 661 Hard decoding of cyclic codes 662 Hamming codes 663 Burst error detection 666 11.2.4 Simplex cyclic codes 666 Relation to PN sequences 668 11.2.5 BCH codes 669 An alternative method to specify the code polynomials 669 Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenhemcodes 671 Binary BCH codes 674 Reed-Solomon codes 675 Decoding of BCH codes 676 Efficient decoding of BCH codes 681 11.2.6 Performance of block codes 689 11.3 Convolutional codes 690 11.3.1 General description of convolutional codes 693 Parity check matrix 695 Generator matrix 696 Transfer function 696 Catastrophic error propagation 700 11.3.2 Decoding of convolutional codes 702 Interleaving 702 Two decoding models 703 Decoding by the Viterbi algorithm 704 Decoding by the forward-backward algorithm 705 Sequential decoding 706 11.3.3 Performance of convolutional codes 710 11.4 Puncturing 711 11.5 Concatenated codes 711 The soft-output Viterbi algorithm 711 11.6 Turbo codes 713 Encoding 713 The basic principle of iterative decoding 718 FBA revisited 719 Iterative decoding 728 Performance evaluation 730 11.7 Iterative detection and decoding 730 11.8 Low-density parity check codes 734 11.8.1 Representation of LDPC codes 735 Matrix representation 735 Graphical representation 736 11.8.2 Encoding 737 Encoding procedure 737 11.8.3 Decoding 738 Hard decision decoder 738 The sum-product algorithm decoder 741 The LR-SPA decoder 744 The LLR-SPA or log-domain SPA decoder 745 The min-sum decoder 747 Other decoding algorithms 748 11.8.4 Example of application 748 Performance and coding gain 748 11.8.5 Comparison with turbo codes 749 11.9 Polar codes 751 11.9.1 Encoding 752 Internal CRC 753 LLRs associated to code bits 754 11.9.2 Tanner graph 755 11.9.3 Decoding algorithms 757 Successive cancellation decoding - the principle 758 Successive cancellation decoding - the algorithm 760 Successive cancellation list decoding 763 Other decoding algorithms 765 11.9.4 Frozen set design 765 Genie-aided SC decoding 766 Design based on density evolution 767 Channel polarisation 770 11.9.5 Puncturing and shortening 770 Puncturing 771 Shortening 772 Frozen set design 774 11.9.6 Performance 774 11.10Milestones in channel coding 775 Bibliography 775 Appendixes 781 11.A Nonbinary parity check codes 782 Linear codes 783 Parity check matrix 784 Code generator matrix 785 Decoding of nonbinary parity check codes 786 Coset 786 Two conceptually simple decoding methods 787 Syndrome decoding 787 12 Trellis coded modulation 789 12.1 Linear TCM for one and two-dimensional signal sets 790 12.1.1 Fundamental elements 790 Basic TCM scheme 792 Example 792 12.1.2 Set partitioning 795 12.1.3 Lattices 797 12.1.4 Assignment of symbols to the transitions in the trellis 802 12.1.5 General structure of the encoder/bit-mapper 807 Computation of dfree 809 12.2 Multidimensional TCM 811 Encoding 812 Decoding 815 12.3 Rotationally invariant TCM schemes 817 Bibliography 817 13 Techniques to achieve capacity 819 13.1 Capacity achieving solutions for multicarrier systems 819 13.1.1 Achievable bit rate of OFDM 819 13.1.2 Waterfilling solution 820 Iterative solution 821 13.1.3 Achievable rate under practical constraints 821 Effective SNR and system margin in MC systems 822 Uniform power allocation and minimum rate per subchannel 823 13.1.4 The bit and power loading problem revisited 824 Transmission modes 824 Problem formulation 825 Some simplifying assumptions 826 On loading algorithms 826 The Hughes-Hartogs algorithm 827 The Krongold-Ramchandran Jones algorithm 827 The Chow-Cioffi Bingham algorithm 830 Comparison 832 13.2 Capacity achieving solutions for single carrier systems 833 Achieving capacity 837 Bibliography 838 14 Synchronization 839 14.1 The problem of synchronization for QAM systems 839 14.2 The phase-locked loop 841 14.2.1 PLL baseband model 843 Linear approximation 844 14.2.2 Analysis of the PLL in the presence of additive noise 846 Noise analysis using the linearity assumption 847 14.2.3 Analysis of a second order PLL 848 14.3 Costas loop 852 14.3.1 PAM signals 852 14.3.2 QAM signals 854 14.4 The optimum receiver 856 Timing recovery 858 Carrier phase recovery 862 14.5 Algorithms for timing and carrier phase recovery 863 14.5.1 ML criterion 863 Assumption of slow time varying channel 863 14.5.2 Taxonomy of algorithms using the ML criterion 863 Feedback estimators 865 Early-late estimators 866 14.5.3 Timing estimators 867 Non data aided 867 NDA synchronization via spectral estimation 869 Data aided and data directed 871 Data and phase directed with feedback: differentiator scheme 874 Data and phase directed with feedback: Mueller & Muller scheme 874 Non data aided with feedback 877 14.5.4 Phasor estimators 878 Data and timing directed 878 Non data aided forM-PSK signals 878 Data and timing directed with feedback 879 14.6 Algorithms for carrier frequency recovery 880 14.6.1 Frequency offset estimators 881 Non data aided 881 Non data aided and timing independent with feedback 882 Non data aided and timing directed with feedback 883 14.6.2 Estimators operating at the modulation rate 883 Data aided and data directed 884 Non data aided forM-PSK 885 14.7 Second-order digital PLL 885 14.8 Synchronization in spread-spectrum systems 885 14.8.1 The transmission system 885 Transmitter 885 Optimum receiver 886 14.8.2 Timing estimators with feedback 887 Non data aided: non coherent DLL 888 Non data aided modified code tracking loop 888 Data and phase directed: coherent DLL 891 14.9 Synchronization in OFDM 891 14.9.1 Frame synchronization 891 Effects of STO 891 Schmidl and Cox algorithm 893 14.9.2 Carrier frequency synchronization 894 Estimator performance 895 Other synchronization solutions 895 14.10Synchronization in SC-FDMA 896 Bibliography 899 15 Self-training equalization 901 15.1 Problem definition and fundamentals 901 Minimization of a special function 904 15.2 Three algorithms for PAM systems 908 The Sato algorithm 908 Benveniste-Goursat algorithm 909 Stop-and-go algorithm 909 Remarks 910 15.3 The contour algorithm for PAM systems 910 Simplified realization of the contour algorithm 912 15.4 Self-training equalization for partial response systems 913 The Sato algorithm 914 The contour algorithm 915 15.5 Self-training equalization for QAM systems 917 The Sato algorithm 918 15.5.1 Constant-modulus algorithm 919 The contour algorithm 921 Joint contour algorithm and carrier phase tracking 922 15.6 Examples of applications 924 Bibliography 928 Appendixes 930 15.A On the convergence of the contour algorithm 931 16 Low-complexity demodulators 933 16.1 Phase-shift keying 933 16.1.1 Differential PSK 935 Error probability ofM-DPSK 936 16.1.2 Differential encoding and coherent demodulation 937 Differentially encoded BPSK 937 Multilevel case 938 16.2 (D)PSK non-coherent receivers 940 16.2.1 Baseband differential detector 940 16.2.2 IF-band (1 Bit) differential detector 942 Signal at detection point 944 16.2.3 FM discriminator with integrate and dump filter 945 16.3 Optimum receivers for signals with random phase 946 ML criterion 948 Implementation of a non coherentML receiver 951 Error probability for a non coherent binary FSK system 953 Performance comparison of binary systems 956 16.4 Frequency-based modulations 957 16.4.1 Frequency shift keying 957 Coherent demodulator 959 Non coherent demodulator 959 Limiter-discriminator FM demodulator 961 16.4.2 Minimum-shift keying 961 Power spectral density of CPFSK 963 Performance 963 MSK with differential precoding 967 16.4.3 Remarks on spectral containment 968 16.5 Gaussian MSK 968 PSD of GMSK 972 16.5.1 Implementation of a GMSK scheme 973 Configuration I 973 Configuration II 974 Configuration III 975 16.5.2 Linear approximation of a GMSK signal 977 Performance of GMSK 978 Performance in the presence of multipath 983 Bibliography 985 Appendixes 985 16.A Continuous phase modulation 986 Alternative definition of CPM 986 Advantages of CPM 988 17 Applications of interference cancellation 989 17.1 Echo and near–end crosstalk cancellation for PAM systems 990 Crosstalk cancellation and full duplex transmission 991 Polyphase structure of the canceller 992 Canceller at symbol rate 993 Adaptive canceller 994 Canceller structure with distributed arithmetic 995 17.2 Echo cancellation for QAM systems 998 17.3 Echo cancellation for OFDM systems 1001 17.4 Multiuser detection for VDSL 1004 17.4.1 Upstream power back-off 1009 17.4.2 Comparison of PBO methods 1011 Bibliography 1014 18 Examples of communication systems 1019 18.1 The 5G cellular system 1019 18.1.1 Cells in a wireless system 1019 18.1.2 The release 15 of the 3GPP standard 1020 18.1.3 Radio access network 1021 Time-frequency plan 1022 NR data transmission chain 1023 OFDM numerology 1023 Channel estimation 1024 18.1.4 Downlink 1024 Synchronization 1026 Initial access or beam sweeping 1027 Channel estimation 1028 Channel state information reporting 1028 18.1.5 Uplink 1029 Transform precoding numerology 1029 Channel estimation 1029 Synchronization 1030 Timing advance 1031 18.1.6 Network slicing 1031 18.2 GSM 1032 Radio subsystem 1034 18.3 Wireless local area networks 1036 Medium access control protocols 1036 18.4 DECT 1037 18.5 Bluetooth 1040 18.6 Transmission over unshielded twisted pairs 1041 18.6.1 Transmission over UTP in the customer service area 1041 18.6.2 High speed transmission over UTP in local area networks 1045 18.7 Hybrid fibre/coaxial cable networks 1048 Ranging and power adjustment in OFDMA systems 1051 Ranging and power adjustment for uplink transmission 1052 Bibliography 1053 Appendixes 1057 18.A Duplexing 1058 Three methods 1058 18.B Deterministic access methods 1059 19 High-speed communications over twisted-pair cables 1063 19.1 Quaternary partial response class-IV system 1063 Analog filter design 1064 Received signal and adaptive gain control 1064 Near-end crosstalk cancellation 1065 Decorrelation filter 1065 Adaptive equalizer 1065 Compensation of the timing phase drift 1066 Adaptive equalizer coefficient adaptation 1066 Convergence behaviour of the various algorithms 1067 19.1.1 VLSI implementation 1069 Adaptive digital NEXT canceller 1069 Adaptive digital equalizer 1071 Timing control 1075 Viterbi detector 1077 19.2 Dual duplex system 1077 Dual duplex transmission 1077 Physical layer control 1080 Coding and decoding 1080 19.2.1 Signal processing functions 1083 The 100BASE-T2 transmitter 1083 The 100BASE-T2 receiver 1084 Computational complexity of digital receive filters 1086 Bibliography 1087 Appendixes 1087 19.A Interference suppression 1088
£113.36
John Wiley & Sons Inc Probabilistic Power System Expansion Planning
Book SynopsisProbabilistic Power System Expansion Planning with Renewable Energy Resources and Energy Storage Systems Discover how modern techniques have shaped complex power system expansion planning with this one-stop resource from two experts in the field Probabilistic Power System Expansion Planning with Renewable Energy Resources and Energy Storage Systems delivers a comprehensive collection of innovative approaches to the probabilistic planning of generation and transmission systems under uncertainties. The book includes renewables and energy storage calculations when using probabilistic and deterministic reliability techniques to assess system performance from a long-term expansion planning viewpoint. Divided into two sections, the book first covers topics related to Generation Expansion Planning, with chapters on cost assessment, methodology and optimization, and more. The second and final section provides information on Transmission System Expansion Planning, with chTable of ContentsAuthor Biographies xvii Preface xix Acknowledgments xxv Part I Generation Expansion Planning 1 1 Introduction 3 1.1 Electricity Outlook 3 1.2 Renewables 8 1.3 Power System Planning 12 2 Background on Generation Expansion Planning 15 2.1 Methodology and Issues 15 2.2 Formulation of the Least-Cost Generation Expansion Planning Problem 18 3 Cost Assessment and Methodologies in Generation Expansion Planning 21 3.1 Basic Cost Concepts 21 3.1.1 Annual Effective Discount Rate 22 3.1.2 Present Value 23 3.1.3 Relationship Between Salvage Value and Depreciation Cost 24 3.2 Methodologies 26 3.2.1 Dynamic Programming 26 3.2.2 Linear Programming 27 3.2.2.1 Investment Cost (Capital Cost) 27 3.2.2.2 Operating Cost 27 3.2.2.3 LP Formula 28 3.2.3 Integer Programming 28 3.2.4 Multi-objective Linear Programming 28 3.2.5 Genetic Algorithm 29 3.2.6 Game Theory 30 3.2.7 Reliability Worth 32 3.2.8 Maximum Principle 32 3.3 Conventional Approach for Load Modeling 34 3.3.1 Load Duration Curve 34 4 Load Model and Generation Expansion Planning 39 4.1 Introduction 39 4.2 Analytical Approach for Long-Term Generation Expansion Planning 40 4.2.1 Representation of Random Load Fluctuations 41 4.2.2 Available Generation Capacities 43 4.2.3 Expected Plant Outputs 44 4.2.4 Expected Annual Energy 47 4.2.5 Reliability Measures 47 4.2.5.1 Expected Annual Unserved Energy 47 4.2.5.2 Annual Loss-of-Load Probability 47 4.2.6 Expected Annual Cost 48 4.2.7 Expected Marginal Values 49 4.3 Optimal Utilization of Hydro Resources 50 4.3.1 Introduction 50 4.3.2 Conventional Peak-Shaving Operation and its Problems 51 4.3.3 Peak-Shaving Operation Based on Analytical Production Costing Model 52 4.3.3.1 Basic Concept 52 4.3.3.2 Peak-Shaving Operation Problem 53 4.3.4 Optimization Procedure for Peak-Shaving Operation 53 4.4 Long-Range Generation Expansion Planning 56 4.4.1 Statement of Long-Range Generation Expansion Planning Problem 56 4.4.1.1 Master Problem and Basic Subproblems 57 4.4.1.2 Hydro Subproblem 58 4.4.2 Optimization Procedures 59 4.5 Case Studies 60 4.5.1 Test for Accuracy of Formulas 60 4.5.2 Test for Solution Convergence and Computing Efficiency 62 4.6 Conclusion 65 5 Probabilistic Production Simulation Model 67 5.1 Introduction 67 5.2 Effective Load Distribution Curve 67 5.3 Case Studies 71 5.3.1 Case Study I: Sample System I With One 30MW Generator Only 71 5.3.2 Case Study II: Sample System II With One 10MW Generator Only 75 5.3.3 Case Study III: Sample System III With Two Generators – 30 and 10MW 78 5.4 Probabilistic Production Simulation Algorithm 82 5.4.1 Hartley Transform 82 5.5 Supply Reserve Rate 90 6 Decision Maker’s Satisfaction Using Fuzzy Set Theory 95 6.1 Introduction 95 6.2 Fuzzy Dynamic Programming 96 6.3 Best Generation Mix 97 6.3.1 Problem Statement 97 6.3.2 Objective Functions 97 6.3.3 Constraints 99 6.3.4 Membership Functions 100 6.3.5 The Proposed Fuzzy Dynamic Programming-Based Solution Procedure 101 6.4 Case Study 102 6.4.1 Results and Discussion 104 6.5 Conclusion 108 7 Best Generation Mix Considering Air Pollution Constraints 111 7.1 Introduction 111 7.2 Concept of Flexible Planning 111 7.3 LP Formulation of the Best Generation Mix 112 7.3.1 Problem Statement 112 7.3.2 Objective Functions 113 7.4 Fuzzy LP Formulation of Flexible Generation Mix 116 7.4.1 The Optimal Decision Theory by Fuzzy Set Theory 116 7.4.2 The Function of Fuzzy Linear Programming 117 7.5 Case Studies 118 7.5.1 Results by Non-Fuzzy Model 120 7.5.2 Results by Fuzzy Model 122 7.6 Conclusion 124 8 Generation System Expansion Planning with Renewable Energy 127 8.1 Introduction 127 8.2 LP Formulation of the Best Generation Mix 128 8.2.1 Problem Statement 128 8.2.2 Objective Function and Constraints 129 8.3 Fuzzy LP Formulation of Flexible Generation Mix 132 8.3.1 The Optimal Decision Theory by Fuzzy Set Theory 132 8.3.2 The Function of Fuzzy Linear Programming 133 8.4 Case Studies 134 8.4.1 Test Results 134 8.4.2 Sensitivity Analysis 134 8.4.2.1 Capacity Factor of WTG and SCG 134 8.5 Conclusion 140 9 Reliability Evaluation for Power System Planning with Wind Generators and Multi-Energy Storage Systems 141 9.1 Introduction 141 9.2 Probabilistic Reliability Evaluation by Monte Carlo Simulation 143 9.2.1 Probabilistic Operation Model of Generator 1 143 9.2.2 Probabilistic Operation Model of Generator 2 144 9.3 Probabilistic Output Prediction Model of WTG 145 9.4 Multi-Energy Storage System Operational Model 147 9.4.1 Constraints of ESS control (EUi,k) 149 9.5 Multi-ESS Operation Rule 150 9.5.1 Discharging Mode 150 9.5.2 Charging Mode 151 9.6 Reliability Evaluation with Energy Storage System 151 9.7 Case Studies 152 9.7.1 Power System of Jeju Island 152 9.7.2 Reliability Evaluation of Single-ESS 156 9.7.3 Reliability Evaluation of Multi-ESS 159 9.7.4 Comparison of System A and System B 162 9.8 Conclusion 163 9.A Appendices 164 9.A.1 Single-ESS Model 164 9.A.2 Multi-ESS Model 167 9.A.3 Operation of Multi-ESS Models 168 Method 1: Energy Rate Dispatch Method (ERDM) 173 Method 2: Maximum First Priority Method (MFPM) 173 9.A.4 A Comparative Analysis of Single-ESS and Multi-ESS Models 175 10 Genetic Algorithm for Generation Expansion Planning and Reactive Power Planning 177 10.1 Introduction 177 10.2 Generation Expansion Planning 178 10.3 The Least-Cost GEP Problem 179 10.4 Simple Genetic Algorithm 180 10.4.1 String Representation 181 10.4.2 Genetic Operations 181 10.5 Improved GA for the Least-Cost GEP 182 10.5.1 String Structure 182 10.5.2 Fitness Function 182 10.5.3 Creation of an Artificial Initial Population 183 10.5.4 Stochastic Crossover, Elitism, and Mutation 185 10.6 Case Studies 186 10.6.1 Test Systems’ Description 186 10.6.2 Parameters for GEP and IGA 187 10.6.3 Numerical Results 189 10.6.4 Summary 192 10.7 Reactive Power Planning 192 10.8 Decomposition of Reactive Power Planning Problem 194 10.8.1 Investment-Operation Problem 194 10.8.2 Benders Decomposition Formulation 195 10.9 Solution Algorithm for VAR Planning 196 10.10 Simulation Results 198 10.10.1 The 6-bus System 198 10.10.2 IEEE 30-bus System 199 10.10.3 Summary 200 10.11 Conclusion 201 References 203 Part II Transmission System Expansion Planning 213 11 Transmission Expansion Planning Problem 215 11.1 Introduction 215 11.2 Long-Term Transmission Expansion Planning 216 11.3 Yearly Transmission Expansion Planning 218 11.3.1 Power Flow Model 218 11.3.2 Optimal Operation Cost Model 220 11.3.3 Probability of Line Failures 222 11.3.4 Expected Operation Cost 223 11.3.5 Annual Expected Operation Cost 224 11.4 Long-Term Transmission Planning Problem 224 11.4.1 Long-Term Transmission Planning Model 225 11.4.2 Solution Technique for the Planning Problem 226 11.5 Case Study 227 11.6 Conclusion 232 12 Models and Methodologies 235 12.1 Introduction 235 12.2 Transmission System Expansion Planning Problem 235 12.3 Cost Evaluation for TEP Considering Electricity Market 236 12.4 Model Development History for TEP Problem 237 12.5 General DC Power Flow-Based Formulation of TEP Problem 238 12.5.1 Linear Programming 239 12.5.2 Dynamic Programming 240 12.5.3 Integer Programming (IP) 242 12.5.4 Genetic Algorithm by Mixed Integer Programming (MIP) 245 12.6 Branch and Bound Algorithm 246 12.6.1 Branch and Bound Algorithm and Flow Chart 246 12.6.2 Sample System Study by Branch and Bound 248 13 Probabilistic Production Cost Simulation for TEP 257 13.1 Introduction 257 13.2 Modeling of Extended Effective Load for Composite Power System 259 13.3 Probability Distribution Function of the Synthesized Fictitious Equivalent Generator 263 13.4 Reliability Evaluation and Probabilistic Production Cost Simulation at Load Points 265 13.5 Case Studies 266 13.5.1 Numerical Calculation of a Simple Example 266 13.5.2 Case Study: Modified Roy Billinton Test System 274 13.6 Conclusion 288 14 Reliability Constraints 291 14.1 Deterministic Reliability Constraint Using Contingency Constraints 291 14.1.1 Introduction 291 14.1.2 Transmission Expansion Planning Problem 292 14.1.3 Maximum Flow Under Contingency Analysis for Security Constraint 297 14.1.4 Alternative Types of Contingency Criteria 298 14.1.5 Solution Algorithm 299 14.1.6 Case Studies 300 14.1.7 Conclusion 316 Appendix 319 14.2 Deterministic Reliability Constraints 322 14.2.1 Introduction 322 14.2.2 Transmission System Expansion Planning Problem 323 14.2.3 Maximum Flow Under Contingency Analysis for Security Constraint 325 14.2.4 Solution Algorithm 325 14.2.5 Case Studies 326 14.2.6 Conclusion 331 14.3 Probabilistic Reliability Constraints 333 14.3.1 Introduction 333 14.3.2 Transmission System Expansion Planning Problem 338 14.3.3 Composite Power System Reliability Evaluation 340 14.3.4 Solution Algorithm 343 14.3.5 Case Study 344 14.3.6 Conclusion 357 14.4 Outage Cost Constraints 357 14.4.1 Introduction 357 14.4.2 The Objective Function 358 14.4.3 Constraints 359 14.4.4 Outage Cost Assessment of Transmission System 360 14.4.5 Reliability Evaluation of Transmission System 363 14.4.6 Outage Cost Assessment 363 14.4.7 Solution Algorithm 364 14.4.8 Case Study 365 14.4.9 Conclusion 369 14.5 Deterministic–Probabilistic (D–P) Criteria 373 15 Fuzzy Decision Making for TEP 375 15.1 Introduction 375 15.2 Fuzzy Transmission Expansion Planning Problem 377 15.3 Equivalent Crisp Integer Programming and Branch and Bound Method 379 15.4 Membership Functions 380 15.5 Solution Algorithm 381 15.6 Testing 382 15.6.1 Discussion of Results 384 15.6.2 Solution Sensitivity to Reliability Criterion 387 15.6.3 Sensitivity to Budget for Construction Cost 389 15.7 Case Study 390 15.8 Conclusion 396 15.A Appendix 396 15.A.1 Network Modeling of Power System 396 15.A.2 Definition 397 15.A.3 Fuzzy Integer Programming (FIP) 398 16 Optimal Reliability Criteria for TEP 401 16.1 Introduction 401 16.2 Probabilistic Optimal Reliability Criterion 401 16.2.1 Introduction 401 16.2.2 Optimal Reliability Criterion Determination 403 16.2.3 Optimal Composite Power System Expansion Planning 403 16.2.3.1 The Objective Function 403 16.2.3.2 Constraints 405 16.2.4 Composite Power System Reliability Evaluation and Outage Cost Assessment 406 16.2.4.1 Reliability Evaluation at HLI 406 16.2.4.2 Reliability Evaluation at HLII (Composite Power System) 407 16.2.4.3 Flow Chart of the Proposed Methodology for Optimal Reliability Criterion Determination in Transmission System Expansion Planning 409 16.2.5 Case Study 410 16.2.6 Conclusion 416 16.3 Deterministic Reliability Criterion for Composite Power System Expansion Planning 416 16.3.1 Introduction 416 16.3.2 Optimal Reliability Criterion Determination 419 16.3.3 Optimal Composite Power System Expansion Planning 419 16.3.3.1 Composite Power System Expansion Planning Formulation in CmExpP.For 419 16.3.3.2 Flow Chart 421 16.3.4 Composite Power System Reliability Evaluation 421 16.3.4.1 Reliability Indices at Load Points 422 16.3.4.2 Reliability Indices of the Bulk System 423 16.3.5 DMR Evaluation using Maximum Flow Method 424 16.3.6 Flow Chart of Optimal Reliability Criterion Determination 424 16.3.7 Case Study 425 16.3.7.1 Basic Input Data 425 16.3.7.2 Results of Construction Costs of Cases 428 16.3.7.3 Reliability Evaluation 428 16.3.8 Conclusion 431 17 Probabilistic Reliability-Based Expansion Planning with Wind Turbine Generators 433 17.1 Introduction 433 17.2 The Multistate Operation Model of WTG 434 17.2.1 WTG Power Output Model 434 17.2.2 Wind Speed Model 435 17.2.3 The Multistate Model of WTG using Normal ProbabilityDistribution Function 435 17.3 Reliability Evaluation of a Composite Power System with WTG 438 17.3.1 Reliability Indices at Load Buses 440 17.3.2 System Reliability Indices 440 17.4 Case Study 441 17.5 Conclusion 448 17.A Appendix 448 18 Probabilistic Reliability-Based HVDC Expansion Planning with Wind Turbine Generators 449 18.1 The Status of HVDC 449 18.2 HVDC Technology for Energy Efficiency and Grid Reliability 451 18.3 HVDC Impacts on Transmission System Reliabili ty 455 18.4 Case Study 455 References 465 Index 469
£108.86
John Wiley & Sons Inc StepbyStep Design of LargeScale Photovoltaic
Book SynopsisHow to design a solar power plant, from start to finish In Step-by-Step Design of Large-Scale Photovoltaic Power Plants, a team of distinguished engineers delivers a comprehensive reference on PV power plantsand their designfor specialists, experts, and academics. Written in three parts, the book covers the detailed theoretical knowledge required to properly design a PV power plant. It goes on to explore the step-by-step requirements for creating a real-world PV power plant, including parts and components design, mathematical formulations and calculations, analyses, evaluations, and planning. The book concludes with a discussion of a sample solar plant design, as well as tips on how to avoid common design mistakes, and how to handle the operation and maintenance of PV power plants. Step-by-Step Design of Large-Scale Photovoltaic Power Plants also includes: Thorough introductions to the basic requirements of design, economic analyses, and investTable of ContentsPREFACE ACKNOWLEDGMENTS ACRONYMS SYMBOLS 1 Introduction 1.1 Solar Energy 1 1.2 Diverse Solar Energy Applications 1 1.2.1 Solar Thermal Power Plant 2 1.2.2 PV Thermal Hybrid Power Plants 4 1.2.3 PV Power Plant 4 1.3 Global PV Power Plants 9 1.4 Perspective of PV Power Plants 11 1.5 A Review on the Design of Large-Scale PV Power Plant 13 1.6 Outline of the Book 14 References 15 2 Design Requirements 19 2.1 Overview 19 2.2 Development Phases 19 2.2.1 Concept Development and Site Identification 20 2.2.2 Prefeasibility Study 20 2.2.3 Feasibility Study 20 2.2.4 Permitting, Financing and Contracts 20 2.2.5 Detailed Design and Engineering 21 2.2.6 Construction 21 2.2.7 Commercial Operation 21 2.3 Project Predesign 21 2.4 Project Detailed Design 21 2.5 The Main Components Required for Realizing an LS-PVPP 22 2.5.1 PV Panels (PV Module) 22 2.5.2 Solar Inverter 22 2.5.3 Photovoltaic Mounting Systems (Solar Module Racking) 26 2.5.4 DC Cable 26 2.5.5 DC Combiner Box 26 2.5.6 DC Protection System 26 2.5.7 AC Combiner Box 26 2.5.8 Low-Voltage Switchgear 26 2.5.9 Transformers 27 2.5.10 Medium-Voltage Switchgear 27 2.5.11 LV and MV AC Cables 27 2.5.12 AC Protection Devices 27 2.6 An Overview of PV Technologies 27 2.6.1 Background on Solar Cell 27 2.6.2 Types and Classifications 28 2.7 Solar Inverter Topologies Overview 28 2.7.1 Central Inverter 28 2.7.2 String Inverter 29 2.7.3 Multi-string Inverter29 2.7.4 Micro-Inverter 29 2.8 Solar Panel Mounting 30 2.9 Solar Panel Tilt 30 2.10 Solar Tracking System 31 2.10.1 One-Axis Tracker 31 2.10.1.1 North–South Horizontal-Axis Tracking 31 2.10.1.2 Polar Tracking 31 2.10.1.3 East–West Horizontal-Axis Tracking 31 2.10.1.4 Azimuthal-Axis Tracking 32 2.10.2 Two-Axis Tracker 32 2.10.3 Driving Motor 32 2.10.4 Solar Tracker Control 33 References 34 3 Feasibility Studies 35 3.1 Introduction 35 3.2 Preliminary Feasibility Studies 35 3.3 Technical Feasibility Study 36 3.3.1 Site Selection 36 3.3.1.1 Amount of Sunlight 36 3.3.1.2 Land Area and Geometry 36 3.3.1.3 Climate Conditions 37 3.3.1.4 Site Access to Power Grid 38 3.3.1.5 Site Road Access 38 3.3.1.6 Site Topography 38 3.3.1.7 Land Geotechnics and Seismicity 40 3.3.1.8 Drainage, Seasonal Flooding 41 3.3.1.9 Land Use and Legal Permits 41 3.3.1.10 Air Pollution and Suspended Solid Particles 42 3.3.1.11 Geopolitical Risk 43 3.3.1.12 Financial Incentives 43 3.3.2 Annual Electricity Production 43 3.3.3 Equipment Technical Specifications 43 3.3.4 Execution and Construction Processes 43 3.3.5 Site Plan 43 3.4 Environmental Feasibility 44 3.5 Social Feasibility 45 3.6 Economic Feasibility 45 3.6.1 Financial Model Inputs 45 3.6.2 Financial Model Results 47 3.6.3 Financial and Economic Indicators 48 3.6.4 Financial Indicators 48 3.6.4.1 Net Present Value 48 3.6.4.2 Internal Rate of Return 48 3.6.4.3 Investment Return Period 49 3.6.4.4 Break Even Point 49 3.7 Timing Feasibility 50 3.8 Summary 50 References 51 4 Grid Connection Studies 53 4.1 Introduction 53 4.2 Introducing Topics of Grid Connection Studies 53 4.2.1 Load Flow Studies 53 4.2.2 Contingency (N-1) 54 4.2.3 Three-phase and Single-phase Short Circuit Studies 55 4.2.4 Grounding System Studies 55 4.2.5 Network Protection Studies 56 4.2.6 Power Quality Studies 57 4.2.7 Stability Studies 58 4.3 Modeling of Grid and PV Power Plants 59 4.3.1 Background Information Required for Modeling 59 4.3.2 Simulation of PV Plant and Network 60 4.3.3 Load Flow Studies Before and After PV Plant Connection 60 4.3.4 Contingency (N-1) Studies Before and After PV Plant Connection 66 4.3.5 Three-phase Short Circuit Studies 68 4.3.6 Power Quality Studies 68 4.3.7 Sustainability Studies 72 4.3.8 Investigating Additional Parameters for Grid Connection Studies 73 4.4 Summary 76 References 76 5 Solar Resource and Irradiance 79 5.1 Introduction 79 5.2 Radiometric Terms 79 5.2.1 Extraterrestrial Irradiance 79 5.2.2 Solar Geometry 80 5.2.3 Solar Radiation and Earth’s Atmosphere 81 5.3 Solar Resources 82 5.3.1 Satellite Solar Data 86 5.3.2 Radiation Measurement 86 5.4 Solar Energy Radiation on Panels 86 5.5 Solar Azimuth and Altitude Angle 89 5.6 Tilt Angle and Orientation 92 5.7 Shadow Distances and Row Spacing 95 5.7.1 Sun Path 96 5.7.2 Shadow Calculations for Fixed PV Systems 96 5.7.3 Shadow Calculations for Single-Axis Tracking PV Systems) Horizontal E–W Tracking Axis) 99 References 100 6 Large-Scale PV Plant Design Overview 101 6.1 Introduction 101 6.2 Classification of LSPVPP Engineering Documents 101 6.2.1 Part 1: Feasibility Study 101 6.2.2 Part 2: Basic Design 102 6.2.3 Part 3: Detailed Design and Shop Drawing 107 6.2.4 Part 4: As-Built and Final Documentation 107 6.3 Roadmap Proposal for LSPVPP Design 108 6.3.1 Project Definition 108 6.3.2 Collecting General Information 109 6.3.3 Collecting Information By Site Visit 109 6.3.4 Limitations and Obstacles Identification 110 6.3.5 PV Module and Inverter Selection111 6.3.6 String Size Calculations 111 6.3.7 Solar PV Mounting Structure Selection 111 6.3.8 Tilt Angle Calculation 113 6.3.9 Calculations of Far and Near Shading 113 6.3.10 Optimization Process 113 6.3.11 Energy Balance and Value Engineering 115 6.3.12 Optimal Transformer Size 116 6.3.13 General SLD and Layout 116 6.3.14 Detailed Design 117 6.3.15 Electrical Parameters and Value Engineering 117 6.3.16 Preparing Final Documents 117 6.4 Conclusion 117 References 118 7 PV Power Plant DC Side Design 119 7.1 Introduction 119 7.2 DC Side Design Methodology 119 7.3 PV Modules Selection 121 7.3.1 Module Technology 121 7.3.2 PV Module Size 123 7.3.3 Selection Criteria 123 7.4 Inverter Selection 123 7.4.1 Inverter Topologies 126 7.4.1.1 Micro Inverter 126 7.4.1.2 Multi-string Inverter 126 7.4.1.3 String Inverter 126 7.4.1.4 Central Inverter 126 7.4.1.5 Virtual Central Inverter 128 7.4.2 Comparison of Inverter Topologies 128 7.5 PV Modules Number 129 7.5.1 Method 1 133 7.5.1.1 Minimum String Size 133 7.5.1.2 Maximum String Size 134 7.5.1.3 Determining Maximum Current of a PV Module 135 7.5.1.4 Determining Number of Inverters 135 7.5.2 Method 2 136 7.6 Size of PV Plant DC Side 136 7.7 DC Cables 138 7.7.1 Criteria 138 7.7.2 DC Cables Cross Section 139 7.7.2.1 Current Capacity 139 7.7.2.2 Voltage Drop 141 7.7.2.3 Power Loss 143 7.7.2.4 Short-circuit Current 143 7.8 DC Box Combiner 144 7.9 String Diode 145 7.10 Fuse 145 7.10.1 Rated Voltage 146 7.10.2 Rated Current 146 7.10.3 Fuse Testing 147 7.10.4 Melting Time 147 7.11 Surge Arrester 148 7.12 DC Switch 149 7.13 Conclusion 150 Note 150 References 150 8 PV System Losses and Energy Yield 8.1. Introduction 8.2. PV System Losses 8.2.1. Sunlight Losses 8.2.1.1. Array Incidence Losses 8.2.1.2. Soiling Losses 8.2.1.3. Dust Losses 8.2.1.4. Snow Losses 8.2.2. Sunlight into DC Electricity Conversion 8.2.2.1. Temperature-r Related Losses 8.2.2.2. Shading Losses 8.2.2.3. Low Irradiance 8.2.2.4. Module Quality 8.2.2.5. Light-Induced Degradation 8.2.2.6. Potential-Induced Degradation 8.2.2.7. Manufacturing Module Mismatch 8.2.2.8. Degradation 8.2.3. DC to AC Conversion Losses 8.2.3.1. Inverter Losses 8.2.3.2. MPPT Losses 8.2.3.3. Tracking Curtailment 8.2.3.4. PV Plant DC Losses 8.2.4. PV Plant AC Losses 8.2.4.1. AC Losses 8.2.4.2. Auxiliary Power Losses 8.2.4.3. Downtime and Unavailability 8.2.4.4. Grid Compliance Losses 8.3. Energy Yield Prediction 8.3.1. Irradiation on Modules 8.3.2. PV Plant Losses 8.3.3. Performance Modeling 8.3.4. Uncertainty in Energy Yield 8.3.5. Performance Ratio 8.3.6. Capacity Factor 8.4. Conclusion References
£101.66
John Wiley & Sons Inc Smart Grids and Microgrids
Book SynopsisSMART GRIDS AND MICROGRIDS Written and edited by a team of experts in the field, this is the most comprehensive and up-to-date study of smart grids and microgrids for engineers, scientists, students, and other professionals. The power supply is one of the most important issues of our time. In every country, all over the world, from refrigerators to coffee makers to heating and cooling, almost everyone in the world needs to have access to power. As the global demand rises, new methods of delivering power, such as smart grids and microgrids, have, out of necessity or choice, been developed and researched. In this book, modern and advanced concepts of both microgrid and smart grid technology are introduced. Beginning from the brief fundamental concepts of microgrids and its various constituents this team of experts discusses different architectures, control issues, communication challenges, measurement, stability, power quality and mitigation, protection, and powerTable of ContentsPreface xv 1 A Comprehensive Analysis of Numerical Techniques for Estimation of Solar PV Parameters Under Dynamic Environmental Condition 1Balasubramonian M, Rajeswari Ramachandran, Veerapandiyan Veerasamy, Albert Paul Arunkumar C P and Noor Izzri Abdul Wahab Nomenclature 2 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Mathematical Model of Solar PV 5 1.2.1 Calculation of Vt, Rse and Rsh 8 1.2.2 Effect of Irradiance and Temperature 9 1.2.3 Estimation of Maximum Power Point 10 1.3 Numerical Techniques for Parameter Estimation 11 1.3.1 Gauss-Seidel Technique 12 1.3.2 Newton-Raphson (NR) Method 12 1.4 Results and Discussion 13 1.4.1 Simulation Results 16 1.4.2 Experimental Results 19 1.4.3 Comparative Analysis 19 1.5 Conclusion 24 References 24 2 Energy Storage System in Microgrid 27Md Waseem Ahmad and Ravi Raushan 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 Need of ESS (Energy Storage Systems) 28 2.3 Available ESS (Energy Storage Systems) Technologies 30 2.3.1 Type of ESS (Energy Storage Systems) 31 2.3.2 Comparison of Storage Technologies 36 2.4 Power Electronics Converter in Microgrid 36 2.4.1 DC-DC Converter 36 2.4.2 DC-AC Inverter AC-DC Rectifier 38 2.4.3 AC-AC Converter 38 2.5 Control of Interfaced Converters 38 2.5.1 DC-DC Bidirectional Converter Interfacing DC-Microgrid 38 2.5.1.1 Modeling and Control of the Converter 41 2.5.1.2 Typical Case Study in MATLAB-Simulink 44 2.5.2 DC-AC VSI Interfacing AC-Microgrid 45 2.5.2.1 Modelling and Control of the VSI 50 2.5.2.3 Typical Case Study in MATLAB-Simulink 53 2.6 Conclusion 57 References 57 3 Economic Feasibility Studies of Simple and Discounted Payback Periods for 1 MWp Ground Mounted Solar PV Plant at Tirupati Airport 59Mohan Krishna S, Sheila Mahapatra, Febin Daya J L, Thinagaran Perumal, Saurav Raj and Prajof Prabhakaran 3.1 Introduction 60 3.1.1 Background and Motivation 60 3.1.2 Literature Review 62 3.1.3 Organization of the Paper 63 3.2 Application of the Technique 64 3.2.1 Economic Evaluation 64 3.2.2 Solar PV Plant at Tirupati Airport 65 3.2.3 Solar PV Plant – Technical Specifications and Inventories 66 3.3 Result Analysis 67 3.3.1 Contribution of Solar Energy 67 3.3.2 Reduction in CO2 Emissions 68 3.3.3 Energy Savings with LEDs 68 3.3.4 Panel Efficiency Variation with Temperature 69 3.3.5 Estimation of Simple Payback Period (SPP) 69 3.3.6 Estimation of DPP 70 3.4 Conclusion 71 References 71 4 Impact of Reliability Indices for Planning Charging Station Load in a Distribution Network 75Archana A N and Rajeev T. 4.1 Introduction 76 4.2 Background 78 4.3 Reliability Analysis of Distribution Network 79 4.4 Methodology for Allocating Charging Loads in the Test System 81 4.4.1 Mathematical Evaluation of the System Under Study 82 4.4.2 Formulation of Test Case Scenarios 84 4.5 Results and Discussions 87 4.5.1 Reliability Indices for Slow EV Chargers 87 4.5.2 Reliability Indices for Fast EV Chargers 88 4.5.3 Comparative Results of Slow and Fast EV Chargers in Evaluating Reliability Indices 89 4.5.4 Measures to Improve Reliability Indices in the Distribution Network 91 4.6 Conclusion 91 Nomenclature 92 Appendix 92 References 97 5 Investigation on Microgrid Control and Stability 99Jithin S and Rajeev T. 5.1 Introduction 99 5.2 Microgrid Control 100 5.3 Microgrid Control Hierarchy 101 5.3.1 Primary Control 103 5.3.2 Secondary Control 106 5.3.3 Tertiary Control 107 5.3.4 Intelligent Control Methods 108 5.4 Control Techniques 108 5.4.1 Communication Based Control/Centralized Control 108 5.4.2 Conventional Droop Control 110 5.4.3 Improved Droop Control Methods 111 5.4.4 Summary of Control Techniques 117 5.5 Stability of Microgrids 118 5.5.1 Stability Classification 119 5.5.2 Power Balance Stability 120 5.5.3 Control System Stability 120 5.6 Stability Analysis Techniques 121 5.7 Conclusions 122 References 123 6 Frequency Control in Microgrids Based on Fuzzy Coordinated Electric Vehicle Charging Station 127Sachpreet Kaur, Tarlochan Kaur and Rintu Khanna 6.1 Introduction 128 6.2 Microgrid System Framework and Component Description 132 6.2.1 Single-Diode PV System Characteristics and its Modelling 132 6.2.2 Modelling of an Electric Vehicle Charging Station (EVCS) 133 6.2.3 Grid Interfacing Units 135 6.3 Designing of the FL Controller for PEVs 135 6.4 PEVs Control Strategy 138 6.5 Simulation Results and Discussion 139 6.5.1 Detailed Analysis of Scenario 1 140 6.5.2 Detailed Analysis of Scenario 2 141 6.6 Conclusions 143 References 143 7 Role of Renewable Energy Sources and Storage Units in Smart Grids 147Swetha Shekarappa G, Manjulata Badi, Saurav Raj and Sheila Mahapatra 7.1 Introduction 147 7.2 Concepts of Renewable Energy 151 7.3 Hydro Energy 152 7.4 Solar Power 157 7.5 Wind Energy 160 7.6 Geothermal Energy 163 7.7 Energy Storage in Smart Grids 165 Conclusion and Future Scope 168 Acknowledgement 169 References 169 8 Smart Grid in Indian Scenario 175Dr Suresh N S., Padmavathy N S., Dr S Arul Daniel and Dr Ramakrishna Kappagantu 8.1 Introduction 176 8.1.1 Smart Grid Technologies 176 8.1.2 Why Smart Grid 177 8.1.3 Smart Grid Control and Automation 178 8.2 Smart Technologies in Smart Grid Implementation 179 8.2.1 Measuring and Sensing Technologies 180 8.2.2 Advanced Metering Infrastructure (AMI) 180 8.2.3 Demand Side Management and Demand Response (DSM & DR) 180 8.2.4 Power Quality Management (PQM) 181 8.2.5 Outage Management System (OMS) 181 8.2.6 Advanced Power Electronics 182 8.2.7 Renewable Energy Integration 183 8.2.8 Microgrid 184 8.2.9 Wide Area Measurement Systems 184 8.2.10 Energy Storage Systems 185 8.2.11 Plug-in Electric Vehicle (PEV) 186 8.2.12 Integrated Communication Technologies (ICT) 186 8.2.13 Cyber Security 187 8.3 Implementation of Smart Grid Programs 187 8.3.1 Challenges and Issues of SG Implementation 188 8.3.2 Smart Grid Implementation in India: Puducherry Pilot Programs 189 8.3.3 Power Quality of the Smart Grid 191 8.4 Solar PV System Implementation in India 191 8.5 Summary 192 References 193 9 An FPGA Based Embedded Sytems for Online Monitoring and Power Management in a Standalone Micro-Grid 195B Dastagiri Reddy, K Venkatraman, M.P Selvan and S Moorthi 9.1 Introduction 196 9.2 System Description 197 9.3 Test Cases of Mirco-Grid Controller 202 9.4 Signal Acquisition and Conditioning System 208 9.5 Online Monitoring System 210 9.6 Conclusion 211 References 212 10 Impact of Electric Vehicles in Smart Grids and Micro-Grids 215Tomina Thomas, DR Prawin Angel Michael and Anoop Joy 10.1 Introduction 216 10.2 Microgrids in Electric Vehicle Technology 217 10.2.1 Microgrid 220 10.2.2 Microgrid Integration of EV with Distributed Generation 221 10.2.3 Electric Vehicle Management and Optimal Power Flow 221 10.3 Smart Grids in Electric Vehicle Technology 226 10.3.1 Smart Grid 226 10.4 Why Do We Need to Smarten Electricity Grids? 227 10.4.1 Electric Vehicle Charging Scheduling Through Smart Grids 228 10.4.2 Charging Stations Powered by Smart Grid 229 10.5 Challenges Faced with the Introduction of EVs 229 10.6 Current Trends in EV Technology in India 230 10.7 The Relevance of Smart Grids and Micro Grids in EV Technology in India 234 10.7.1 Relevance of Microgrids 234 10.7.2 The Relevance of Smart Grids 235 10.7.3 Issues and Recommendations: Grid Technology and EVs in India 236 10.7.4 Future Directions 238 10.8 Conclusion 239 References 240 11 Power Electronic Converters and Operational Analysis in Microgrid Environment 241Sreekanth Thamballa 11.1 Introduction 241 11.2 DC-DC Converters 244 11.2.1 Buck Converter 245 11.2.2 Boost Converter 249 11.2.3 Buck-Boost Converter 252 11.3 AC-DC Converters (Rectifiers) 253 11.3.1 Single Phase Diode Bridge Rectifier (SPDBR) 253 11.3.2 Single Phase Controlled Bridge Rectifier (SPCBR) 254 11.3.3 Three Phase Controlled Rectifier 258 11.3.4 Power Factor Correction Circuits (PFCs) 260 11.4 DC-AC Converters (Inverters) 260 11.4.1 Single Phase Two-Level Inverter (SPI) 261 11.4.2 Three Phase Inverter 263 11.4.3 Single Stage Inverters 265 11.4.4 Multilevel Inverters 266 11.5 AC-AC Converters 266 11.5.1 Single Phase AC-AC Voltage Controller 267 11.5.2 Single Phase Cycloconverter 269 11.6 Tools for Simulating Power Electronic Converters 270 11.6.1 Matlab 270 11.6.2 Pspice 270 11.6.3 Plecs 271 11.6.4 Saber 271 References 271 12 IoT Based Underground Cable Fault Detection 273Dheeban S S, Muthu Selvan N B and Krishnaveni L 12.1 Introduction 274 12.2 Types of Fault in Underground Cables 276 12.2.1 Open Circuit Fault 276 12.2.2 Short Circuit Fault 276 12.2.3 Earth Fault 277 12.3 Fault Location Methods 277 12.3.1 Online Method 277 12.3.2 Offline Method 278 12.3.2.1 Murray Loop Test 278 12.3.2.2 Varley Loop Test 279 12.3.2.3 Cable Thumping 281 12.3.2.4 Time Domain Reflectometer 282 12.3.2.5 High Voltage RADAR Methods 283 12.4 Internet of Things 284 12.5 Fault Detection in Cable Through IoT 286 12.6 Conclusion 291 Annexure 292 References 293 13 A Architectural Approach to Smart Grid Technology 295Manjulata Badi, Swetha Shekarappa G, Sheila Mahapatra and Saurav Raj 13.1 Introduction 296 13.2 Background of Power Grid 296 13.3 India’s Current Situation 298 13.4 Current Structure of Smart Grid 299 13.5 The Smart Grid 302 13.6 Smart Grid Components 304 13.6.1 Smart Meter 304 13.6.2 Distribution Automation 305 13.6.3 Management of the Request-Response 305 13.6.4 Demand Side Management 305 13.6.5 Intelligent Equipment 306 13.6.6 Transmission Automation 306 13.6.7 Vehicle Electric 306 13.6.8 Electric Storage 307 13.6.9 Sources of Renewable Energy 307 13.7 Smart Grid Indian Drivers 307 13.8 Smart Grid India’s Latest Initiative 308 13.9 Smart Grid Architecture Challenges and New Technologies 309 13.9.1 Power System Planning 309 13.10 Smart Grid Deployment Sophistication and Regular Organization 310 13.10.1 Difficulty and Limitations 310 13.10.2 Standard Organizations Related to Smart Grids 311 13.11 Intelligent Grid Design Approach 312 13.11.1 Smart Grid Concept Steps 312 13.11.2 Intelligent Grid Frame Function 313 13.12 Graphical Representation Review of Smart Grid Functionality 314 13.12.1 Architecture for IEC, Model and Demand System Response 315 13.12.2 Intelligent Grid Methods 317 13.13 Conclusion and Future Scope 317 References 318 14 Role of Telecommunication Technologies in Microgrids and Smart Grids 325Vivek Menon U and Poongundran Selvaprabhu 14.1 Introduction 326 14.2 The Role of Microgrid and Smart Grid Towards Technology Development 327 14.2.1 Microgrid 327 14.2.1.1 Smart Parking Lot Using a Microgrid Control System 327 14.2.1.2 Smart Community Microgrid (SCMG) 329 14.2.1.3 Intelligent Light-Emitting Diode (LED) Street Lighting System Using a Micro Distributed Energy Storage System 330 14.2.1.4 Residential Microgrid 330 14.2.2 Smart Grid 331 14.2.2.1 Automated Meter Reading (AMR) and Smart Meter 331 14.2.2.2 Vehicle to Grid (V2G) 331 14.2.2.3 Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicles (PHEV) 333 14.2.2.4 Smart Sensors 333 14.2.2.5 Sensors and Actuator Network (SANET) 334 14.3 Research Challenges and Opportunities in Microgrid and Smart Grid 335 14.3.1 Research Challenges in Microgrid 335 14.3.2 Research Challenges in Smart-Grid 337 14.3.3 Opportunities in Microgrid 340 14.3.4 Opportunities in Smart Grid 341 14.4 Solutions for Research Challenges and Future Trends 341 14.4.1 Solutions 341 14.4.2 Future Trends in Microgrid and Smart Grid 344 14.5 Role of Effective Communication Strategies in Microgrids and Smart Grids 346 14.5.1 IoT in Microgrids and Smart Grids 352 14.5.2 Cloud Computing in Microgrids and Smart Grids 354 14.6 Smart Grids - Microgrids: A Demanding Use Case for Future 5G Technologies 355 14.7 Conclusion 357 Abbreviations 358 References 360 Index 365
£169.16
John Wiley & Sons Inc Power System Protection
Book SynopsisAn all-in-one resource on power system protection fundamentals, practices, and applications Made up of an assembly of electrical components, power system protections are a critical piece of the electric power system. Despite its central importance to the safe operation of the power grid, the information available on the topic is limited in scope and detail. In Power System Protection: Fundamentals and Applications, a team of renowned engineers delivers an authoritative and robust overview of power system protection ideal for new and early-career engineers and technologists. The book offers device- and manufacturer-agnostic fundamentals using an accessible balance of theory and practical application. It offers a wealth of examples and easy-to-grasp illustrations to aid the reader in understanding and retaining the information provided within. In addition to providing a wealth of information on power system protection applications for generation, transmission, aTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xix Preface xxi Acknowledgements xxiii 1 What Is Power System Protection, Why Is It Required and Some Basics? 1 1.1 What Is Power System Protection? 1 1.2 Why Is Power System Protections Required? 2 1.3 Some Basic Protection System Terms and Information 6 References 12 2 Basic Power System Protection Components 13 2.1 General Description 13 2.2 Power System Protection Components 13 2.3 Physical Implementation 21 2.4 Power System Isolation Devices and Control Interfaces 23 2.5 Redundancy Arrangements 24 3 AC Signal Sources 27 3.1 Introduction 27 3.2 Current Transformers 27 3.3 Voltage Sources 53 References 56 4 Basic Types of Protection Relays and Their Operation 57 4.1 General 57 4.3 Overcurrent 59 4.4 Differential 77 4.5 Distance 86 Reference 94 5 Protection Information Representation, Nomenclature, and Jargon 95 5.1 General 95 5.2 Protection Drawing Types 95 5.3 Nomenclature and Device Numbers 108 5.4 Classification of Relays 112 5.5 Protection Jargon 114 Reference 116 6 Per-Unit System and Fault Calculations 117 6.1 General 117 6.2 Per-Unit 118 6.3 Fundamental Need for Fault Information 125 6.4 Symmetrical Components 128 6.5 Sequence Impedances of Power Apparatus 131 6.6 Balanced Fault Analysis 139 6.7 Sequence Networks 140 6.8 Summary of Unbalance Fault Calculations 144 6.9 High-Level Summary of the Fault Calculation Process 147 6.10 Useful Fault Calculation Formulas/Methods 148 6.11 Fault Calculation Examples 149 References 157 7 Protection Zones 159 7.1 Protection Zones General 159 7.2 Zones Defined 159 7.3 Zone Overlap Around Breakers 161 7.4 Protection Zoning at Stations 163 7.5 Protection Zones in General 170 7.6 Backup Protection 177 7.7 CT Configuration and Protection Trip Zones 178 7.8 Where Protections Zones do not Overlap Around Breakers 182 7.9 Lines Terminating Directly on Buses at a HV Switching Station 183 8 Transformer Protection 185 8.1 Introduction 185 8.2 General Principles 185 8.3 Differential Protection Power Transformers 186 8.4 Percent Differential Protection Autotransformers 220 8.5 Transformer Percent Differential Setting Examples 227 Reference 235 9 Bus Protection 237 9.1 Introduction 237 9.2 Typical Bus Arrangements 237 9.3 Bus Protection Requirements 239 9.4 Methods of Protecting Buses 239 9.5 Example High Impedance Differential Protection Setting 264 Reference 267 10 Breaker Failure Protection and Automatic Reclosing 269 10.1 Introduction 269 10.2 Breaker Failure General Background 269 10.3 Breaker Automatic Reclosing General Background 283 11 Station Protection 285 11.1 Introduction 285 11.2 Types of Stations 285 11.3 Station and Protection Architecture 287 11.4 Station Switchgear Type 300 11.5 Sub-Transmission Types and Station Grounding 302 11.6 Master Ground 303 12 Capacitor Bank Protection 307 12.1 Capacitor Banks 307 12.2 Purpose for Shunt Capacitors on Power System Networks 307 12.3 Capacitor Bank Construction 308 12.4 Capacitor Bank Protection 319 12.5 Capacitor Bank Breakers 324 12.6 Capacitor Bank Sample Settings 324 Reference 333 13 Synchronous Generator Protection 335 13.1 Introduction 335 13.2 General 336 13.3 Generator/Unit Transformer Protections 340 13.4 Current Transformers 355 13.5 Generator Protection Sample Settings 356 13.6 Generator Control and Protection Systems Coordination 363 13.7 General Generator Tripping Requirements 369 13.8 Breaker Failure Initiation 370 Reference 370 14 Transmission Line Protection 371 14.1 General 371 14.2 Basic Line Protection Requirements 371 14.3 Impedance Relays and Why Not Just Overcurrent Relays 372 14.4 Distance Relay Response to Fault Types 376 14.5 Apparent Impedance 381 14.6 Redundancy/Backup 388 14.7 Tele-Protection (Also Known as Pilot-Protection) 390 14.8 General Implications 399 14.9 Peripheral Requirements of Distance Protection 400 14.10 Tele-Protection (Pilot-Protection) A Historical Perspective 408 14.11 Tele-Protection via Power Line Carrier 408 14.12 Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) 409 14.13 Three-Terminal Lines 410 14.14 Distributed Generation 413 14.15 Distance Relay Response to Resistive Faults 421 14.16 Power System Considerations 428 14.17 Line Current Differential Protection 433 14.18 Pilot Wire Protection 439 14.19 Power System Considerations 440 14.20 Line Setting Application Example 443 References 453 15 Subtransmission/Distribution Feeder Protection 455 15.1 Subtransmission/Distribution Characteristics 455 15.2 Definitions/Characteristics 455 15.3 Distribution Feeder Protection Devices 459 15.4 Protection Coordination Principles 482 15.5 Feeder Energization 491 15.6 Subtransmission Feeder Protection 493 15.7 Impact of Distributed Generators (DGs) on Distribution Feeder Protection 509 15.8 Feeder Protection Application Settings Example 516 References 522 Index 523
£112.46
John Wiley & Sons Inc Multimodal Perception and Secure State Estimation
Book SynopsisTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xii Preface xiv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Background and Motivation 1 1.2 Multimodal Pose Estimation for Vehicle Navigation 2 1.2.1 Multi-Senor Pose Estimation 2 1.2.2 Pose Estimation with Constraints 4 1.2.3 Research Focus in Multimodal Pose Estimation 5 1.3 Secure Estimation 7 1.3.1 Secure State Estimation under Cyber Attacks 7 1.3.2 Secure Pose Estimation for Autonomous Vehicles 8 1.4 Contributions and Organization 9 Part I Multimodal Perception in Vehicle Pose Estimation 13 2 Heading Reference-Assisted Pose Estimation 15 2.1 Preliminaries 16 2.1.1 Stereo Visual Odometry 16 2.1.2 Heading Reference Sensors 17 2.1.3 Graph Optimization on a Manifold 17 2.2 Abstraction Model of Measurement with a Heading Reference 19 2.2.1 Loosely Coupled Model 19 2.2.2 Tightly Coupled Model 20 2.2.3 Structure of the Abstraction Model 22 2.2.4 Vertex Removal in the Abstraction Model 22 2.3 Heading Reference-Assisted Pose Estimation (HRPE) 24 2.3.1 Initialization 24 2.3.2 Graph Optimization 24 2.3.3 Maintenance of the Dynamic Graph 26 2.4 Simulation Studies 26 2.4.1 Accuracy with Respect to Heading Measurement Error 28 2.4.2 Accuracy with Respect to Sliding Window Size 28 2.4.3 Time Consumption with Respect to Sliding Window Size 28 2.5 Experimental Results 31 2.5.1 Experimental Platform 31 2.5.2 Pose Estimation Performance 33 2.5.3 Real-Time Performance 34 2.6 Conclusion 36 3 Road-Constrained Localization Using Cloud Models 37 3.1 Preliminaries 38 3.1.1 Scaled Measurement Equations for Visual Odometry 38 3.1.2 Cloud Models 39 3.1.3 Uniform Gaussian Distribution (UGD) 39 3.1.4 Gaussian-Gaussian Distribution (GGD) 42 3.2 Map-Assisted Ground Vehicle Localization 43 3.2.1 Measurement Representation with UGD 44 3.2.2 Shape Matching Between Map and Particles 45 3.2.3 Particle Resampling and Parameter Estimation 46 3.2.4 Framework Extension to Other Cloud Models 47 3.3 Experimental Validation on UGD 47 3.3.1 Configurations 47 3.3.2 Localization with Stereo Visual Odometry 48 3.3.3 Localization with Monocular Visual Odometry 49 3.3.4 Scale Estimation Results 52 3.3.5 Weighting Function Balancing 52 3.4 Experimental Validation on GGD 54 3.4.1 Experiments on KITTI 55 3.4.2 Experiments on the Self-Collected Dataset 61 3.5 Conclusion 63 4 GPS/Odometry/Map Fusion for Vehicle Positioning Using Potential Functions 65 4.1 Potential Wells and Potential Trenches 66 4.1.1 Potential Function Creation 67 4.1.2 Minimum Searching 71 4.2 Potential-Function-Based Fusion for Vehicle Positioning 74 4.2.1 Information Sources and Sensors 74 4.2.2 Potential Representation 76 4.2.3 Road-Switching Strategy 76 4.3 Experimental Results 78 4.3.1 Quantitative Results 78 4.3.2 Qualitative Evaluation 80 4.4 Conclusion 84 5 Multi-Sensor Geometric Pose Estimation 85 5.1 Preliminaries 86 5.1.1 Distance on Riemannian Manifolds 86 5.1.2 Probabilistic Distribution on Riemannian Manifolds 87 5.2 Geometric Pose Estimation Using Dynamic Potential Fields 88 5.2.1 State Space and Measurement Space 88 5.2.2 Dynamic Potential Fields on Manifolds 90 5.2.3 DPF-Based Information Fusion 91 5.2.4 Approximation of Geometric Pose Estimation 95 5.3 VO-Heading-Map Pose Estimation for Ground Vehicles 97 5.3.1 System Modeling 97 5.3.2 Road Constraints 98 5.3.3 Parameter Estimation on SE(3) 99 5.4 Experiments on KITTI Sequences 99 5.4.1 Overall Performance 99 5.4.2 Influence of Heading Error 102 5.4.3 Influence of Road Map Resolution 102 5.4.4 Influences of Parameters 104 5.5 Experiments on the NTU Dataset 105 5.5.1 Overall Performance 105 5.5.2 Phenomena Observed During Experiments 105 5.6 Conclusion 107 Part II Secure State Estimation for Mobile Robots 109 6 Filter-Based Secure Dynamic Pose Estimation 111 6.1 Introduction 111 6.2 RelatedWork 113 6.3 Problem Formulation 114 6.3.1 System Model 114 6.3.2 Measurement Model 116 6.3.3 Attack Model 116 6.4 Estimator Design 117 6.5 Discussion of Parameter Selection 122 6.5.1 The Probability Subject to Deception Attacks 122 6.5.2 The Bound of Signal 𝝃k 123 6.6 Experimental Validation 123 6.6.1 Pose Estimation under Attack on a Single State 125 6.6.2 Pose Estimation under Attacks on Multiple States 127 6.7 Conclusion 130 7 UKF-Based Vehicle Pose Estimation under Randomly Occurring Deception Attacks 131 7.1 Introduction 131 7.2 Related Work 133 7.3 Pose Estimation Problem for Ground Vehicles under Attack 134 7.3.1 System Model 134 7.3.2 Attack Model 136 7.4 Design of the Unscented Kalman Filter 137 7.5 Numeric Simulation 141 7.6 Experiments 144 7.6.1 General Performance 145 7.6.2 Influence of Parameters 145 7.7 Conclusion 147 8 Secure Dynamic State Estimation with a Decomposing Kalman Filter 149 8.1 Introduction 149 8.2 Problem Formulation 151 8.3 Decomposition of the Kalman Filter By Using a Local Estimate 153 8.4 A Secure Information Fusion Scheme 158 8.5 Numerical Example 161 8.6 Conclusion 162 8.7 Appendix: Proof of Theorem 8.2 162 8.8 Proof of Theorem 8.4 165 9 Secure Dynamic State Estimation for AHRS 169 9.1 Introduction 169 9.2 Related Work 170 9.2.1 Attitude Estimation 170 9.2.2 Secure State Estimation 171 9.2.3 Secure Attitude Estimation 171 9.3 Attitude Estimation Using Heading References 172 9.3.1 Attitude Estimation from Vector Observations 172 9.3.2 Secure Attitude Estimation Framework and Modeling 173 9.4 Secure Estimator Design with a Decomposing Kalman Filter 174 9.4.1 Decomposition of the Kalman Filter Using a Local Estimate 176 9.4.2 A Least-Square Interpretation for the Decomposition 177 9.4.3 Secure State Estimate 178 9.5 Simulation Validation 181 9.5.1 Simulating Measurements with Attacks 182 9.5.2 Filter Performance 182 9.5.3 Influence of Parameter 𝛾 182 9.6 Conclusion 184 10 Conclusions 185 References 189 Index 207
£75.15
John Wiley & Sons Inc Modeling and Control of Modern Electrical Energy
Book SynopsisModeling and Control of Modern Electrical Energy Systems A step-by-step approach to the modeling, analysis, and control of modern electronically controlled energy systems In Modeling and Control of Modern Electrical Energy Systems, distinguished researcher Dr. Masoud Karimi-Ghartemani delivers a comprehensive discussion of distributed and renewable energy resource integration from a control system perspective. The book explores various practical aspects of these systems, including the power extraction control of renewable resources and size selection of short-term storage components. The interactions of distributed energy resources (DERs) with the rest of the electric power system are presented, as is a discussion of the ability of the DER to ride through grid voltage faults and frequency swings. Readers will also discover how to derive mathematical models of different types of energy systems and build simulation models for those systems. Modeling and Control of Electrical EnergyTable of ContentsAuthor Biography xv Preface xvii Acknowledgments xix Acronyms xxi Symbols xxv Introduction xxvii Part I Power Electronic Conversion 1 1 Power Electronics 3 1.1 Power Electronics Based Conversion 3 1.2 Power Electronic Switches 4 1.3 Types of Power Electronic Converters 6 1.4 Applications of Power Electronics in Power Engineering 6 1.5 Summary and Conclusion 8 2 Standard Power Electronic Converters 11 2.1 Standard Buck Converter 11 2.2 Standard Boost Converter 20 2.3 Standard Inverting Buck-Boost Converter 24 2.4 Standard Four-Switch Buck-Boost Converter 26 2.5 Standard Bidirectional Converter 29 2.6 Single-Phase Half-Bridge VSC 30 2.7 Full-Bridge VSC 37 2.8 Three-Phase VSC 40 2.9 Modeling of Converter Delays 43 2.10 Summary and Conclusion 44 Part II Feedback Control Systems 49 3 Frequency-Domain (Transfer Function) Approach 51 3.1 Key Concepts 51 3.2 Open-Loop Control 56 3.3 Closed-Loop (or Feedback) Control 57 3.4 Some Feedback Loop Properties 67 3.5 Summary and Conclusion 69 4 Time-Domain (State Space) Approach 73 4.1 State Space Representation and Properties 73 4.2 State Feedback 76 4.3 State Estimator 78 4.4 Optimal Control 81 4.5 Summary and Conclusion 89 Part III Distributed Energy Resources (DERs) 93 5 Direct-Current (dc) DERs 95 5.1 Introduction 95 5.2 Overview of a Solar PV Conversion System 97 5.3 Power Control via Current Feedback Loop 100 5.4 Grid Voltage Support 113 5.5 Analysis ofWeak Grid Condition 133 5.6 Load Voltage Control 135 5.7 Grid-Forming Converter Controls 142 5.8 Control Scenarios in a PV Converter 152 5.9 LCL Filter 167 5.10 Summary and Conclusion 179 6 Single-Phase Alternating-Current (ac) DERs 181 6.1 Power Balance in a dc/ac System 181 6.2 Power Control Method via Current Feedback Loop (CFL) 183 6.3 Grid-Supportive Controls 204 6.4 dc Voltage Control and Support 219 6.5 Load Voltage Control and Support 235 6.6 DERs in a Hybrid ac/dc Network 243 6.7 Summary and Conclusion 244 7 Three-Phase DERs 249 7.1 Introduction 249 7.2 Three-Phase PLL 255 7.3 Vector Current Control in Stationary Domain 262 7.4 Vector Current Control in Synchronous Reference Frame 277 7.5 Grid-Supportive Controls 297 7.6 dc Side Voltage Control and Support 307 7.7 Load Voltage Control and Support 318 7.8 Summary and Conclusion 334 Problems 335 References 338 8 Summary and Conclusion 341 Index 345
£91.80
John Wiley & Sons Inc Electric Vehicle Technology Explained
Book Synopsis*Table of ContentsAbout the Author xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii Abbreviations xix Symbols xxiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 A Brief History 2 1.1.1 Early Days 2 1.1.2 The Middle of the Twentieth Century 7 1.1.3 Developments towards the End of the Twentieth Century and the Early Twenty-First Century 8 1.2 Electric Vehicles and the Environment 13 1.2.1 Energy Saving and Overall Reduction of Carbon Emissions 14 1.2.2 Reducing Local Pollution 15 1.2.3 Reducing Dependence on Oil 15 1.3 Usage Patterns for Electric Road Vehicles 15 Further Reading 17 2 Types of Electric Vehicles – EV Architecture 19 2.1 Battery Electric Vehicles 19 2.2 The IC Engine/Electric Hybrid Vehicle 19 2.3 Fuelled EVs 24 2.4 EVs using Supply Lines 25 2.5 EVs which use Flywheels or Supercapacitors 25 2.6 Solar-Powered Vehicles 26 2.7 Vehicles using Linear Motors 27 2.8 EVs for the Future 27 Further Reading 27 3 Batteries, Flywheels and Supercapacitors 29 3.1 Introduction 29 3.2 Battery Parameters 30 3.2.1 Cell and Battery Voltages 30 3.2.2 Charge (or Amphour) Capacity 31 3.2.3 Energy Stored 32 3.2.4 Specific Energy 33 3.2.5 Energy Density 33 3.2.6 Specific Power 34 3.2.7 Amphour (or Charge) Efficiency 34 3.2.8 Energy Efficiency 35 3.2.9 Self-discharge Rates 35 3.2.10 Battery Geometry 35 3.2.11 Battery Temperature, Heating and Cooling Needs 35 3.2.12 Battery Life and Number of Deep Cycles 35 3.3 Lead Acid Batteries 36 3.3.1 Lead Acid Battery Basics 36 3.3.2 Special Characteristics of Lead Acid Batteries 38 3.3.3 Battery Life and Maintenance 40 3.3.4 Battery Charging 40 3.3.5 Summary of Lead Acid Batteries 41 3.4 Nickel-Based Batteries 41 3.4.1 Introduction 41 3.4.2 Nickel Cadmium 41 3.4.3 Nickel Metal Hydride Batteries 44 3.5 Sodium-Based Batteries 46 3.5.1 Introduction 46 3.5.2 Sodium Sulfur Batteries 47 3.5.3 Sodium Metal Chloride (ZEBRA) Batteries 48 3.6 Lithium Batteries 50 3.6.1 Introduction 50 3.6.2 The Lithium Polymer Battery 50 3.6.3 The Lithium Ion Battery 51 3.7 Metal–Air Batteries 52 3.7.1 Introduction 52 3.7.2 The Aluminium–Air Battery 52 3.7.3 The Zinc–Air Battery 53 3.8 Supercapacitors and Flywheels 54 3.8.1 Supercapacitors 54 3.8.2 Flywheels 56 3.9 Battery Charging 59 3.9.1 Battery Chargers 59 3.9.2 Charge Equalisation 60 3.10 The Designer’s Choice of Battery 63 3.10.1 Introduction 63 3.10.2 Batteries which are Currently Available Commercially 63 3.11 Use of Batteries in Hybrid Vehicles 64 3.11.1 Introduction 64 3.11.2 IC/Battery Electric Hybrids 64 3.11.3 Battery/Battery Electric Hybrids 64 3.11.4 Combinations using Flywheels 65 3.11.5 Complex Hybrids 65 3.12 Battery Modelling 65 3.12.1 The Purpose of Battery Modelling 65 3.12.2 Battery Equivalent Circuit 66 3.12.3 Modelling Battery Capacity 68 3.12.4 Simulating a Battery at a Set Power 71 3.12.5 Calculating the Peukert Coefficient 75 3.12.6 Approximate Battery Sizing 76 3.13 In Conclusion 77 References 78 4 Electricity Supply 79 4.1 Normal Existing Domestic and Industrial Electricity Supply 79 4.2 Infrastructure Needed for Charging Electric Vehicles 80 4.3 Electricity Supply Rails 81 4.4 Inductive Power Transfer for Moving Vehicles 82 4.5 Battery Swapping 84 Further Reading 85 5 Fuel Cells 87 5.1 Fuel Cells – A Real Option? 87 5.2 Hydrogen Fuel Cells – Basic Principles 89 5.2.1 Electrode Reactions 89 5.2.2 Different Electrolytes 90 5.2.3 Fuel Cell Electrodes 93 5.3 Fuel Cell Thermodynamics – An Introduction 95 5.3.1 Fuel Cell Efficiency and Efficiency Limits 95 5.3.2 Efficiency and the Fuel Cell Voltage 98 5.3.3 Practical Fuel Cell Voltages 100 5.3.4 The Effect of Pressure and Gas Concentration 101 5.4 Connecting Cells in Series – The Bipolar Plate 102 5.5 Water Management in the PEMFC 106 5.5.1 Introduction to the Water Problem 106 5.5.2 The Electrolyte of a PEMFC 107 5.5.3 Keeping the PEM Hydrated 109 5.6 Thermal Management of the PEMFC 110 5.7 A Complete Fuel Cell System 111 5.8 Practical Efficiency of Fuel Cells 114 References 114 6 Hydrogen as a Fuel – Its Production and Storage 115 6.1 Introduction 115 6.2 Hydrogen as a Fuel 117 6.3 Fuel Reforming 118 6.3.1 Fuel Cell Requirements 118 6.3.2 Steam Reforming 118 6.3.3 Partial Oxidation and Autothermal Reforming 120 6.3.4 Further Fuel Processing – Carbon Monoxide Removal 121 6.3.5 Practical Fuel Processing for Mobile Applications 122 6.3.6 Energy Efficiency of Reforming 123 6.4 Energy Efficiency of Reforming 124 6.5 Hydrogen Storage I – Storage as Hydrogen 124 6.5.1 Introduction to the Problem 124 6.5.2 Safety 124 6.5.3 The Storage of Hydrogen as a Compressed Gas 125 6.5.4 Storage of Hydrogen as a Liquid 127 6.5.5 Reversible Metal Hydride Hydrogen Stores 129 6.5.6 Carbon Nanofibres 131 6.5.7 Storage Methods Compared 131 6.6 Hydrogen Storage II – Chemical Methods 132 6.6.1 Introduction 132 6.6.2 Methanol 133 6.6.3 Alkali Metal Hydrides 135 6.6.4 Sodium Borohydride 136 6.6.5 Ammonia 140 6.6.6 Storage Methods Compared 142 References 143 7 Electric Machines and their Controllers 145 7.1 The ‘Brushed’ DC Electric Motor 145 7.1.1 Operation of the Basic DC Motor 145 7.1.2 Torque Speed Characteristics 147 7.1.3 Controlling the Brushed DC Motor 151 7.1.4 Providing the Magnetic Field for DC Motors 152 7.1.5 DC Motor Efficiency 153 7.1.6 Motor Losses and Motor Size 156 7.1.7 Electric Motors as Brakes 156 7.2 DC Regulation and Voltage Conversion 159 7.2.1 Switching Devices 159 7.2.2 Step-Down or ‘Buck’ Regulators 161 7.2.3 Step-Up or ‘Boost’ Switching Regulator 162 7.2.4 Single-Phase Inverters 165 7.2.5 Three Phase 167 7.3 Brushless Electric Motors 169 7.3.1 Introduction 169 7.3.2 The Brushless DC Motor 169 7.3.3 Switched Reluctance Motors 173 7.3.4 The Induction Motor 177 7.4 Motor Cooling, Efficiency, Size and Mass 179 7.4.1 Improving Motor Efficiency 179 7.4.2 Motor Mass 181 7.5 Electric Machines for Hybrid Vehicles 182 7.6 Linear Motors 185 References 185 8 Electric Vehicle Modelling 187 8.1 Introduction 187 8.2 Tractive Effort 188 8.2.1 Introduction 188 8.2.2 Rolling Resistance Force 188 8.2.3 Aerodynamic Drag 189 8.2.4 Hill Climbing Force 189 8.2.5 Acceleration Force 189 8.2.6 Total Tractive Effort 191 8.3 Modelling Vehicle Acceleration 191 8.3.1 Acceleration Performance Parameters 191 8.3.2 Modelling the Acceleration of an Electric Scooter 193 8.3.3 Modelling the Acceleration of a Small Car 197 8.4 Modelling Electric Vehicle Range 198 8.4.1 Driving Cycles 198 8.4.2 Range Modelling of Battery Electric Vehicles 204 8.4.3 Constant Velocity Range Modelling 210 8.4.4 Other uses of Simulations 210 8.4.5 Range Modelling of Fuel Cell Vehicles 212 8.4.6 Range Modelling of Hybrid Electric Vehicles 215 8.5 Simulations – A Summary 215 References 216 9 Design Considerations 217 9.1 Introduction 217 9.2 Aerodynamic Considerations 217 9.2.1 Aerodynamics and Energy 217 9.2.2 Body/Chassis Aerodynamic Shape 220 9.3 Consideration of Rolling Resistance 222 9.4 Transmission Efficiency 223 9.5 Consideration of Vehicle Mass 227 9.6 Electric Vehicle Chassis and Body Design 229 9.6.1 Body/Chassis Requirements 229 9.6.2 Body/Chassis Layout 230 9.6.3 Body/Chassis Strength, Rigidity and Crash Resistance 231 9.6.4 Designing for Stability 234 9.6.5 Suspension for Electric Vehicles 234 9.6.6 Examples of Chassis used in Modern Battery and Hybrid Electric Vehicles 235 9.6.7 Chassis used in Modern Fuel Cell Electric Vehicles 235 9.7 General Issues in Design 237 9.7.1 Design Specifications 237 9.7.2 Software in the use of Electric Vehicle Design 237 10 Design of Ancillary Systems 239 10.1 Introduction 239 10.2 Heating and Cooling Systems 239 10.3 Design of the Controls 242 10.4 Power Steering 244 10.5 Choice of Tyres 245 10.6 Wing Mirrors, Aerials and Luggage Racks 245 10.7 Electric Vehicle Recharging and Refuelling Systems 245 11 Efficiencies and Carbon Release Comparison 247 11.1 Introduction 247 11.2 Definition of Efficiency 248 11.3 Carbon Dioxide Emission and Chemical Energy in Fuel 248 12 Electric Vehicles and the Environment 253 12.1 Introduction 253 12.2 Vehicle Pollution – The Effects 253 12.3 Vehicle Pollution in Context 256 12.4 The Role of Regulations and Lawmakers 256 Further Reading 258 13 Power Generation for Transport – Particularly for Zero Emissions 259 13.1 Introduction 259 13.2 Power Generation using Fossil Fuels 260 13.3 Alternative and Sustainable Energy 260 13.3.1 Solar Energy 260 13.3.2 Wind Energy 262 13.3.3 Hydroelectricity 263 13.3.4 Tidal Energy 264 13.3.5 Marine Currents 266 13.3.6 Wave Energy 266 13.3.7 Biomass Energy 267 13.3.8 Obtaining Energy from Waste 267 13.3.9 Geothermal Energy 267 13.4 Nuclear Energy 267 13.4.1 Nuclear Fission 267 13.4.2 Nuclear Fusion 268 13.5 In Conclusion 269 Further Reading 269 14 Recent Electric Vehicles 271 14.1 Introduction 271 14.2 Low-Speed Rechargeable Battery Vehicles 271 14.2.1 Electric Bicycles 271 14.2.2 Electric Mobility Aids 272 14.2.3 Low-Speed Vehicles 274 14.3 Battery-Powered Cars and Vans 274 14.3.1 Peugeot 106 and the Partner 274 14.3.2 The GM EV1 275 14.3.3 The Nissan Leaf 279 14.3.4 The Mitsubishi MiEV 279 14.4 Hybrid Vehicles 279 14.4.1 The Honda Insight 280 14.4.2 The Toyota Prius 281 14.4.3 The Chevrolet Volt 283 14.5 Fuel-Cell-Powered Bus 284 14.6 Conventional High-Speed Trains 286 14.6.1 Introduction 286 14.6.2 The Technology of High-Speed Trains 288 14.7 Conclusion 289 References 290 15 The Future of Electric Vehicles 291 15.1 Introduction 291 15.2 The Tesla S 291 15.3 The Honda FCX Clarity 292 15.4 Maglev Trains 292 15.5 Electric Road–Rail Systems 294 15.6 Conclusion 295 Further Reading 296 Appendices: MATLAB® Examples 297 Appendix 1: Performance Simulation of the GM EV1 297 Appendix 2: Importing and Creating Driving Cycles 298 Appendix 3: Simulating One Cycle 300 Appendix 4: Range Simulation of the GM EV1 Electric Car 302 Appendix 5: Electric Scooter Range Modelling 304 Appendix 6: Fuel Cell Range Simulation 306 Appendix 7: Motor Efficiency Plots 308 Index 311
£79.16
John Wiley & Sons Inc Handbook of Power Systems Engineering with Power
Book SynopsisFormerly known as Handbook of Power System Engineering, this second edition provides rigorous revisions to the original treatment of systems analysis together with a substantial new four-chapter section on power electronics applications. Encompassing a whole range of equipment, phenomena, and analytical approaches, this handbook offers a complete overview of power systems and their power electronics applications, and presents a thorough examination of the fundamental principles, combining theories and technologies that are usually treated in separate specialised fields, in a single unified hierarchy. Key features of this new edition: Updates throughout the entire book with new material covering applications to current topics such as brushless generators, speed adjustable pumped storage hydro generation, wind generation, small-hydro generation, solar generation, DC-transmission, SVC, SVG (STATCOM), FACTS, active-filters, UPS and advanced railway traffic appTable of ContentsPREFACE xxi ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS xxiii ABOUT THE AUTHOR xxv INTRODUCTION xxvii 1 OVERHEAD TRANSMISSION LINES AND THEIR CIRCUIT CONSTANTS 1 1.1 Overhead Transmission Lines with LR Constants 1 1.2 Stray Capacitance of Overhead Transmission Lines 10 1.3 Working Inductance and Working Capacitance 18 1.4 Supplement: Proof of Equivalent Radius req () for a Multi-bundled Conductor 25 2 SYMMETRICAL COORDINATE METHOD (SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS) 29 2.1 Fundamental Concept of Symmetrical Components 29 2.2 Definition of Symmetrical Components 31 2.3 Conversion of Three-phase Circuit into Symmetrical Coordinated Circuit 34 2.4 Transmission Lines by Symmetrical Components 36 2.5 Typical Transmission Line Constants 46 2.6 Generator by Symmetrical Components (Easy Description) 49 2.7 Description of Three-phase Load Circuit by Symmetrical Components 52 3 FAULT ANALYSIS BY SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS 53 3.1 Fundamental Concept of Symmetrical Coordinate Method 53 3.2 Line-to-ground Fault (Phase a to Ground Fault: 1fG) 54 3.3 Fault Analysis at Various Fault Modes 59 3.4 Conductor Opening 59 4 FAULT ANALYSIS OF PARALLEL CIRCUIT LINES (INCLUDING SIMULTANEOUS DOUBLE CIRCUIT FAULT) 69 4.1 Two-phase Circuit and its Symmetrical Coordinate Method 69 4.2 Double Circuit Line by Two-phase Symmetrical Transformation 73 4.3 Fault Analysis of Double Circuit Line (General Process) 77 4.4 Single Circuit Fault on the Double Circuit Line 80 4.5 Double Circuit Fault at Single Point f 81 4.6 Simultaneous Double Circuit Faults at Different Points f, F on the Same Line 85 5 PER UNIT METHOD AND INTRODUCTION OF TRANSFORMER CIRCUIT 91 5.1 Fundamental Concept of the PU Method 91 5.2 PU Method for Three-phase Circuits 97 5.3 Three-phase Three-winding Transformer, its Symmetrical Components Equations, and the Equivalent Circuit 99 5.4 Base Quantity Modification of Unitized Impedance 110 5.5 Autotransformer 111 5.6 Numerical Example to Find the Unitized Symmetrical Equivalent Circuit 112 5.7 Supplement: Transformation from Equation 5.18 to Equation 5.19 122 6 THE ab0 COORDINATE METHOD (CLARKE COMPONENTS) AND ITS APPLICATION 127 6.1 Definition of ab0 Coordinate Method (ab0 Components) 127 6.2 Interrelation Between ab0 Components and Symmetrical Components 130 6.3 Circuit Equation and Impedance by the ab0 Coordinate Method 134 6.4 Three-phase Circuit in ab0 Components 134 6.5 Fault Analysis by ab0 Components 139 7 SYMMETRICAL AND ab0 COMPONENTS AS ANALYTICAL TOOLS FOR TRANSIENT PHENOMENA 145 7.1 The Symbolic Method and its Application to Transient Phenomena 145 7.2 Transient Analysis by Symmetrical and ab0 Components 147 7.3 Comparison of Transient Analysis by Symmetrical and ab0 Components 150 8 NEUTRAL GROUNDING METHODS 153 8.1 Comparison of Neutral Grounding Methods 153 8.2 Overvoltages on the Unfaulted Phases Caused by a Line-to-ground fault 158 8.3 Arc-suppression Coil (Petersen Coil) Neutral Grounded Method 159 8.4 Possibility of Voltage Resonance 160 9 VISUAL VECTOR DIAGRAMS OF VOLTAGES AND CURRENTS UNDER FAULT CONDITIONS 169 9.1 Three-phase Fault: 3fS, 3fG (Solidly Neutral Grounding System, High-resistive Neutral Grounding System) 169 9.2 Phase b–c Fault: 2fS (for Solidly Neutral Grounding System, High-resistive Neutral Grounding System) 170 9.3 Phase a to Ground Fault: 1fG (Solidly Neutral Grounding System) 173 9.4 Double Line-to-ground (Phases b and c) Fault: 2fG (Solidly Neutral Grounding System) 175 9.5 Phase a Line-to-ground Fault: 1fG (High-resistive Neutral Grounding System) 178 9.6 Double Line-to-ground (Phases b and c) Fault: 2fG (High-resistive Neutral Grounding System) 180 10 THEORY OF GENERATORS 183 10.1 Mathematical Description of a Synchronous Generator 183 10.2 Introduction of d–q–0 Method (d–q–0 Components) 191 10.3 Transformation of Generator Equations from a–b–c to d–q–0 Domain 195 10.4 Generator Operating Characteristics and its Vector Diagrams on d- and q-axes Plane 208 10.5 Transient Phenomena and the Generator’s Transient Reactances 211 10.6 Symmetrical Equivalent Circuits of Generators 213 10.7 Laplace-transformed Generator Equations and the Time Constants 220 10.8 Measuring of Generator Reactances 224 10.9 Relations Between the d–q–0 and a–b–0 Domains 228 10.10 Detailed Calculation of Generator Short-circuit Transient Current under Load Operation 228 10.11 Supplement 234 11 APPARENT POWER AND ITS EXPRESSION IN THE 0–1–2 AND d–q–0 DOMAINS 241 11.1 Apparent Power and its Symbolic Expression for Arbitrary Waveform Voltages and Currents 241 11.2 Apparent Power of a Three-phase Circuit in the 0–1–2 Domain 243 11.3 Apparent Power in the d–q–0 Domain 246 12 GENERATING POWER AND STEADY-STATE STABILITY 251 12.1 Generating Power and the P–d and Q–d Curves 251 12.2 Power Transfer Limit between a Generator and a Power System Network 254 12.3 Supplement: Derivation of Equation 12.17 from Equations 12.15st and 12.16 261 13 THE GENERATOR AS ROTATING MACHINERY 263 13.1 Mechanical (Kinetic) Power and Generating (Electrical) Power 263 13.2 Kinetic Equation of the Generator 265 13.3 Mechanism of Power Conversion from Rotor Mechanical Power to Stator Electrical Power 268 13.4 Speed Governors, the Rotating Speed Control Equipment for Generators 274 14 TRANSIENT/DYNAMIC STABILITY, P–Q–V CHARACTERISTICS AND VOLTAGE STABILITY OF A POWER SYSTEM 281 14.1 Steady-state Stability, Transient Stability, Dynamic Stability 281 14.2 Mechanical Acceleration Equation for the Two-generator System and Disturbance Response 282 14.3 Transient Stability and Dynamic Stability (Case Study) 284 14.4 Four-terminal Circuit and the Pd Curve under Fault Conditions and Operational Reactance 286 14.5 PQV Characteristics and Voltage Stability (Voltage Instability Phenomena) 290 14.6 Supplement 1: Derivation of DV/DP, DV/DQ Sensitivity Equation (Equation 14.20 from Equation 14.19) 298 14.7 Supplement 2: Derivation of Power Circle Diagram Equation (Equation 14.31 from Equation 14.18 s) 299 15 GENERATOR CHARACTERISTICS WITH AVR AND STABLE OPERATION LIMIT 301 15.1 Theory of AVR, and Transfer Function of Generator System with AVR 301 15.2 Duties of AVR and Transfer Function of Generator + AVR 305 15.3 Response Characteristics of Total System and Generator Operational Limit 308 15.4 Transmission Line Charging by Generator with AVR 312 15.5 Supplement 1: Derivation of ed (s), eq(s) as Function of ef (s) (Equation 15.9 from Equations 15.7 and 15.8) 313 15.6 Supplement 2: Derivation of eG(s) as Function of ef (s) (Equation 15.10 from Equations 15.8 and 15.9) 314 16 OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS AND THE CAPABILITY LIMITS OF GENERATORS 319 16.1 General Equations of Generators in Terms of p–q Coordinates 319 16.2 Rating Items and the Capability Curve of the Generator 322 16.3 Leading Power-factor (Under-excitation Domain) Operation, and UEL Function by AVR 328 16.4 V–Q (Voltage and Reactive Power) Control by AVR 334 16.5 Thermal Generators’ Weak Points (Negative-sequence Current, Higher Harmonic Current, Shaft-torsional Distortion) 337 16.6 General Description of Modern Thermal/Nuclear TG Unit 346 16.7 Supplement: Derivation of Equation 16.14 from Equation 16.9 351 17 R–X COORDINATES AND THE THEORY OF DIRECTIONAL DISTANCE RELAYS 353 17.1 Protective Relays, Their Mission and Classification 353 17.2 Principle of Directional Distance Relays and R–X Coordinates Plane 355 17.3 Impedance Locus in R–X Coordinates in Case of a Fault (under No-load Condition) 358 17.4 Impedance Locus under Normal States and Step-out Condition 365 17.5 Impedance Locus under Faults with Load Flow Conditions 370 17.6 Loss of Excitation Detection by DZ-Relays 371 17.7 Supplement 1: The Drawing Method for the Locus () of Equation 17.22 372 17.8 Supplement 2: The Drawing Method for () of Equation 17.24 374 18 TRAVELLING-WAVE (SURGE) PHENOMENA 379 18.1 Theory of Travelling-wave Phenomena along Transmission Lines (Distributed-constants Circuit) 379 18.2 Approximation of Distributed-constants Circuit and Accuracy of Concentrated-constants Circuit 390 18.3 Behaviour of Travelling Wave at a Transition Point 391 18.4 Surge Overvoltages and their Three Different and Confusing Notations 395 18.5 Behaviour of Travelling Waves at a Lightning-strike Point 396 18.6 Travelling-wave Phenomena of Three-phase Transmission Line 398 18.7 Line-to-ground and Line-to-line Travelling Waves 400 18.8 The Reflection Lattice and Transient Behaviour Modes 402 18.9 Supplement 1: General Solution Equation 18.10 for Differential Equation 18.9 405 18.10 Supplement 2: Derivation of Equation 18.19 from Equation 18.18 407 19 SWITCHING SURGE PHENOMENA BY CIRCUIT-BREAKERS AND LINE SWITCHES 411 19.1 Transient Calculation of a Single-Phase Circuit by Breaker Opening 411 19.2 Calculation of Transient Recovery Voltages Across a Breaker's Three Poles by 3fS Fault Tripping 420 19.3 Fundamental Concepts of High-voltage Circuit-breakers 430 19.4 Current Tripping by Circuit-breakers: Actual Phenomena 434 19.5 Overvoltages Caused by Breaker Closing (Close-switching Surge) 444 19.6 Resistive Tripping and Resistive Closing by Circuit-breakers 447 19.7 Switching Surge Caused by Line Switches (Disconnecting Switches) 453 19.8 Supplement 1: Calculation of the Coefficients k1k4 of Equation 19.6 455 19.9 Supplement 2: Calculation of the Coefficients k1k6 of Equation 19.17 455 20 OVERVOLTAGE PHENOMENA 459 20.1 Classification of Overvoltage Phenomena 459 20.2 Fundamental (Power) Frequency Overvoltages (Non-resonant Phenomena) 459 20.3 Lower Frequency Harmonic Resonant Overvoltages 463 20.4 Switching Surges 467 20.5 Overvoltage Phenomena by Lightning Strikes 469 21 INSULATION COORDINATION 475 21.1 Overvoltages as Insulation Stresses 475 21.2 Fundamental Concept of Insulation Coordination 481 21.3 Countermeasures on Transmission Lines to Reduce Overvoltages and Flashover 483 21.4 Overvoltage Protection at Substations 488 21.5 Insulation Coordination Details 500 21.6 Transfer Surge Voltages Through the Transformer, and Generator Protection 511 21.7 Internal High-frequency Voltage Oscillation of Transformers Caused by Incident Surge 520 21.8 Oil-filled Transformers Versus Gas-filled Transformers 526 21.9 Supplement: Proof that Equation 21.21 is the Solution of Equation 21.20 529 22 WAVEFORM DISTORTION AND LOWER ORDER HARMONIC RESONANCE 531 22.1 Causes and Influences of Waveform Distortion 531 22.2 Fault Current Waveform Distortion Caused on Cable Lines 534 23 POWER CABLES AND POWER CABLE CIRCUITS 541 23.1 Power Cables and Their General Features 541 23.2 Distinguishing Features of Power Cable 545 23.3 Circuit Constants of Power Cables 550 23.4 Metallic Sheath and Outer Covering 557 23.5 Cross-bonding Metallic-shielding Method 559 23.6 Surge Voltages: Phenomena Travelling Through a Power Cable 563 23.7 Surge Voltages Phenomena on Cable and Overhead Line Jointing Terminal 566 23.8 Surge Voltages at Cable End Terminal Connected to GIS 568 24 APPROACHES FOR SPECIAL CIRCUITS 573 24.1 On-load Tap-changing Transformer (LTC Transformer) 573 24.2 Phase-shifting Transformer 575 24.3 Woodbridge Transformer and Scott Transformer 579 24.4 Neutral Grounding Transformer 583 24.5 Mis-connection of Three-phase Orders 585 25 THEORY OF INDUCTION GENERATORS AND MOTORS 591 25.1 Introduction of Induction Motors and Their Driving Control 591 25.2 Theory of Three-phase Induction Machines (IM) with Wye-connected Rotor Windings 592 25.3 Squirrel-cage Type Induction Motors 612 25.4 Supplement 1: Calculation of Equations (25.17), (25.18), and (25.19) 627 26 POWER ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND THE FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPT OF SWITCHING 629 26.1 Power Electronics and the Fundamental Concept 629 26.2 Power Switching by Power Devices 630 26.3 Snubber Circuit 633 26.4 Voltage Conversion by Switching 635 26.5 Power Electronic Devices 635 26.6 Mathematical Backgrounds for Power Electronic Application Analysis 643 27 POWER ELECTRONIC CONVERTERS 651 27.1 AC to DC Conversion: Rectifier by a Diode 651 27.2 AC to DC Controlled Conversion: Rectifier by Thyristors 661 27.3 DC to DC Converters (DC to DC Choppers) 671 27.4 DC to AC Inverters 680 27.5 PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) Control of Inverters 687 27.6 AC to AC Converter (Cycloconverter) 691 27.7 Supplement: Transformer Core Flux Saturation (Flux Bias Caused by DC Biased Current Component) 692 28 POWER ELECTRONICS APPLICATIONS IN UTILITY POWER SYSTEMS AND SOME INDUSTRIES 695 28.1 Introduction 695 28.2 Motor Drive Application 695 28.3 Generator Excitation System 704 28.4 (Double-fed) Adjustable Speed Pumped Storage Generator-motor Unit 706 28.5 Wind Generation 710 28.6 Small Hydro Generation 715 28.7 Solar Generation (Photovoltaic Generation) 716 28.8 Static Var Compensators (SVC: Thyristor Based External Commutated Scheme) 717 28.9 Active Filters 726 28.10 High-Voltage DC Transmission (HVDC Transmission) 734 28.11 FACTS (Flexible AC Transmission Systems) Technology 736 28.12 Railway Applications 741 28.13 UPSs (Uninterruptible Power Supplies) 745 APPENDIX A – MATHEMATICAL FORMULAE 747 APPENDIX B – MATRIX EQUATION FORMULAE 751 ANALYTICAL METHODS INDEX 757 COMPONENTS INDEX 759 SUBJECT INDEX 763
£108.86
Taylor & Francis Ltd Extenics and Innovation Methods Communications in
Book SynopsisSociety forges ahead in the process of solving various contradictory problems and it is ceaselessly innovating. It is the desire of mankind to use computers and computing networks to help deal with contradictory problems and to conduct innovative activities. Using formal models to discuss object extension and the possibility of change, as well as the rules and methods for innovation, Extenics is applied to solving contradictory problems and has become the basic theory, method and instrument to achieve this goal. In the 30 years since the foundation of Extenics, researchers have built relatively complete theoretical systems extension theory', studied formal and modeling innovation methods extension innovation methods', and launched the applications in various fields such as information, design, automation and management etc. extension engineering'. Extension theory, the extension innovation method and extension engineering jointly constitute the new disciplineExtenics. At the Table of ContentsCommittee setup; Thirty years’ study on extension theory; Overview of extension innovation methods; A decade of TRIZ research at ETRIA conferences; Generalizations in Extenics of the location value and dependent function from a single finite interval to 2D, 3D, and n-D spaces; New progress in extension theory; Study on semantics of extension logic; Research on the creative imitation innovation based on basic elements; Process element on expansion of the random process’s mean function and variance function; Extension knowledge system; Semantic extension distance in high dimension; Research progress in affair-element and its application; Evolutionary innovations of formalization and digitalization; Extension framework to interpret human behavior; A personalized recommendation algorithm based on Extenics; Research on building customer value ontology based on extension knowledge; Data association rules mining based on extension theory; Mining model of contradictory information; Application of Extenics technology in SN method; On the systematic approach to enhance the quality of divergent thinking in an information age; Intelligent knowledge discovery based on decision tree and extension theory; Build uniform content label for the next generation internet by Extenics; Watermark techniques based on extension evaluation and SVR in multi-wavelet domain; Extension hybrid force-position control of mechatronics systems; Solving of the contradictory problem of the precision-stability by using the extension theory; Extension theory applied to real time control for restoring robot dynamical equilibrium; A variable cross-section method to obtain ideal basic shape for car body based on extension engineering; Study on adaptive switching control for autonomous surface vehicle; Design of the stair-climbing stroller based on the extension innovative approach; Coordination for regional water resource carrying capacities based on conduction effect; Configuration design similarity analysis based on extension of case reasoning; Planning of regional mine and extension thinking modes; Primary research on intelligent extension architectural programming based on extension big data mining; Discussion on the basic process of architectural design innovation based on Extenics; Research on the architectural variable design based on the space element; Use Extenics to solve the problem of the deep device of vertical cultivators; The opposite problem analysis for city disaster prevention and reduction plan based on Extenics; Extension data classification mining oriented to interior design; Design “reappearance”—the extension architectural design analysis about spatial issues; Selection and evaluation of mechanical motion scheme based on extension theory; An extension design model of product using process; Innovate the core tools of TRIZ and construct new contradiction solution matrix for footwear conceptual design by extension theories; Innovative design of mechanical products based on VE/TRIZ 321; Research on “Requirement-Function” conversion model based-on interaction design theory
£147.25
Taylor & Francis Ltd Predicting Vehicle Trajectory
Book SynopsisThis book concentrates on improving the prediction of a vehicle's future trajectory, particularly on non-straight paths. Having an accurate prediction of where a vehicle is heading is crucial for the system to reliably determine possible path intersections of more than one vehicle at the same time. The US DOT will be mandating that all vehicle manufacturers begin implementing V2V and V2I systems, so very soon collision avoidance systems will no longer rely on line of sight sensors, but instead will be able to take into account another vehicle's spatial movements to determine if the future trajectories of the vehicles will intersect at the same time. Furthermore, the book introduces the reader to some improvements when predicting the future trajectory of a vehicle and presents a novel temporary solution on how to speed up the implementation of such V2V collision avoidance systems. Additionally, it evaluates whether smartphones can be used for trajectory predictions, in an attempt to Trade Review"I found specifically very important in this book the research conducted by the authors to properly handle error accumulation from missing data from offline sensors, and running the system at the fastest rate possible greatly reducing the prediction errors in non-straight paths (which are the harder task to predict). Moreover, I found very interesting the idea of using every-day equipment (smartphones) as a temporary (yet effective) solution to enable older vehicles to V2V and V2I technologies. It is also very important that the evaluation revealed that, in some cases, the smartphone prediction errors are similar to more expensive sensors in V2I. This book addresses solutions specifically for improved trajectory prediction in traffic networks. There is no question that this short book may be a valuable handbook for engineers, especially those who work on the specific problem trying to engage as much as possible users/vehicles in the V2V or V2I ecosystem."—IEEE Intelligent Transportation Systems Magazine, Fall 2017Table of ContentsPreface. Improving Estimation of Vehicle’s Trajectory Using Latest Global Positioning System with Kalman Filtering. Intelligent Forecasting Using Dead Reckoning with Dynamic Errors. Trajectory Estimations Using Smartphones. Summary of Vehicle Trajectories’ Prediction Methods Evaluated. Conclusions. Appendix.
£109.25
Taylor & Francis Ltd Mining Multimedia Documents
Book SynopsisThe information age has led to an explosion in the amount of information available to the individual and the means by which it is accessed, stored, viewed, and transferred. In particular, the growth of the internet has led to the creation of huge repositories of multimedia documents in a diverse range of scientific and professional fields, as well as the tools to extract useful knowledge from them.Mining Multimedia Documents is a must-read for researchers, practitioners, and students working at the intersection of data mining and multimedia applications. It investigates various techniques related to mining multimedia documents based on text, image, and video features. It provides an insight into the open research problems benefitting advanced undergraduates, graduate students, researchers, scientists and practitioners in the fields of medicine, biology, production, education, government, national security and economics.Table of ContentsMining Multimedia Documents: An Overview. Fuzzy Decision Trees for Text Document Clustering. Towards Modeling Semi-Automatic Data Warehouses: Guided by Social Interactions. Multi-Agent System for Text Mining. The transformation of User Requirements in UML Diagrams: An Overview. An Overview of Information Extraction using Textual Case-Based Reasoning. Opinions Classification. Documents Classification Based on Text and Image Features. Content-Based Image Retrieval (CBIR). Mining Knowledge in Medical Image Databases. Segmentation for Medical Image Mining. Biological Data Mining: Techniques and Applications. Video Text Extraction and Mining. Recent Advancement in Multimedia Content using Deep Learning.
£140.00
Taylor & Francis Ltd Modeling and Design of Electromagnetic
Book SynopsisModeling and Design of Electromagnetic Compatibility for High-Speed Printed Circuit Boards and Packaging presents the electromagnetic modelling and design of three major electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) issues related to the high-speed printed circuit board (PCB) and electronic packages: signal integrity (SI), power integrity (PI), and electromagnetic interference (EMI). The emphasis is put on two essential passive components of PCBs and packages: the power distribution network and the signal distribution network. This book includes two parts. Part one talks about the field-circuit hybrid methods used for the EMC modeling, including the modal method, the integral equation method, the cylindrical wave expansion method and the de-embedding method. Part two illustrates EMC design methods and explores the applications of novel metamaterials and two-dimensional materials on traditional EMC problems.This book is designed to enhance worthwhile electromagTable of ContentsIntroduction. Modal Fields of Power/Ground Planes and Grids. Integral Equation Solutions of Power Distribution Network. Via Modeling. PCB-Level EMC Controls and Designs. Interposer EMC Design. Applications of New Structures and Materials.
£126.00
Taylor & Francis Ltd MIMO Wireless Communications over Generalized
Book SynopsisMIMO systems have been known to better the quality of service for wireless communication systems. This book discusses emerging techniques in MIMO systems to reduce complexities and keep benefits unaffected at the same time. It discusses about benefits and shortcomings of various MIMO technologies like spatial multiplexing, space time coding, spatial modulation, transmit antenna selection and various power allocation schemes to optimize the performance. Crux of the book is focus on MIMO communication over generalized fading channels as they can model the propagation of signals in a non-homogeneous environment. Relevant MATLAB codes are also included in the appendices. Book is aimed at graduate students and researchers in electronics and wireless engineering specifically interested in electromagnetic theory, antennas and propagation, future wireless systems, signal processing.Table of Contents1. Introduction to MIMO Systems. 2. Generalized Fading Channels. 3. Spatial Multiplexing. 4. Spatial Modulation. 5. Transmit Antenna Selection. 6. Space Time Block Coded MIMO Systems. 7. MIMO for 5G Mobile Communications. A. Appendix. B. MATLAB codes for generating results.
£137.75
Taylor & Francis Ltd Digital Control Systems
Book SynopsisThe objective of this book is to provide a collection of solved problems on control systems, with an emphasis on practical problems. System functionality is described, the modeling process is explained, the problem solution is introduced, and the derived results are discussed. Each chapter ends with a discussion on applying MATLAB, LabVIEW, and/or Comprehensive Control to the previously introduced concepts. The aim of the book is to help an average reader understand the concepts of control systems through problems and applications. The solutions are based directly on math formulas given in extensive tables throughout the text.Table of ContentsINTRODUCTION. Z-TRANSFORM. TRANSFER FUNCTION. TRANSFER FUNCTION DISCRETIZATION. STATE-SPACE REPRESENTATION. STABILITY OF DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS. TIME AND HARMONIC RESPONSE ANALYSIS STEADY-STATE ERRORS. COMPENSATION OF DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS. SIMULATION TOOLS: MATLAB, SIMULINK, LABVIEW, COMPREHENSIVE CONTROL.
£155.00
Taylor & Francis Ltd Industrial Communication Technology Handbook
Book SynopsisFeaturing contributions from major technology vendors, industry consortia, and government and private research establishments, the Industrial Communication Technology Handbook, Second Edition provides comprehensive and authoritative coverage of wire- and wireless-based specialized communication networks used in plant and factory automation, automotive applications, avionics, building automation, energy and power systems, train applications, and more.New to the Second Edition: 46 brand-new chapters and 21 substantially revised chapters Inclusion of the latest, most significant developments in specialized communication technologies and systems Addition of new application domains for specialized networks The Industrial Communication Technology Handbook, Second Edition supplies readers with a thorough understanding of the application-specific requirements for communication services and their supporting technologies. It is useful to a broad spectrum of professionals involved in the conception, design, development, standardization, and use of specialized communication networks as well as academic institutions engaged in engineering education and vocational training.Table of ContentsField Area and Control Networks. Industrial Ethernet. Fault-Tolerant Clock Synchronization in Industrial Automation Networks. Accessing Factory Floor Data. Safety Technologies in Industrial Networks and Network Security. Wireless Industrial Networks. Time-Triggered Communication. Networks in Avionics and Aerospace. Automotive Communication Technologies. Networks in Building Automation. Networks in Energy and Power Systems. Communication Networks and Services in Railway Applications. SEMI. Emerging Protocols and Technologies.
£96.99
Taylor & Francis Ltd Measurement Instrumentation and Sensors Handbook
Book SynopsisThe Second Edition of the bestselling Measurement, Instrumentation, and Sensors Handbook brings together all aspects of the design and implementation of measurement, instrumentation, and sensors. Reflecting the current state of the art, it describes the use of instruments and techniques for performing practical measurements in engineering, physics, chemistry, and the life sciences and discusses processing systems, automatic data acquisition, reduction and analysis, operation characteristics, accuracy, errors, calibrations, and the incorporation of standards for control purposes. Organized according to measurement problem, the Spatial, Mechanical, Thermal, and Radiation Measurement volume of the Second Edition: Contains contributions from field experts, new chapters, and updates to all 96 existing chapters Covers instrumentation and measurement concepts, spatial and mechanical variables, displacement, acoustics, flow and spot velocity, radiation, wireless sensors and instrumentation, and control and human factors A concise and useful reference for engineers, scientists, academic faculty, students, designers, managers, and industry professionals involved in instrumentation and measurement research and development, Measurement, Instrumentation, and Sensors Handbook, Second Edition: Spatial, Mechanical, Thermal, and Radiation Measurement provides readers with a greater understanding of advanced applications.Trade Review"Engineers, involved with instrumentation and measurement, will find this book an outstanding 'go to' resource, with very broad coverage and detailed descriptions of modern measurement methods and techniques."—IEEE Electrical Insulation Magazine, January/February 2015Table of ContentsInstrumentation and Measurement Concepts. Spatial Variables. Displacement. Mechanical Variables. Acoustics. Flow and Spot Velocity. Thermal and Temperature Measurement. Radiation. Wireless Instrumentation. Control and Human Factors. Appendix: Units and Conversions.
£87.39
Taylor & Francis Ltd Finite Element Analyses of Eddy Current Effects
Book SynopsisEddy currents, soâcalled owing to their general shape like eddies, manifest as induced currents in all metallic â magnetic or nonâmagnetic â regions exposed to time varying or generally alternating magnetic fields whether of power or higher frequencies. It is imperative to apply appropriate analyses to assess the magnitude and consequences of induced eddy currents as required. Therefore, book aims at a comprehensive study of various aspects of eddy currents, from a detailed account of the basic phenomenon to their utilization in various applications, and their detrimental effects, esp. in large Turbogenerators. It gives detailed description of the finiteâelement technique(s) developed by the author to analyse the steadyâstate and transient heating of key regions of turbogenerators of ratings from 120 MW to 500 MW when exposed to negativeâsequence currents under unbalanced fault conditions.Table of ContentsEddy Currents. The Eddy Currents. Eddy-current and Power Loss. Utilisation of Eddy Currents. Eddy Currents and Turbogenerators. Finite Elements for Eddy Current Analyses. Finite Elements: General. Finite Element Solution of Representative Problems. Finite Elements for Turbogenerator Problems. Finite Element Analysis Applied to Turbogenerators. Finite Element Analysis of Eddy Currents in TGs and Temperature Rise. The Model Turbogenerator– General. The Model Turbogenerator – Representative Studies. Case Studies of Large Turbogenerators. Appendices. References and Bibliography. Subject Index. Author Index.
£171.00